JP2021029786A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving an amusement of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured so that: about a pseudo continuation performance through a success performance in a suggestive performance, an execution ratio of the pseudo continuation performance is 50% when the suggestive performance and a specific performance are not executed concurrently, and an execution ratio thereof is 90% when the suggestive performance and the specific performance are executed concurrently. The game machine increases a success ratio of the suggestive performance having a period overlapped to a specific performance relative to a success ratio of the suggestive performance having no period overlapped to the specific performance. In other words, the game machine increases an execution ratio of a notice performance through the suggestive performance having a period overlapped to the specific performance, relative to an execution ratio of a notice performance through the suggestive performance having no period overlapped to the specific performance. Therefore, the game machine can generate change to an expectation feeling and reliability of the notice performance which is according to whether or not the suggestive performance and the specific performance are executed concurrently, and can diversify a notice content which is felt by a player.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 101

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Suggestion that the execution of the pseudo-ream effect is announced (notice that there is a possibility of execution) by inciting whether or not the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped, and that the pseudo-ream effect is suggested by the temporary stop of the pseudo-ream symbol There is a game machine that performs the production.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-18653

However, since the above-mentioned game machine has few variations of suggestive effects, the effects may become rutted and it may not be possible to sufficiently improve the interest.
In one aspect, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, a game machine as shown below is provided. The game machine includes a notice effect means capable of executing the notice effect, a suggestion effect means capable of executing the suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the notice effect, and a specific effect means capable of executing the specific effect in a period overlapping with the suggestion effect. ,including. The suggestion effect means can suggest the execution of the advance notice effect by making the suggestion effect a specific effect mode, and the suggestion effect to be executed overlapping with the specific effect and the suggestion effect to be executed without overlapping with the specific effect. Have.

According to one aspect, the interest of the game can be improved in the game machine.

It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the game machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of the effect control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collective display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 5) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen during a game of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative pattern of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen during a game of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop display using the decorative symbol of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the swing of the background part of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display of the 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol A of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the highlighting and the ambiguous (non-highlighting) display of the outline of the symbol of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing of the highlighting and the ambiguous (non-highlighting) display of the outline of the symbol of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing of the highlighting and the ambiguous (non-highlighting) display of the outline of the design of the modification of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop display using the decorative symbol of the modification of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the message display effect of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the outline display of the small symbol group of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol of the modification of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the contour display switching target part in the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the gaming performance of the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transition of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the game sequence of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the game sequence of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display pattern selection table of the special figure 2 game of the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the display device of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the symbol display area of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol to be displayed in the symbol display area in the special figure game of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the hold display area of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the generation animation of the hold display of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the symbol defect effect of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the symbol defect effect of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows an example of the symbol defect effect of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol defect effect of the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the loss effect at the time of the hold display occurrence of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the loss effect at the time of the hold display occurrence of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the hold display part of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the highlighting display and the ambiguous (non-emphasis) display of the outline of the symbol during the defect effect of the modification of the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop display using the decorative symbol during the defect effect of the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol during the defect effect of the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display mode corresponding to the variation display command A of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display mode corresponding to the variation display command B of the 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display mode corresponding to the variation display command C of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen during a game of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen during a game of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows an example of the display screen during a game of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) which shows an example of the display screen during a game of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 5) which shows an example of the display screen during a game of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice effect pattern selection table and the advance notice effect pattern reliability of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect pattern selection probability of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific pattern selection ratio (hit) for each notice production of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the specific pattern selection ratio (hit) by the advance notice effect of the modification of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the specific pattern selection ratio (hit) by the advance notice effect of the modification of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | modification of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | variation | embodiment 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the appearance timing of the confirmation notice effect of the modification of the 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during a game of the modification of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during a game of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the double structure of the hold icon of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the display mode of the inner core icon of 5th Embodiment, and the degree of expectation. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode which unclearly guides the expectation degree of the inner core icon of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the display mode of the outer shell icon of 5th Embodiment, and changeability. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the change pattern of the hold icon of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the change pattern of the hold icon of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the double structure of the hold icon of the modification of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold standby display, hold digestion display, and the inner core icon string of the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold digestion icon and hold change in hold icon of the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the hold icon after the hold icon roulette effect of the modification of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the holding pedestal display of the modification of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the holding pedestal display of the modification of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows an example of the holding pedestal display of the modification of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the suggestion effect of the 6th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the derivation ratio of each suggestion content of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen during a game of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen during a game of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows an example of the display screen during a game of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) which shows an example of the display screen during a game of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 5) which shows an example of the display screen during a game of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the effect composition example at the time of performing the suggestion effect a plurality of times within one variation in the game machine of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the suggestion effect of the modification 1 of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the suggestion effect of the modification 2 of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect of the modification 2 of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the suggestion effect of the modification 3 of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect of the modification 3 of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the suggestion effect of the modification 4 of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display mode corresponding to the variation display command of 7th Embodiment (the 1). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display mode corresponding to the variation display command of 7th Embodiment (the 2). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display mode corresponding to the variation display command of 7th Embodiment (the 3). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display mode corresponding to the variation display command of 7th Embodiment (the 4). It is a figure which shows an example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example (the 1) of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example (the 2) of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example (the 3) of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example (the 4th) of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example (the 5) of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the pseudo-continuous production of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example (the 1) of the timer effect of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example (the 2) of the timer effect of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the temporary stop at the time of reach of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the SP reach effect of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the display example of the production stock of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the display example of the production stock of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the display example of the production stock of 7th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (support frame).
It is assembled to 11 so that it can be opened and closed. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes), etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are abnormal. A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in a notification color (for example, red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the contents of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game ball paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided.

Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, an effect button 25 used for an intervention operation for a game effect or the like 25
Is provided. The effect button 25 functions as an effect operation receiving unit that receives an intervention operation for the game effect, and also serves as an effect unit that can produce the effect in a required mode (for example, a light emitting mode, an operation mode such as vibration or protrusion, etc.). Function. Further, on the left edge portion of the upper plate 21, an option setting unit 29 is provided in which the player sets various options. The option setting unit 29 includes a crosshair cursor switch capable of accepting input operations in four directions, a central switch capable of accepting a decision operation in the center of the crosshair cursor switch, and a volume control etc. at the periphery of the crosshair cursor switch. There are two accessory switches used for. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

The game machine 10 operates the effect button 25 (push button) (for example, a pressing operation).
Based on the player's operation received from the effect button switch 25a (see FIG. 4) for detecting the above, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened. For example, the effect in which the operation of the player is intervened includes the effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. It is possible to operate the character displayed on the 41 and stop the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41. For such player operation intervention, not only the effect button 25 but also the switch of the option setting unit 29 (cross cursor switch,
Either one or more of the central switch and the attached switch) may be used. In FIG. 4, which will be described later, each switch of the option setting unit 29 is collectively set as a setting switch 29a.
It is expressed as.

Further, to the right of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge that is operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire towards (see Figure 2). Further, when the player operates any one or more of the above-mentioned setting switches 29a (cross cursor switch, center switch, attached switch) of the option setting unit 29, for example, the speakers 19a and 19b emit radiation. You can set the volume and the brightness of the game board 30.

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30.
It is configured to be surrounded by 3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, on the display screen, an image for directing based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image,
Fanfare display image, ending display image, etc.) are displayed.

Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 has a display device 4 from the state shown in FIG.
It is possible to operate toward the center of 1.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal drawing start gate 34 (the game ball that passes through the normal drawing start gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are two general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of the special variable winning device 38 described later. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 forming a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). (Starting port 1) is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.
Further, at a position below the starting gate 34 in the normal drawing, on the right side of the center case 40
A normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is provided. The ordinary variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) is provided with a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The 37b is always in a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in because it is almost vertical.
Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side falls to the right and normally fluctuates. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state. The ordinary variable winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary electric accessory (general electric).

A flow path 91 through which the game ball can flow down is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and the game ball that has not won the normal variable winning device 37 flows downward through the flow down path 91. A guide portion 93 is provided below the flow path 91. The guiding portion 93 has an inclined surface whose upper surface 94 descends to the left, and the upper surface 94 catches the game ball flowing downward and guides the game ball to the left where the special variable winning device 38 described later exists. ..

Further, at the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. It is set up. The special variable winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 3
It has 8c, and the opening / closing member 3 depends on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game.
From the closed state in which the 8c closes the large winning opening (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player), the opening / closing member 38c retracts to an open state that can accept the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (a state that is advantageous to the player). Convert. That is, the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 38c driven by the large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device.
A large prize opening) is provided, and during the big hit game state (first special game state) based on the results of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and the small hit game state (small hit game state) based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game. During the second special game state), the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). Is to be given. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. ..

Further, the special variable winning device 38 includes an induction flow path for guiding the winning game ball in the winning opening, and a V flow path formed by branching from the induction flow path. The special variable winning device 38 is provided with a V door at a position that serves as an inflow portion of the V flow path. The V-door slides in the front-rear direction by the specific region solenoid 38d (see FIG. 3) to prevent the game ball from flowing into the V flow path, and the V door retracts backward to prevent the game ball from flowing into the V flow path. It can be changed to a permissible state that allows inflow. Further, the special variable winning device 38 is provided with a specific area switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball flowing into the V flow path.

In the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special game state is not determined by the jackpot symbol, but the game ball flows into the V flow path in the special game state and the specific area switch. Based on the fact that it is detected by 38e, it is set to be in a high probability state.

Further, the special variable winning device 38 may be provided with a plurality (for example, two) of large winning opening switches 38a. Further, the special variable winning device 38 is not limited to one, and two may be provided, and when there are a plurality of large winning openings, the large winning opening switch 38a is about one or two, respectively. , X pieces (see FIG. 3) may be provided as a whole.

Further, a warp opening (warp entrance) 39a is provided on the left side of the center case 40. The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part of the game ball is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp exit 39b is located directly above the starting winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warp exit 39b is the starting winning opening 36.
It will be easier to win a prize.

In the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the game areas 32 in which the game ball flows down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed) to start the starting winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 (general winning opening on the right side of the special variable winning device 38). You can aim to win a prize (excluding 35), and by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37,
It is possible to aim for a prize in a special variable prize device 38 or the like.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are connected. A batch display device 50 that displays various information and displays a game with a variable display of a general map triggered by a prize.
Is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs and the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a normal symbol display unit. It includes 55, a normal drawing hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the batch display device 50 will be described later.

Next, the control system of the game machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a CPU.
It includes a data bus 140 or the like that connects the unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference for an operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit of the gaming microcomputer 111. Oscillator circuit that generates the clock
It has a crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are DCs (Di) generated by the power supply device 400.
rect Current) A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as 32V, DC12V, DC5V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 generates an AC (DC 32V) DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply.
Alternating Current) -DC 12V, DC 5V from DC converter or DC 32V voltage
Ordinary power supply unit 4 having a DC-DC converter or the like that generates a lower level DC voltage such as
10. It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM (Random Access Memory) of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and causes and recovers the power failure in the game control device 100. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal to be notified.

In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, , May be configured to be provided on the main board. Game board 30
Since the game control device 100 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to remove the target from replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power failure. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1
It is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change switch 126 and a setting key switch 127. The set value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 inserts a setting key to enable switching between an ON state and an OFF state. The game control device 100 can change the settings related to the game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power failure or power failure. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to change the hit probabilities of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game according to the setting of 6 steps.

The game control device 100 transitions to a setting change mode in which the setting of the game machine 10 can be changed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to cyclically change the settings 1 to 6 by detecting the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability set value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying the set value, and is, for example, a 1-digit 7-segment LE.
It is D and is mounted on the substrate.

Further, the game control device 100 shifts the control state to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation of the game machine 10 can be performed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF. .. For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is equipped with M111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A or a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or R
As AM111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a variation pattern random number 1, a variation pattern random number 2, and a variation pattern random number 3 stored as start-up memory in the CPU 111A.
Is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern with reference to. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.).
, A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. Derived A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state that has become the identification information, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variablely displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of "no reach"<"normalreach"<"special 1 reach"<"special 2 reach"<"special 3 reach"<"premierreach". Further, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generates and outputs a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the variation display game in the variation display without reach and reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game, etc. And the oscillation signal from the oscillation circuit 113 (original clock signal)
Based on this, it is provided with a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of a random number generation circuit.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure variation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. State), the operating state (time saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state, the number of start memories, etc., and one of the variable pattern tables is selected from a plurality of variable pattern tables. To get. Here, CP
The U111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, and the like, and is a payout motor of a payout unit provided in the game machine 10 in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Is driven, and control is performed to pay out the prize ball. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the game machine 10.
Controls the payout of balls for rent.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 has a start port 1 switch 36 in the start winning port 36.
a, Starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, winning opening switch 35a, large winning opening switch 38 in the special variable winning device 38
a, Connected to the specific area switch 38e of the special variable winning device 38, a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input, and 0
An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that converts a V-5V positive logic signal is provided. The detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine 10 is also input to the proximity I / F 121. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11.
By setting it to V, it is possible to detect an abnormal state such as the lead wire of a sensor or proximity switch being improperly shorted, the sensor or switch being disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire being cut and floating. It is configured to output an abnormality detection signal.

Explaining the winning opening switch 35a, in FIG. 3, the winning opening switch 35a is 1.
Although shown by the blocks, in reality, a plurality of (n) winning opening switches 35a (three in the present embodiment) are provided on the game board 30, and the respective signals are close to each other by different signal lines. I
It is input to / F121. Further, although the large winning opening switch 38a is shown by one block in FIG. 3, a plurality of (x) large winning opening switches 38a (3 in the present embodiment) are actually used.
(Pieces) are provided on the game board 30. And these a plurality of big winning opening switches 38a
They are connected by different signal lines, or, for example, a switch and a game control device 10.
It is connected to the game control device 100 by a method called a wired OR on a relay board (not shown) existing between 0 (main board). The panel radio wave sensor 62 and the magnetic sensor 61 described later may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be similarly connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired or.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F
Of the outputs of 121, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switch 38a, and the specific area switch 3
The detection signal of 8e is input to the second input port 123. It should be noted that the signal output of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, which are the start port switches in FIG. 1, (proximity I / F12).
(Output from 1) is shown by one signal line in FIG. 3, but actually there are two.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. 63 detection signal, detection signal of main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10, detection signal of setting value change switch 126, detection signal of setting key switch 127, payout control A touch switch signal (a signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) from the device 200 is input.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 asserts (effective level) the chip enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (not shown) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. It can be read by changing to). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 has a detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 and a payout control device 20.
Frame radio wave invalid signal from 0 (signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting radio waves), payout busy signal (whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands) (Signal indicating abnormal payout), status signal indicating abnormal payout (status signal indicating abnormal payout)
, Shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (the lower plate 23 has more than a predetermined amount of game balls stored (full)
1st input port 122 that takes in the out-ball detection switch signal (the signal that is output when the out-ball is detected) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided.

The out-ball detection switch signal is a signal output from the out-sensor each time the out-sensor (not shown) detects one out-ball of the game machine 10. For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in the discharge flow path (not shown) between the discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball (out ball) from the game machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out-ball detection switch signal is a game performance (for example, 60,000 out-balls) per predetermined operation (for example, 60,000 out-balls).
It is used for the calculation of the base), and the calculated game performance is displayed on the performance display device 135. The out-ball detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300.
In that case, the out-ball detection switch signal may be used for determining the operating state, which is a trigger for switching to the game effect or the customer waiting screen display. For example, the performance display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display the game performance in decimal or hexadecimal numbers.

Further, the game machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration so that the detection signal of the vibration sensor switch is input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these inputs. It has a function of removing noise from a signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided on the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured to do. Also,
The reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but the input unit 120 is set just before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is a one-way communication in which a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of a certification body (not shown) connected to the data bus 140, a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch such as a start port switch that does not need to be processed, which is output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be controlled.
The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
The chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open / close the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening), the opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and the V door of the special variable winning device 38. The first output port 134a for outputting the opening / closing data of the specific area solenoid 38d to be opened / closed, the opening / closing data of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening / closing the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37, and the display data of the performance display device 135 is provided. Has been done.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134b for outputting the display data of the probability set value display device 136. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 134c for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. 4th output port 1 for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
34d is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information related to the game machine 10 such as jackpot information on the external information terminal board 71.
A fifth output port 134e for outputting to is provided. The external information terminal board 71 has
It is equipped with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10 can be transmitted to the external device via the photo relay. Can be supplied to. A part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 134e to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the open / close data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, the specific area solenoid 38d, and the peripheral solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal to the first driver. (Drive circuit) 138a, batch output from the second driver 138b, fourth output port 134d that outputs the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 134c. External information signals supplied from the third driver 138c, the fifth output port 134e, and the fourth output port 134d, which output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw-in side of the display device 50, to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d that outputs to the information terminal board 71 and a fifth driver 138e that generates and outputs a drive signal of the performance display device 135 by receiving the display data signal of the performance display device 135 output from the first output port 134a are provided. Has been done.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, etc.
It may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board. Further, the performance display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the performance display device 135 may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the external board (not shown) side instead of the main board. ..

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 490. Photocoupler 139
Is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 490 by serial communication. The transmission and reception of such data is
Since it is performed by using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , Sound source LSI31 that controls the output of sound in order to reproduce various melody, sound effect, etc. from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has 4.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A PROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a FeRAM that can retain stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure
Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and RTC (real-time clock) 338, which is a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.), are connected. A RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command (effect command) from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, and decorates the lamp. Lighting, drive control of motors and solenoids,
Performs processing such as managing the production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.
Is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, the synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. From VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, video data and horizontal synchronization signal HSY
The NC and the vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal I is transmitted from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
NT is input. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 is a board decoration LE that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) or the like provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
D control circuit 332, frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 and the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) provided in the board effect device 44 (including). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. Good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a of the effect button 25, a setting switch 29a of the option setting unit 29, and an effect switch 47 (effect motor) for detecting the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44. The function of detecting the on / off state of the switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 are detected and detected by the main control microcomputer 311. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of inputting a signal is provided. In FIG. 4, the option setting unit 29
For the sake of convenience, each of the above switches is collectively referred to as a setting switch 29a, but in detail, the states of the above-mentioned switches (cross cursor switch, center switch, attached switch) are individually detected by the switch input circuit 336. A detection signal indicating each state of each switch is input to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the motor or the like. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC3.3V is based on DC5V.
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC1.2V is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPSET signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
It is supplied to the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., and resets them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on. Further, the circuit board constituting the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the normal drawing start gate 3
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in 4, the random value for hit judgment of the normal figure is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the normal figure variation display game Performs the process of determining the hit or miss. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol symbol display unit 55 of the batch display device 50, a process of displaying a normal symbol variation display game that is stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of this normal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 55, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated to control the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal figure variation display game is out of sync, the normal figure symbol display unit 55 is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure variation display game A random value for jackpot determination is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit or miss in the first special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the starting memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on this starting memory, for the jackpot determination of the second special figure variation display game. The random value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command, effect command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. To do. Then, after displaying the identification symbol (identification information) on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a special symbol variation display game that is stopped and displayed. To do. That is, the game control device 100 is the start winning area of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37).
It serves as a game control means for controlling the progress of a variable display game based on a prize.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and a process for generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process for executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating a special gaming state due to the result of the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game being a big hit, the CPU 111A uses, for example, the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b. The opening / closing member 38c of the game is opened, and control is performed so that the game ball can flow into the winning opening. In this special gaming state, the CPU 111A is subject to either a condition that a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. One round is to open the big winning opening until it is achieved, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, a small hit game state is generated due to the result of the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) or the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) being a small hit. In the process, the CPU 111A controls, for example, the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b to allow the game ball to flow into the large winning opening.

The opening / closing operation pattern (opening / closing operation mode) of the large winning opening performed in these small hit game states is, for example, an operation of maintaining the opening / closing member in the open state for 200 msec four times at 1500 msec intervals. As described above, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the CPU 111A controls the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50 to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is
The probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state.
Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure change display game and the second special figure. Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state in the normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal figure probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, the normal power opening time) of the first hit stop symbol
500msec x 1 time), 2nd hit stop symbol opening time (normal power opening time) and number of times of opening (for example, 1700msec x 2 times), 3rd hit stop symbol opening time (normal power opening time) and opening Number of times (
For example, it can be set to 1700 msec x 3 times).

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal power release number, and the normal power release time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 70
4 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number of times. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is the normal probability when the normal operation state (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1 /).
It is possible to have a higher probability than 251) (general figure high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states in which different things are changed. Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated. In addition, the time saving state is the normal power support state (during normal power support or electric support).
It can also be called.

Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the first embodiment. The batch display device 50 includes 7-segment LED_d1 and 7-segment LED_d2, and 16 LEs from LED_d3 to LED_d18.
Equipped with D. The batch display device 50 has a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED_d.
2 and various status displays are performed according to the lighting mode of LEDs_d3 to LED_d18.

The batch display device 50 allocates various status display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2, and from the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, and the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the normal symbol symbol display unit 55, the normal figure hold display unit 56, the state display unit 57, and the special figure 2 hold display unit 58 are provided. The round display unit 51 has four LEDs, LEDs_d3 to LED_d6.
The number of rounds in the special figure game is displayed according to the lighting mode of. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 has eight Ls of the 7-segment LED_d1.
The symbol in the special figure 1 game is displayed according to the lighting mode of the ED (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED). The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbol in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d2. The normal symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the normal symbol game according to the lighting mode of the three LEDs of LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The normal figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of hold in the normal figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The status display unit 57 includes LED_d7 and LE.
The game state in the special figure game is displayed according to the lighting modes of the three LEDs D_d9 and LED_d17. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d13 and LED_d14.

Hereinafter, control of a game machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process and a timer interrupt process performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing of the game control device of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 10. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment.
FIG. 8 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. Figure 9
Is a diagram (No. 4) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (No. 5) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment.

The main process is started by the control unit (gaming microcomputer 111) when the power is turned on. In this main process, first, a process for disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then a stack pointer setting process for setting a stack pointer, which is the start address of an area for saving values such as registers when an interrupt occurs. (Step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). RAM 11
The range of the address of 1C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper rank is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h, which is on the head side of the address range of the RAM 111C, is set.

Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5).
.. The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read into the first register (for example, the B register) (step S6), and then the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read into the second register (for example, the B register). Read into the C register) (step S7).

Here, the predetermined bit of the first register is masked and the other bits are cleared (step S8). For example, only the second bit of the B register corresponding to the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 is held, and the 0th bit, the 1st bit, and the 3rd bit to the 7th bit are cleared. Then, the predetermined bit of the second register is masked and the other bits are cleared (step S9). For example, only the 4th bit of the C register corresponding to the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 is held, and the 0th to 3rd bits and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared.

The information in the first register is integrated into the second register, and the information held by the second register is stored in RAM1.
It is retained as reference information that does not rely on 11C (step S10). For example, the logical sum of the B register and the C register is stored in the C register, and the C register is held as a state reference register.

For example, the value "00000000B" of the state reference register (C register) is "0" after the 0th bit and the 1st bit, the 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared, and the 2nd bit is. It indicates that it is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the RAM initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the setting key switch 127. That is, the value “0000000000B” of the status reference register indicates a setting change state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is ON (ON).

Further, the value "00010000B" of the state reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit.
The 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared to be "0", and the 2nd bit is RA.
It indicates that it is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the M initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value “00010000B” of the status reference register indicates a RAM initialization state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is OFF (OFF).

The value "00000100B" of the status reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit.
The 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared to be "0", and the 2nd bit is RA.
It indicates that it is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the M initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value “00000100B” of the status reference register indicates a setting confirmation state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is ON (ON).

Further, the value "00010100B" of the state reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit.
The 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared to be "0", and the 2nd bit is RA.
It indicates that it is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the M initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value “000010100B” of the status reference register indicates a power recovery (power failure recovery) state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is OFF (OFF).

As a result, the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are held in the C register. Since the storage position (second bit) of the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 in the B register and the storage position (fourth bit) of the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 in the C register are different, the B register and C Even with the logical sum of the registers, the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are stored without being lost.

After that, a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S11). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to an instruction from the game control device 100 that serves as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the slave control device to start normally is set. As a result, the game control device 10 is tentatively turned on when the power is turned on.
It is possible to prevent the subordinate control means from missing the command by sending the command to the subordinate control means before 0 rises first and the subordinate control means rises. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a standby means for setting a predetermined waiting time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control means when the power is turned on.

Also, when timing the power-on delay timer, the validity of the data held in the RAM area is judged (
This is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register that is not subject to validation) that is not subject to checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

The detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is stored in the second register (C register), but the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is stored before the start of the standby time. You can reliably save your operations. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch can be operated from the power-on to the standby time. It is necessary to keep operating 112. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

Further, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is stored in the second register (C register), but the operation of the setting key switch 127 can be performed by storing the detection signal before the start of the standby time. It can be detected reliably. That is, after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 12
If the state of 7 is read, the setting key switch 127 is waited for the elapse of the waiting time.
It is necessary to operate the setting key switch 127 from the power-on to the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operation, and the setting change operation performed at the time of turning on the power or It is possible to prevent the situation where the setting confirmation operation is not accepted.

Next, a process for setting the power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S11).
), And then the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the standby time ()
Steps S12 to S16) are performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S12), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on or not is set. A determination is made (step S13).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S13; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S12 (step S1).
4). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S14; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S13). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S14;
Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the game machine 10 is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained.
When a power failure occurs here, it is not necessary to perform backup processing or the like. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S13; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated to "-1" (step S15), and the timer value is "0". (Step S16). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S16; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S12). Also, the timer value is "0".
(Step S16; Y), that is, when the waiting time has expired, the RAM 11
Allow read / write RWM (Read Write Memory) access such as 1C or EEPROM (step S17), and output off-data to all output ports (set to no output).
(Step S18).

Next, the serial port (the port that is pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111,
Set (used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (step S19).
).

In step S20, a process of activating the CTC circuit that generates the timer interrupt signal and the random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed.

In step S21, a process of setting the RAM abnormality flag is performed. It should be noted that the set of the RAM abnormality flags is provisional and may be updated in the process of inspecting the RAM abnormality that is executed later.

In step S22, it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah). If the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S22; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step). S23), power failure inspection area 2
If the value of is normal (step S23; Y), the checksum calculation process (step S24) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed.

In the checksum calculation process, the sum of the data of the game control work area and the data of the status display work area may be calculated as a checksum, or the data of the game control work area and the status display work may be calculated. The checksum may be calculated separately from the data of the area, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data of the game control work area. The game control work area is a work area used for game control in the storage area in the RWM. The status display work area is a work area used for status display in the storage area in the RWM.

Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S24 and the checksum when the power is turned off match (step S25), and when it is determined that the checksums match (normal) (step S25; Y) clears the RAM abnormality flag tentatively set in step S21 (step S26).

When it is determined that the checksums do not match (is not normal) (step S25;
In N), by passing step S26 and shifting to step S27, the RAM abnormality flag tentatively set in step S21 becomes deterministic. Even if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S22; N or step S23; N), it is tentatively set in step S21 by passing step S26 and moving to step S27. The RAM error flag is deterministic.

In step S27, the setting key switch 12 refers to the second register (C register).
It is determined whether or not the detection signal of 7 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the process proceeds to step S33, and the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is If not on, step S
Proceed to 28.

Since the game control device 100 holds the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the second register (C register), the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the RAM initialization The detection signal of the conversion switch 112 can be determined at the same time. Further, the game control device 100 includes the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the RAM.
Since the detection signal of the initialization switch 112 is held in the second register (C register),
The detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 before the validity determination of the RAM can be determined.

In step S28, the control unit determines whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S30 when the RAM error flag is on (that is, when the RAM error flag is set), and proceeds to step S30 when the RAM error flag is not on (that is, RAM).
If the abnormality flag is cleared), the process proceeds to step S29.

In step S29, the control unit determines whether or not the setting change mode flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S48 when the setting change mode flag is on, and proceeds to step S30 when the setting change mode flag is not on.

Steps S30 to S32 are processes executed when the RAM is abnormal or when the power is shut off during the setting and the RAM is restarted without being cleared. Step S3
At 0, the control unit transmits a command for notifying the main abnormality error to the effect control device 300.
As a result, the effect control device 300 performs the effect control corresponding to the command of the main abnormality error notification. For example, the effect control device 300 receives the command of the main abnormality error notification, displays a message instructing the restart accompanied by clearing the RAM on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Further, the effect control device 300 receives the command for notifying the main abnormality error, and notifies the main abnormality error by the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44.

In step S31, the control unit displays the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped by the performance display device 135.
Output to. At this time, the control unit can display the status corresponding to the main abnormality error on the performance display device 135. Further, the control unit outputs the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped to the probability setting value display device 136. At this time, the control unit can display a numerical value or a character that is not in the probability set value on the probability set value display device 136. The control unit is L when the game is stopped.
The 7-segment display data including the ED display data may be output to the batch display device 50. At this time, the control unit may turn off the batch display device 50 or turn it on all.

In step S32, the control unit outputs the on-data of the security signal to the external information terminal board 71.
Output from. At this time, the control unit turns off the output data of other signals output from the external information terminal board 71. The control unit repeatedly executes steps S31 and S32 and waits for the power to be cut off. That is, the game machine 10 outputs a security signal from the external information terminal plate 71 until the power is cut off. Further, the game machine 10 waits until the power is cut off.
No signal other than the security signal is output from the external information terminal board 71.

The control unit does not prohibit RAM access in the repeated execution of steps S31 and S32 until the power is cut off. As a result, the game machine 10 has NMI (No.
n-Maskable Interrupt) The return address can be stored in RAM when it occurs, reducing the risk of program runaway. In this way, the control unit waits for the power to be cut off in step S31.
And the stored contents of the RAM during repeated execution of step S32 are not protected by prohibiting RAM access, but since clearing the RAM at the time of restart is a condition for starting the game control, the risk that the stored contents of the RAM are not protected is limited. There is. That is, the game machine 10 obtains the effect of reducing the risk of program runaway while limiting the risk that the stored contents of the RAM are not protected. Further, the control unit does not prohibit RAM access in the repeated execution of step S31 and step S32 until the power is cut off, so that the control unit does not prohibit RAM access, so that step S31 and step S32
It is possible to improve the program efficiency by making the subroutine callable in.

Steps S33 to S36 are processes related to setting change preparation, and step S
At 27, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on and the RAM initialization switch 11
This is a process executed when the detection signal of 2 is on.

In step S33, the control unit determines whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S34 when the RAM error flag is on, and proceeds to step S35 when the RAM error flag is not on.

In step S34, the control unit clears the set value because the RAM error flag is on. The set value may be cleared by setting an invalid value as the set value, or by setting the most disadvantageous value for the player from the viewpoint of fraud countermeasures.

In step S35, the control unit performs a process of setting the setting change mode flag. The setting change mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game machine 10 is changing the setting. The setting change mode flag is set when the setting is being changed, and the setting change mode is in progress when the setting is not being changed. The flag is cleared (reset).

In step S36, the control unit transmits a command for which the setting is being changed to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs the effect control corresponding to the command whose setting is being changed. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command during the setting change and displays a message indicating that the setting is being changed on the display device 41, or the speakers 19a, 1
Sound is output from 9b. Further, the effect control device 300 receives the command during the setting change, and notifies the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44 that the setting is being changed.

Step S37 is a process executed after the setting change preparation (step S33 to step S36) or after the setting confirmation preparation (step S49, step S50). In step S37, the control unit sets the security signal control timer to 128 ms. As a result, the game machine 10 outputs the security signal at least until the security signal control timer is timed up.

Steps S38 to S40 are processes related to waiting for the end of setting change or waiting for the end of setting confirmation. By setting the output of the security signal in step S37, the game machine 10 makes it possible to grasp from the outside the execution of the process related to the setting change end waiting or the setting confirmation end waiting.

After enabling the interrupt (step S38), the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off (step S).
39). The control unit sets step S5 when the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off.
The process proceeds to step 5, and if the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not off, the process proceeds to step S40.

In step S40, the control unit determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. The control unit
The occurrence of a power failure can be determined by continuously detecting the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined time. The control unit proceeds to step S41 when a power failure occurs, and step S when a power failure does not occur.
Proceed to 39. That is, the control unit waits for the setting key to be turned off until the power failure occurs, with the interrupt enabled in step S38.

When the control unit determines that a power failure has occurred, the process prohibits interrupts (step S4).
1) Perform the process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step S42).
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S43).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S44).
Further, a checksum calculation process (step S45) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S46).
), Then the process of prohibiting access to the RAM (step S47) is performed, and then the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

Step S48 is executed when it is determined in step S29 that the setting change mode flag is on. In step S48, the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on. The control unit
If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on, the process proceeds to step S49, and if the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, the process proceeds to step S51.

Step S49 and step S50 are processes related to setting confirmation preparation. Step S4
In 9, the control unit performs a process of setting the flag in the setting confirmation mode. The setting confirmation mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game machine 10 is confirming the setting. The setting confirmation mode flag is set when the setting is being confirmed, and the setting confirmation mode is in progress when the setting is not being confirmed. The flag is cleared (reset). In step S50, the control unit transmits the command for which the setting is being confirmed to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs the effect control corresponding to the command for which the setting is being confirmed. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command for confirming the setting, displays a message indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, the effect control device 3
00 receives the command under confirmation of the setting, and notifies that the setting is being confirmed by the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44. After this, the control unit proceeds to step S37.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S48 that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, the control unit executes step S51. In step S51, the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. The control unit proceeds to step S52 when the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, and proceeds to step S58 when the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on. That is, the game machine 10 proceeds to execute the process related to RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the activation detection accompanied by the pressing operation of the RAM initialization switch 112, and R
The process related to power failure recovery proceeds to the execution by the activation detection without pressing the AM initialization switch 112.

Next, the process related to RAM initialization performed in step S52 and subsequent steps will be described. R
In the process related to AM initialization, the control unit clears the RAM area other than the set value to 0 (zero clear) (step S52), and saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (step S52).
Step S53). For example, the control unit sets the RAM clear start address 2 as the start address at the time of RAM clear, and clears the target area (game control work) in the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, RAM111C). Clear the data in the area) to zero.

Since the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag are included in the data of the clear target area, they are cleared by zero clearing the data of the clear target area.

In step S54, the control unit transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs effect control corresponding to the command at the time of RAM initialization. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command at the time of RAM initialization, displays a message informing that the RAM has been initialized on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Further, the effect control device 300 receives the command for initializing the RAM, and notifies that the RAM has been initialized by the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 4.
6. Notify by the board effect device 44.

Further, when the control unit detects that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off after executing the process (step S38 to step S40) related to the setting change end waiting or the setting confirmation end waiting, step S55 is performed. Execute. After disabling interrupts (step S55), the control unit transmits a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (step S55).
56).

As a result, the effect control device 300 ends the notification that the setting is being changed, which is started by receiving the command during the setting change, or the notification that the setting is being confirmed, which is started by receiving the command during the setting confirmation. ..

Next, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag and determines whether or not the setting change mode is in progress (step S57). When the control unit is in the setting change mode, step S5
Proceed to step 2 to execute the process related to RAM initialization. On the other hand, if the control unit is not in the setting change mode, the control unit proceeds to step S58 and executes a process related to power failure recovery.

In step S58, the control unit executes the power failure recovery process. In the power failure recovery process, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized, and it is determined whether or not the special figure game is in high probability by referring to the special figure status, and the special figure game is in high probability. In the case of, the process of saving the on-information in the high-probability notification flag area and saving the on-data of the high-probability notification LED in the segment area is included.

The area to be initialized in the power failure recovery process is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, a setting change mode flag, a setting confirmation mode flag, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In the power failure recovery process, the busy signal status area that stores the status of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, and the status of the payout busy signal is determined. It is an indefinite state indicating that it is not. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

Next, the control unit transmits a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S59), and proceeds to step S60. In step S59, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command,
Send multiple commands such as probability information command, probability setting value information command, and screen specification command. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. Note that the screen-designated command means that the control states of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both normally being processed (during fluctuation, during jackpot (first special game state)).
It is a command to command the display of the customer waiting demo screen when it is in a small hit (a state that is neither of the second special game states), and in other cases, it commands the display of the recovery screen. Command to do.

In step S60, the control unit performs a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit. After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (big hit symbol initial value random number, small hit symbol initial value random number, hit initial) are extracted. After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as the initial value (start value) of the value random number and the hit symbol initial value random number (step S61), the interrupt is permitted (step S62).

Subsequently, the control unit performs an initial value random number update process (step S63) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. This initial value random number update process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, "+1". In this way, the game machine 10 makes it possible to increase the randomness of the random numbers by continuously updating the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

Here, the control unit once disables the interrupt (step S64), executes the performance display editing process (step S65), and permits the interrupt after executing the performance display editing process (step S66). The performance display editing process is a process related to base calculation and display. Since the processing load of the performance display editing process is relatively high, the control unit prohibits interrupts to derive the processing result more quickly. As a result, the game machine 10 guarantees the derivation of the processing result of the performance display editing process by the time the game state is updated by the timer interrupt.

In step S67, the control unit determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. The control unit
The occurrence of a power failure can be determined by continuously detecting the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined time. The control unit proceeds to step S41 when a power failure occurs, and step S when a power failure does not occur.
Proceed to 63.

That is, the control unit repeatedly executes the processes from step S63 to step S67 unless a power failure occurs. Specifically, when a power failure has not occurred, the control unit repeatedly performs initial value random number update processing, performance display editing processing, and power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing).

Then, the interrupt is permitted before the initial value random number update process (step S63) (step S).
66) As a result, if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update processing, the interrupt processing will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be waited by the initial value random number update processing, which will put pressure on the interrupt processing. Can be avoided.

Similarly, interrupts are disabled before the performance display editing process (step S65) (step S6).
4) As a result, the performance display editing process is executed in preference to the timer interrupt.
It is possible to avoid pressure on the performance display editing process.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in an integrated manner and the subordinate control means (payout control device 200) that performs various controls according to the instructions from the main control means.
In a game machine including an effect control device (300, etc.), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control means when the power is turned on. The means (game control device 100) and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and a RAM 111C.
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. And, the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the standby time.

The game control device 100 has a function (second initialization process) of distinguishing between an initialization process (first initialization process) at the time of data abnormality and an initialization process (second initialization process) at the time of initialization operation. Since it has one initialization means and a second initialization means), it is possible to realize the optimum and lean initialization processing according to the situation.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and a RAM 111C.
Setting operation unit that can be operated from the outside (setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 12)
7) and a setting changing means (game control device 100) for changing the setting value stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the setting operation unit are provided to enable the setting change and the setting display unit ( The setting (set value) can be confirmed by providing the probability set value display device 136). Further, the main control means (game control device 100) uses the RAM after the standby time has elapsed.
This means that access to 111C is permitted.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) prohibits access to the RAM (RAM111C) (step S47) and waits for the execution and stop of all the processes to be stopped.
The loop after step S47) and the RAM error standby process (loop in steps S31 and S32) that waits for the execution of all processes to be stopped while permitting access to the RAM (RAM111C) (step S17). Make it executable.

Here, the standby process when a power failure occurs and the standby process when a RAM is abnormal will be described. The power failure standby process is a loop process that is executed after the access to the RAM is prohibited in step S47 of the main process and waits for the execution of all the processes to be stopped. Further, since the standby process when a power failure occurs is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in step S41 of the main process, an interrupt (timer interrupt) that is not an NMI interrupt is prohibited. The standby process when a power failure occurs is NMI.
About interrupts NMI interrupts can occur because interrupts cannot be disabled. However, since the standby process when a power failure occurs is a process executed when a power failure occurs, there is little risk that an NMI interrupt will occur during the execution of the process. Further, the standby process when a power failure occurs is a standby process that does not accompany an abnormality notification. As a result, the game machine 10 can allocate the electric power until the power is cut off to the power failure processing. The gaming machine 10 prohibits access to the RAM during the standby process when a power failure occurs, thereby reducing the risk that the stored contents of the RAM will change due to an unstable voltage.

The RAM error standby process is a loop process that is executed after the access to the RAM (RWM) is permitted in step S17 of the main process, and waits for the execution of all the processes to be stopped.
Further, since the RAM error standby process is executed after the interrupt is disabled in step S1 of the main process, an interrupt that is not an NMI interrupt (timer interrupt) is prohibited. Note that the standby process when a power failure occurs is N because interrupts cannot be disabled for NMI interrupts.
MI interrupts can occur. Since the RAM error standby process is a process of waiting for the power to be cut off, the risk of an NMI interrupt occurring during the execution of the process is greater than that of the power failure standby process.
However, in the RAM error standby process, since access to the RAM is permitted even if an NMI interrupt occurs, the return address can be stored in the RAM, and the risk of program runaway due to the occurrence of an NMI interrupt is small. Further, since the game machine 10 transmits the main abnormality error notification command to the effect control device 300 in step S30, the effect control device 300 performs the abnormality notification in parallel during the execution of the RAM abnormality standby process. Can be done. As a result, the game machine 10 can be expected to restart promptly.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 1
1 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is performed in the above-mentioned main process from the time when the interrupt is enabled until the interrupt is disabled (step S38 to step S41, step S38 to step S55, step S66 to step S64, step S66). To step S41)
This is the interrupt processing that occurs in. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S7).
1). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S72). In step S72, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different.

Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S73) are performed. In step S74, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag, and determines whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in progress. When the control unit is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the control unit proceeds to step S75, executes the setting change / confirmation process, and ends the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the control unit proceeds to step S76 when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is in progress.

In step S76, the control unit executes output processing for performing drive control and the like of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening solenoid 38b, normal electric solenoid 37c) based on the output data set in various processes.

When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the game control device 1
The first signal indicating the launch permission status seen from 00, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status seen from the payout control device 200 are also generated in the payout control device 200 and fired. It is output to the control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device.
It is configured so that the game ball can be launched when both are permitted to launch.

Next, the control unit issues a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 20.
Payout command transmission process (step S77) to output to 0, random number update process 1 (step S7)
8), the random number update process 2 (step S79) is executed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. .. In addition, the random number update process 2 is
This is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. In addition to the random number update process 1 or the random number update process 1, the random number update process 2 may stop the random number update or change the update cycle while the setting is being changed.

Next, the control unit includes a start port 1 switch 36a, a start port 2 switch 37a, a gate switch 34a in the normal drawing, a winning port switch 35a, a large winning port switch 38a, and a specific area switch 38.
The winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S80) is performed to monitor whether or not a normal signal is input from e and to monitor an error (whether or not the front frame and the glass frame are opened, etc.). In addition, a start port switch monitoring process (step S81) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, if the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening or the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) Is extracted, and the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the special figure variation display game. The game result is pre-determined.

Next, the control unit performs special figure 1 game processing (step S82) for processing the special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 game processing (step S83) for performing processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and normal figure variation. General map game processing (step S) that performs processing related to the display game
84) is executed.

Next, a segment LED provided on the game machine 10 and displaying various information related to the display of the special figure variation display game and the game (for example, LE of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the batch display device 50)
Segment LED editing process (step S85) that drives D) to display the desired content.
), Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S86) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether there is an abnormality, and process that checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. Performs the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S87). Then, an external information editing process (step S88) and a performance display device control process (step S89) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer are performed to end the timer interrupt process.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of designating register bank 0) are interrupts. It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Main processing]
Next, the main process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit disables interrupts.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial settings of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs the initial setting of VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit allows interrupts.

[Step D15] The control unit permits the generation of display data. That is, the control unit is V
Allows the display circuit in DP312 (not shown) to access VRAM (not shown) in VDP312 to generate display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the sland function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the sland function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each game machine. You may.

[Step D17] The control unit is the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300.
The initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (for example, the effect flag area (the storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300)).

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes the effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for editing when the effect button 25 (effect button switch 25a) is operated when it is enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of detecting the input of the effect button in the effect button input process or in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes the hall / player setting mode process. Hall / player setting mode processing includes setting the changeable range of the brightness, volume, etc. of the LED and display device 41, and
This is a process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes the random number update process. Random number update processing is, for example, r
This is a process in which the pseudo-random number is updated at least once for each control cycle of the main process using the and function. Since the random function generates a random number based on the designated generation sequence each time the recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the random function. A counter that increments by "1", such as the main board (game control device 100), may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes the received command check process. The received command check process is a process of analyzing a command received from the game control device 100 in a predetermined number unit.

[Step D23] The control unit executes the effect display editing process. The effect display editing process is V
This is a process for setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the DP 312 of the drawing contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table shape in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes the drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that the preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26 if it is the frame switching timing, and waits for the frame switching timing if it is not the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a V blank interrupt (
It is a timing that arrives at a time interval corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on a cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of a V-sync interrupt. The V blank interrupt is generated every time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. As described above, the generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt occurs twice, the frame is switched, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 second ≒ 33.33 ms
)become. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or less than 1/30 second. The frame may be switched at intervals.

By the frame switching timing determination processing, the subsequent processing (steps D26 to D30, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is executed at this frame switching timing for each of the above processing cycles. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in this frame unit (that is, the processing cycle unit). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames have 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

[Step D26] The control unit follows the command set in step D23 to VDP3.
Instruct 12 to draw the screen. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes the sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes the decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs and the like such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes the movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, a board effect device 44) including various motors and SOLs (solenoids).

[Step D30] The control unit executes the launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and also produces an effect according to the special map rotation state (the number of special map fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, the number of balls rented)). It is a process to perform mode correction of.

[Step D31] The control unit executes the information disclosure process. The information disclosure process is a process of disclosing performance information related to game performance to a player.
The control unit returns to step D18 after executing step D31, and thereafter, step D1.
The processing of steps 8 to D31 is repeatedly executed. That is, steps D18 to D
Reference numeral 31 denotes a loop process (3) that is repeatedly executed in the above process cycle after the effect control device 300 is activated.
In some cases, it is called main loop processing).

The control unit executes the processes of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop process in order to match the effect of the screen, and signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processes are used. The process of actually outputting the drive control signal, etc. to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

Next, the display executed by the effect control device 300 during the game of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the display screen during the game of the first embodiment. Here, the display screen (sometimes simply referred to as "screen") is a screen composed of one or a plurality of images displayed in the display area of the display device 41, and in principle, a different code is used for each different display content. Is attached.

The display screen 500 shown in FIG. 13 (1) is a display screen in which the symbol is stopped, and after the end of the variable display in the variable display game (before the start of the next variable display game), the symbol which is the result mode of the variable display game is determined. The period is stopped and displayed. The display screen 500 has a large symbol group 501, a small symbol group 502, a special figure 1 hold number display 503, a special figure 2 hold number display 504, and a hold display 505.
And the hold digestion display 506 are displayed.

The large symbol group 501 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving the interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 5
01 is displayed in a large size by setting a variable display area in a substantially central portion of the display device 41. The large symbol group 501 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol.

On the display screen 500, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", and the middle symbol is
The symbol on the right indicates that the symbol is stopped at "5", and the symbol on the right indicates that the symbol is stopped at "7". That is, on the display screen 500, the large symbol group 501 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in the stopped state (the symbol is stopped).

The small symbol group 502 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 502 is displayed small on the peripheral edge of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display effect by the large symbol group 501. The small symbol group 502 is
Includes left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol. On the display screen 500, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 502 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the stopped state.

In general, the large symbol group 501 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 502, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be greatly changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 502 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 501, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

The special figure 1 hold number display 503 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 500, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is “3”.
The special figure 2 hold number display 504 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. On the display screen 500, the special figure 2 hold number display 504 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game is “0”.

The hold display 505 shows how the number of hold icons 507 corresponding to the number of holds of the special figure 1 game is displayed corresponding to the current game state (for example, the normal game state). Hold icon 5
07 is, for example, spherical, and the hold icon 507 can also produce a display accompanied by movement by animation (for example, deformation, color change, vertical movement, etc.). Further, the hold digestion display 506 shows how the hold digestion icon 508 corresponding to the hold digestion of the special figure game is displayed. The hold digestion icon 508 is, for example, spherical and the hold digestion icon 50
8 can also produce a display accompanied by movement by animation (for example, deformation, color change, vertical movement, etc.).

For example, when the special figure 1 hold number display 503 displays "3" and the special figure 2 hold number display 504 displays "0" as shown on the display screen 500, the hold display 505 displays three hold memory displays. Indicates that the number of reserved memories is "3". The number of holdings or the number of holding memories means the number of starting memories in which the variable display game of the special figure has not been executed.

The hold display 505 depends on the display mode (hold memory display displayed on the hold display 505).
The number of reserved memories of the special figure variation display game can be clearly indicated, and the degree of expectation for the game result for each reserved memory can be notified.

The hold digestion display 506 can indicate whether or not the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result depending on the display mode. On the display screen 500, the hold digestion display 506 sets a blank in the frame to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in the stopped state. After this, the game machine 10 starts the variable display.

The hold display 505 indicates that the hold number of either the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game is displayed by the hold icon 507 according to the game state.
The total number of games held and the total number of games held may be displayed by the hold icon 507.

The display screen 510 shown in FIG. 13 (2) is a display screen after the variable display is started. The display screen 510 is a screen after the display screen 500, and shows a screen during variable display (during three symbols changing). On the display screen 510, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group 501 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, on the display screen 510, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner.

On the display screen 510, in the special figure 1 hold number display 503, the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is "2".
The special figure 2 hold number display 504 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game is "0", and the hold display 505 indicates a game state that guides the hold number of the special figure 1 game. This indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 game) is "2". Further, on the display screen 510, the hold digestion display 506 displays the hold storage display during digestion, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the variation display.

The display screen 500 and the display screen 510 may include effect display elements such as a background display, a character display, and a character display (not shown), and the effect display elements also produce a display accompanied by movement by animation or the like. It may be possible.

Here, the decorative design (decorative design) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of the decorative symbol of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 comprises a decorative symbol (large symbol group), which will be described later, composed of a left symbol, a right symbol, and a middle symbol, and stops the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol in this order in the symbol variation. The game machine 10 can display a decorative symbol A and a decorative symbol B as decorative symbols.

For example, the game machine 10 may use the decorative symbol A for the left symbol and the right symbol that can form the symbol combination that becomes the reach, and use the decorative symbol B for the middle symbol that can form the symbol combination that becomes the big hit after the reach is formed. it can. Alternatively, the gaming machine 10 can use the decorative symbol A in the normal gaming state and the decorative symbol B in the high-probability gaming state or the electric support gaming state.

The decorative symbol A includes symbols 521, 522, 523, 524, 525, 526,527. The symbols 521, 522, 523, 524, 525, 526, 527 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes. The decorative symbol A includes two or more symbol components, of which at least one symbol component has a discriminating power that can be distinguished from other symbols. The decorative symbol A is a decorative symbol that includes one character (number) and displays the character as a symbol component having discriminating power.

The symbol 521 is a symbol that displays the number "1". The symbol 521 includes a background portion 521d and a number portion 521n. The background portion 521d has a rectangular outer shape and has a design (for example, a white circle shape) having distinctiveness as a design. The number part 521n has distinctiveness as a symbol.

The symbol 522 is a symbol that displays the number "2". The symbol 522 includes a background portion 522d and a number portion 522n. The background portion 522d has a rectangular outer shape and has a design (for example, a white cross shape) having distinctiveness as a design. The number part 522n has distinctiveness as a symbol.

The symbol 523 is a symbol that displays the number "3". The symbol 523 includes a background portion 523d and a number portion 523n. The background portion 523d has a rectangular outer shape and has a design (for example, a white square shape) having distinctiveness as a design. The number part 523n has distinctiveness as a symbol.

The symbol 524 is a symbol that displays the number "4". The symbol 524 includes a background portion 524d and a number portion 524n. The background portion 524d has a rectangular outer shape and has a design (for example, a white double circle shape) having distinctiveness as a design. The number part 524n has distinctiveness as a symbol.

The symbol 525 is a symbol that displays the number "5". The symbol 525 includes a background portion 525d and a number portion 525n. The background portion 525d has a rectangular outer shape and has a design (for example, a white triangular shape) having distinctiveness as a design. The number part 525n has distinctiveness as a symbol.

The symbol 526 is a symbol that displays the number "6". The symbol 526 includes a background portion 526d and a number portion 526n. The background portion 526d has a rectangular outer shape and has a design (for example, a white diamond shape) having distinctiveness as a design. The number part 526n has distinctiveness as a symbol.

The symbol 527 is a symbol that displays the number "7". The symbol 527 includes a background portion 527d and a number portion 527n. The background portion 527d has a rectangular outer shape and has a design (for example, a white star shape) having distinctiveness as a design. The number part 527n has distinctiveness as a symbol.

The decorative symbol B includes symbols 531, 532, 533, 534, 535, 536, 537. The symbols 531, 532, 533, 534, 535, 536, 537 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes. The decorative symbol B includes one symbol component, and the one symbol component has a discriminating power that can be distinguished from other symbols. The decorative symbol B is a decorative symbol that includes one character (number) and displays the character as a symbol component having discriminating power.

The symbol 531 is a symbol that displays the number "1". The symbol 532 is a symbol that displays the number "2". The symbol 533 is a symbol that displays the number "3". The symbol 534 is the number "
4 ”is displayed. The symbol 535 is a symbol that displays the number "5". Design 53
Reference numeral 6 is a symbol for displaying the number "6". The symbol 537 is a symbol that displays the number "7".

Next, an example of variable display using the decorative symbol A and an example of variable display using the decorative symbol B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the game of the first embodiment (
Part 2).

The display screen 512 shown in FIG. 15 (1) shows how the decorative symbol A is temporarily stopped and displayed. On the display screen 512, the large symbol group 501 swings the symbol 523 (left), the symbol 525 (middle), and the symbol 527 (right), and the left symbol "3", the middle symbol "5", and the right symbol "7". Temporary stop display with the combination of.

The display screen 512 shows that the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, on the display screen 512, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is "2", and the special figure 2 hold number display 504 indicates the hold memory of the special figure 2 game. Indicates that the number is "0" and holds display 50
Reference numeral 5 denotes a gaming state for guiding the number of reserved special figure 1 games, and indicates that the number of reserved stored characters of the special figure variable display game (special figure 1 game) is "2". Further, on the display screen 512, the hold digestion display 506 displays the hold storage display during digestion, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the variation display.

The display screen 514 shown in FIG. 15 (2) shows how the decorative symbol B is temporarily stopped and displayed. On the display screen 514, the large symbol group 501 swings the symbol 533 (left), the symbol 535 (middle), and the symbol 537 (right), and the left symbol "3", the middle symbol "5", and the right symbol "7". Temporary stop display with the combination of.

The display screen 514 indicates that the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, on the display screen 514, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is "0", and the special figure 2 hold number display 504 indicates the hold memory of the special figure 2 game. Indicates that the number is "2" and holds display 50
Reference numeral 5 denotes a gaming state for guiding the number of holdings of the special figure 2 game, and indicates that the number of holding storages of the special figure variation display game (special figure 2 game) is “2”. Further, on the display screen 514, the hold digestion display 506 displays the hold storage display during digestion, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the variation display.

In this way, the game machine 10 can perform a temporary stop display using the decorative symbol A and a temporary stop display using the decorative symbol B. Next, a more detailed display mode of the decorative symbols A and B during the temporary stop display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop display using the decorative symbol of the first embodiment.

FIG. 16 (1) shows a temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 as an example of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display. In the temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527, (a), (b), (c), and (d) are periodically repeated.

In the symbol 527 during the temporary stop display, the background portion 527d is fixed, and the number portion 527n having distinctiveness as the symbol 527 swings in the left-right direction. The background portion 527d is not limited to a still image, and may display an animation accompanied by movement.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 emphasizes the fluctuation of the number portion in comparison with the background portion, and realizes a temporary stop display that is easy for the player to grasp. The game machine 10 emphasizes the outline display of the number part in order to facilitate the comparison between the background part and the number part.

FIG. 16 (2) shows a temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 as an example of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display. In the temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537, (a), (b), (c), and (d) are periodically repeated.

The symbol 537 in the temporary stop display swings the entire symbol 537 in the left-right direction (first temporary stop operation).
While doing so, the vertical axis rotates (second temporary stop operation) within a predetermined angle range. That is, symbol 537
The temporary stop display mode of is a combination of two types of temporary stop operations.

As a result, the game machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop state for the player while emphasizing the temporary stop operation of the entire symbol and suppressing the obstacle to the game production. The game machine 10 makes the outline display of the symbol ambiguous (non-emphasis) in order to emphasize the temporary stop operation of the entire symbol.

Although the temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 is a combination of two types of temporary stop operations, it may be a combination of three types of temporary stop operations including a deformation operation or a combination of four or more types of temporary stop operations. Good.

The entire symbol (for example, symbol 537) or the symbol component (for example, the number part 5).
The swing in 27n) is not limited to the swing motion in a narrow sense, and includes a periodic motion that can be perceived as a temporary stop motion. For example, vertical axis rotation performed within a predetermined angle range, deformation operation of repeating a predetermined pattern, and the like are included in swinging in the temporary stop operation.

Further, the temporary stop operation of the symbol 527 during the temporary stop display is a temporary stop operation in which the number portion 527n swings in the left-right direction, but there are two types of temporary stop operations of the symbol 537 during the temporary stop display. It may be a temporary stop operation that rotates on the vertical axis within a range of a predetermined angle, which is one of the stop operations.

Further, the decorative symbol B (for example, symbol 537) in the temporary stop display rotates on the vertical axis within a predetermined angle range (second temporary stop operation) while swinging the entire symbol in the left-right direction (first temporary stop operation). However, it is not limited to this as long as it includes a temporary stop operation in a mode different from that of the symbol component (for example, the number part 527n) of the decorative symbol A (for example, symbol 527) during the temporary stop display.
For example, when the temporary stop operation of the symbol 527 during the temporary stop display is a temporary stop operation in which the number portion 527n swings in the left-right direction, the temporary stop operation of the symbol 537 in the temporary stop display swings in the left-right direction. Anything that includes a temporary stop operation that rotates on the vertical axis within a predetermined angle range, which is different from the temporary stop operation, may be used. At this time, the temporary stop operation of the symbol 537 during the temporary stop display may include only the temporary stop operation of rotating the vertical axis within a predetermined angle range, and in addition, the temporary stop operation of swinging in the left-right direction. It may include, or it may include other temporary stop operations. Even in this way, the game machine 10 clearly distinguishes between the temporary stop operation of the decorative symbol A and the temporary stop operation of the decorative symbol B, and even if the decorative symbol has various modes, it is easy for the player to understand. Achieve a stop operation.

Further, the game machine 10 emphasizes the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display and obscures the outline display of the symbol of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display. Decorative pattern A
This can be realized by making the outline display of the number part of No. 3 thicker than the outline display of the symbol of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display. Further, the enhancement or non-emphasis of the outline display is not limited to the thickness of the outline display, but may be realized by the saturation or the lightness, and further, it may be realized by the combination of the thickness of the outline display and the saturation or the brightness. There may be. In addition, the thickness of the outline display is not limited to the absolute thickness, but the pattern width (
Alternatively, it may be defined by the ratio to the width of the number part).

Regarding the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display, the background portion is fixed and the number portion swings in the left-right direction, but the background portion may swing. Next, the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display
An example of swinging the background portion of the above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of swinging of the background portion of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display of the first embodiment. The swing shown below is not limited to the swing motion in one direction, and may be shaft rotation, deformation, or the like.

The symbol 527 shown in FIG. 17 (1) has a base portion 52 having no distinctiveness as the symbol 527.
A background portion 527 including 7b and a symbol portion 527s having distinctiveness as a symbol 527.
It constitutes d. The symbol 527 shown in FIG. 17 (1) has a base portion 527b and a symbol portion 527.
s and the number part 527n are integrated, that is, they swing in the left-right direction with the same period, the same phase, and the same displacement.

In the symbol 527 shown in FIG. 17 (2), the base portion 527b is fixed and the symbol portion 527s is fixed.
And the number part 527n swings in the left-right direction. That is, the symbol 527 shown in FIG. 17 (2) is
The symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n swing in the left-right direction with the same period, the same phase, and the same displacement.
The symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n may be not limited to the same period, the same phase, and the same displacement while swinging in the left-right direction. For example, the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n may both swing in the left-right direction, but may have different periods, different phases, or different displacement amounts. Further, the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n may differ in period, phase, and displacement by two or more. Further, the base portion 527b is not limited to a still image, and may display an animation accompanied by movement. Further, the base portion 527b may swing independently of the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n.

In the symbol 527 shown in FIG. 17 (3), the base portion 527b is fixed and the symbol portion 527s is fixed.
Swings in the vertical direction, and the number portion 527n swings in the horizontal direction. That is, in the symbol 527 shown in FIG. 17 (3), the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n swing in different modes. The symbol unit 527s and the number unit 527n may have the same period and the same phase, or may have different periods and different phases while swinging in different modes. In addition, the base portion 527b
Is not limited to a still image, and may be an animation display accompanied by movement.
Further, the base portion 527b may swing independently of the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n.

Here, the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol A will be illustrated with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol A of the first embodiment. In the decorative symbol A temporary stop mode shown in FIG. 18 (1), the mutation direction of the number portion is set to the left-right direction, and the displacement period is set to 500 ms.
The amount of displacement is 10% with respect to the symbol width (for example, 80 pixels when the symbol width is 800 pixels). Further, in the decorative symbol A temporary stop mode shown in FIG. 18 (1), the base portion and the symbol portion are fixed. The displacement amount of the number part is 10% with respect to the design width, but the displacement amount of the number part is 10% with respect to the width of the number part (for example, 20 pixels when the width of the number part is 200 pixels). It may be.

In another example of the decorative symbol A temporary stop mode shown in FIG. 18 (2), the mutation direction is the left-right direction, the displacement period is 500 ms, and the displacement amount is 1 with respect to the symbol width for the number portion, the base portion, and the symbol portion.
It is set to 0% (for example, 80 pixels when the symbol width is 800 pixels).

In another example of the decorative symbol A temporary stop mode shown in FIG. 18 (3), the mutation direction of the number portion is set to the left-right direction, the displacement period is set to 500 ms, and the displacement amount is 10% with respect to the symbol width (for example, the symbol width is 80 pixels in the case of 800 pixels). Further, the decorative pattern A shown in FIG. 18 (3).
In another example of the temporary stop mode, the mutation direction of the base part and the symbol part is the same as the number part, the displacement period is 1000 ms different from the number part (larger than the number part), and the displacement amount is different from the number part (number). It is set to 15% (for example, 120 pixels when the symbol width is 800 pixels) with respect to the symbol width (larger than the portion).

In another example of the decorative symbol A temporary stop mode shown in FIG. 18 (4), the mutation direction of the number portion is set to the left-right direction, the displacement period is set to 500 ms, and the displacement amount is 10% with respect to the symbol width (for example, the symbol width is 80 pixels in the case of 800 pixels). Further, the decorative pattern A shown in FIG. 18 (4).
In another example of the temporary stop mode, the mutation direction of the base portion is set to the same horizontal direction as the number portion, the displacement period is set to 1000 ms different from the number part (larger than the number part), and the displacement amount is different from the number part (larger than the number part). ) 15% of the symbol width (for example, 1 when the symbol width is 800 pixels)
20 pixels). Further, in another example of the decorative symbol A temporary stop mode shown in FIG. 18 (4), the mutation direction of the symbol portion is set to the vertical direction different from the number portion, and the displacement period is set to 400 ms different from the number portion (smaller than the number part). The amount of displacement is 10% with respect to the same symbol width as the number part.

Next, the highlighting and the ambiguous (non-highlighting) display of the outline of the design will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing highlighting and ambiguous (non-highlighting) display of the outline of the symbol of the first embodiment.

The symbol width and contour line of the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B are shown in FIG. 19 (1), and the comparison of the thickness of the contour lines of the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B is shown in FIG. 19 (2). In the decorative symbol A, the symbol width is w1, the width of the number part is w2 (<w1), and the width (thickness) of the contour line of the number part is w3 (<w2).
For the decorative symbol B, the symbol width is w4, and the width (thickness) of the outline of the symbol is w5 (<w4).

The game machine 10 emphasizes the contour display of the number part of the decorative symbol A and decorates it by making the width w3 of the contour line of the number part of the decorative symbol A larger than the width w5 of the contour line of the symbol of the decorative symbol B. It is possible to make the player feel that the outline display of the symbol of the symbol B is ambiguous.

Further, the game machine 10 may realize the enhancement and non-emphasis of the contour display by the ratio of the pattern width to the contour line thickness (contour line ratio). For example, the game machine 10 emphasizes the contour display of the number part of the decorative symbol A and decorates it by making the contour line ratio w3 / w2 of the decorative symbol A larger than the contour line ratio w5 / w4 of the decorative symbol B. It is possible to make the player feel that the outline display of the symbol of the symbol B is ambiguous.

The emphasis of the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A and the non-emphasis of the outline display of the symbol of the decorative symbol B are
It may be fixed at all times, but it may be switchable according to a variable display state. Next, switching of the emphasized state of the contour display according to the variable display state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of timing of highlighting and ambiguous (non-highlighting) display of the outline of the symbol of the first embodiment.

FIG. 20 (1) shows a comparison between the thickness of the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A and the thickness of the outline display of the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B according to the variation display state. In the variable display (non-temporary stop state), variable display (temporary stop state), and stop display, the number part of the decorative symbol A is the decorative symbol B.
The outline display is emphasized as compared with the entire symbol of the above, and the outline display of the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B is ambiguous (non-emphasis) as compared with the number part of the decorative symbol A.

FIG. 20 (2) shows another example of comparison between the thickness of the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A and the thickness of the outline display of the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B according to the variation display state. Variable display (non-temporary stop state)
During the variable display (temporary stop state), the number part of the decorative symbol A is emphasized in contour display as compared with the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B, and the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B is the number part of the decorative symbol A. The outline display is ambiguous (unemphasized) in comparison. Further, during the stop display, the contour display of the number part of the decorative symbol A is not emphasized as compared with the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B, and the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B is compared with the number portion of the decorative symbol A. The outline display is not obscured (unemphasized). In this way, the game machine 10 can perform appropriate highlighting or non-highlighting according to the variable display state by switching the highlighted state of the contour display according to the variable display state. In addition, the game machine 10
By switching the emphasized state of the contour display according to the variable display state, it is easy for the player to perceive the change in the emphasized state of the contour display. Further, the game machine 10 can easily grasp the temporarily stopped state while suppressing the obstacle to the game production, and can improve the visibility during the stop display.

FIG. 20 (3) shows another example of comparison between the thickness of the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A and the thickness of the outline display of the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B according to the variation display state. During the variable display (temporary stop state), the number part of the decorative symbol A is emphasized in contour display as compared with the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B.
The outline display of the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B is ambiguous (unemphasized) as compared with the number part of the decorative symbol A. Further, in the variable display (non-temporary stop state) and the stop display, the contour display of the number part of the decorative symbol A is not emphasized as compared with the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B, and the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B is displayed. The outline display is not obscured (unemphasized) as compared with the number part of the decorative pattern A. In this way, the game machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop state while suppressing the obstacle to the game production by setting the outline display to the emphasized state only during the variable display (temporary stop state). ..

Next, as a modification of the first embodiment, the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A is not emphasized.
The game machine 10 for emphasizing the outline display of the symbol of the decorative symbol B will be described. Such a game machine 10 can strongly appeal the temporary stop action of the decorative symbol B to the player.
Further, in such a game machine 10, the number part of the decorative symbol A is prevented from being emphasized from the base portion and the symbol portion, and the number portion of the decorative symbol A is provisionally integrated with the base portion and the symbol portion. The stop action can be more strongly appealed to the player.

The non-emphasis of the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A and the emphasis of the outline display of the symbol of the decorative symbol B are
It may be fixed at all times, but it may be switchable according to a variable display state. Next, switching of the emphasized state of the contour display according to the variable display state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the timing of highlighting and ambiguous (non-highlighting) display of the outline of the symbol of the modified example of the first embodiment.

FIG. 21 (1) shows a comparison between the thickness of the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A and the thickness of the outline display of the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B according to the variation display state. In the variable display (non-temporary stop state), variable display (temporary stop state), and stop display, the number part of the decorative symbol A is the decorative symbol B.
The outline display is ambiguous (unemphasized) as compared with the entire symbol of, and the outline display of the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B is emphasized as compared with the number part of the decorative symbol A.

FIG. 21 (2) shows another example of comparison between the thickness of the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A and the thickness of the outline display of the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B according to the variation display state. Variable display (non-temporary stop state)
During the variable display (temporary stop state), the number part of the decorative symbol A has a vague (unemphasized) outline display as compared with the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B, and the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B is the decorative symbol. The outline display is emphasized as compared with the number part of A. Further, during the stop display, the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A is not ambiguous (unemphasized) as compared with the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B, and the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B is the number of the decorative symbol A. The outline display is not emphasized compared to the part. In this way, the game machine 10 can perform appropriate highlighting or non-highlighting according to the variable display state by switching the highlighted state of the contour display according to the variable display state. In addition, the game machine 10
By switching the emphasized state of the contour display according to the variable display state, it is easy for the player to perceive the change in the emphasized state of the contour display. Further, the game machine 10 can easily grasp the temporarily stopped state while suppressing the obstacle to the game production, and can improve the visibility during the stop display.

FIG. 21 (3) shows another example of comparison between the thickness of the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A and the thickness of the outline display of the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B according to the variation display state. During the variable display (temporary stop state), the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A is ambiguous (unemphasized) as compared with the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B, and the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B is the decorative symbol A. The outline display is emphasized compared to the number part of. Further, in the variable display (non-temporary stop state) and the stop display, the number part of the decorative symbol A is not blurred (non-emphasized) in outline display as compared with the entire symbol of the decorative symbol B, and the decorative symbol B is not highlighted. The outline display of the entire symbol is not emphasized as compared with the number part of the decorative symbol A. In this way, the game machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop state while suppressing the obstacle to the game production by setting the outline display to the emphasized state only during the variable display (temporary stop state). ..

Here, FIG. 22 shows a modified example of a more detailed display mode of the decorative symbols A and B during the temporary stop display.
Will be described with reference to. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop display using a decorative symbol of a modified example of the first embodiment.

FIG. 22 (1) shows a temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 as an example of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display. In the temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527, (a), (b), (c), and (d) are periodically repeated.

The symbol 527 in the temporary stop display has the background portion 527d fixed, and the number portion 527n having distinctiveness as the symbol 527 expands and contracts in the vertical direction while swinging in the left-right direction (first temporary stop operation). Second temporary stop operation). That is, the temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 is a combination of two types of temporary stop operations in the number part. The background portion 527d is not limited to a still image, and may display an animation accompanied by movement.

As a result, the game machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop state for the player while emphasizing the temporary stop operation of the number part and suppressing the obstacle of the game production. The game machine 10 is
In order to emphasize the temporary stop operation of the number part, the outline display of the number part is ambiguous (non-emphasis).

The temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 is a combination of two types of temporary stop operations in the number part, but a combination of three types of temporary stop operations including a deformation operation, or four or more types of temporary stop operations. It may be a combination.

FIG. 22 (2) shows a temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 as an example of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display. In the temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537, (a), (b), (c), and (d) are periodically repeated. The symbol 537 in the temporary stop display swings the entire symbol 537 in the vertical direction. As a result, the game machine 10 emphasizes the swing of the entire symbol by emphasizing the contour display of the entire symbol, and realizes a temporary stop display that is easy for the player to grasp.

Further, the game machine 10 ambiguous (non-emphasis) the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display.
It was decided to emphasize the outline display of the symbol of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display, but the outline display of the symbol of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display is changed from the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display. This can be achieved by making it thicker.

Further, the enhancement or non-emphasis of the outline display is not limited to the thickness of the outline display, but may be realized by the saturation or the lightness, and further, it may be realized by the combination of the thickness of the outline display and the saturation or the brightness. There may be. Further, the thickness of the outline display is not limited to the absolute thickness, and may be defined by the ratio to the pattern width (or the width of the number part). Further, the enhancement and non-emphasis of the contour display may be performed by making one contour display of the decorative symbol to be compared thicker and the other thinner, or the thickness of one contour display of the decorative symbol to be compared. It is also possible to change only the other without changing. Further, the enhancement of the contour display may be to set the contour display to the one that does not originally have the contour display. Further, the non-emphasis of the contour display may be the one in which the contour display is originally set.

Regarding the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display, the background portion is fixed and the number portion swings in the left-right direction, but the background portion may swing. Further, the emphasis of the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A and the non-emphasis of the outline display of the symbol of the decorative symbol B may be fixed at all times, but can be switched according to the variable display state. In the modified example, the emphasis state of the contour display described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21 can be switched.

Next, the message effect in the variable display game will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 2
3 is a diagram showing an example of a message display effect of the first embodiment. The game machine 10 enhances the effect of perceiving a message to the player by controlling the thickness of the outline display portion of the message display in the message production in the variable display game.

The display screen 600 shown in FIG. 23 (1) shows how the large symbol group 501 is in the reach mode. On the display screen 590, in the large symbol group 501, the large symbol (left) and the large symbol (right) are symbol "3".
Is oscillated to display a temporary stop, and the large symbol (middle) is displayed in a fluctuating manner. The display screen 59
0 indicates that the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, and the special symbol variation display game is in the variation display.

Further, the display screen 590 shows a state in which the message display effect is being executed in connection with the fact that the large symbol group 501 is in the reach mode. The display screen 590 displays the message display effect 593. The message display effect 593 includes a background unit 594 and a message unit 595. The background unit 594 is a display that serves as a background for the message unit 595, and makes it easy to distinguish it from other display units. The background portion 594 has, for example, a balloon shape, and is different in color and the like from the other display portions to facilitate the distinction between the background portion 594 and the other display portion. The message unit 595 displays a required message (for example, “chance!”) And makes the player feel a predetermined sense of expectation.

The display screen 592 shown in FIG. 23 (2) is a display screen following the display screen 590. The message display effect 593 is a display that changes dynamically, and the background portion 5 is compared with the display screen 590.
The positions and sizes of 94 are the same. On the other hand, the message display effect 593 enlarges and displays the message unit 595 as compared with the display screen 590. The message display effect 593 thickens the outline display of the message unit 595 as the message unit 595 is enlarged and displayed. That is, the message display effect 593 enhances the effect of perceiving the message to the player by fixing the position and size of the background portion 594 and enlarging the message portion 595. Further, the message display effect 593 increases the thickness of the outline display of the message unit 595 while fixing the thickness of the outline display of the background portion 594, thereby further enhancing the effect of perceiving the message to the player. .. The enlargement of the outline display thickness of the message unit 595 may be the same as the enlargement ratio in the enlarged display of the message unit 595, but by making it larger than the enlargement ratio in the enlarged display of the message unit 595, the player It is possible to further enhance the perceived effect of the message. Although the case where the thickness of the outline display of the message unit 595 is enlarged is larger than the enlargement ratio in the enlarged display of the message unit 595 is not limited to this, it is made smaller than the enlargement ratio in the enlarged display of the message unit 595. As a result, the player may be alerted and the effect of perceiving the message may be enhanced.

Regarding the switching of the contour display of the game machine 10, the large symbol group 501 and the message display effect 593 have been described, but the game machine 10 may switch the contour display of the small symbol group 502. Here, switching of the contour display of the small symbol group 502 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of contour display of the small symbol group of the first embodiment.

First, the normal display position (during stop display) of the small symbol (any of the symbols in the small symbol group 502)
Is shown in FIG. 24 (1). The small symbol group 502 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, all of which have the same variable display. The variation display of the small symbol is a switching variation in which the symbols are sequentially switched according to the symbol arrangement. Since the small symbol facing from the display area 540 has no offset setting, it is always displayed at the normal display position where the entire symbol can be observed. For example, symbol 5
44 is in the normal display position. The symbol 544 in the stop display is displayed with the outline of the entire symbol emphasized as compared with the symbol 544 in the variable display.

The switching variation of the small symbol is in frame units (display switching time unit) in the display device 41.
It is expressed by rewriting the small design with. Here, the symbol display for each frame is shown in FIG. 24 (2).

For example, in the small symbol, when the symbol 543 (symbol "3") is displayed in the display area 540 in the normal display position in one frame, the symbol 544 (symbol "4") is displayed in the display area 540 in the normal display position in the next frame. Display with. In the same way, the small symbol displays the symbol 545 (symbol "5") in the display area 540 at the normal display position in the next frame. Symbols 543, 54 in the normal display position
All of 4, 545 can observe the entire design from the display area 511 and have sufficient discriminating power. The symbol 544 in the variable display is displayed with the outline of the entire symbol emphasized as compared with the symbol 544 in the stop display. The same applies to other small symbols including symbol 543 and symbol 545.

In this way, the variable display of the small symbol group 502 cyclically switches the symbols to "3", "4", "5", ... Every 1 frame time (33.3 ms). Therefore, the small symbol group 5
In the variation display of 02, the display time per symbol is 33.3 ms, and the display time at the normal display position per symbol is 33.3 ms. In this way, since the variable display of the small symbol group 502 is always displayed in the normal display position even during the variable display, the outline display of the entire symbol is ambiguous (unemphasized), and the player can use the small symbol. Assists in making it easier to feel the fluctuation display of group 502. It should be noted that the ambiguous display during the variable display of the small symbol group 502 is limited to the outline, and the other parts are the same as the display mode at the time of the stop display, so that a certain discriminating power of the entire symbol can be ensured.

The gaming machine 10 (including a modified example) of the first embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The game machine 10 is a display means (for example, display) capable of displaying a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game) that variablely displays symbols (for example, decorative symbol A and decorative symbol B). The device 41), a first identification component having a discriminating power capable of identifying a symbol by a character attribute (for example, a number (number part 527n)), and a second identification having a discriminating power capable of identifying a symbol by a non-character attribute. A first-class symbol (for example, decorative symbol A) that includes a component (for example, the symbol portion 527s) to form a symbol, and a first identification component (for example, a number (symbol 537)).
)), And the second type symbol (for example, decorative symbol B) that constitutes the symbol by excluding the second identification component, and the control means (for example, the game control device 10) that can be switched and displayed on the display means.
0, the effect control device 300), and the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to the first mode (for example, non-highlighting) when the type 1 symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. The first identification component swings in one of the first direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction) and the second direction (for example, the left-right direction) different from the first direction (for example, the left-right direction). When the type 2 symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the outline display of the first identification component is set to a second aspect (for example, highlighting) that is thicker than the first aspect, and the first identification component is set to the first aspect. It swings in both the direction and the second direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction and the left-right direction) (see FIGS. 17, 19, and 20).

(2) The game machine 10 is a display means (for example, display) capable of displaying a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game) that variablely displays symbols (for example, decorative symbol A and decorative symbol B). The device 41), a first identification component having a discriminating power capable of identifying a symbol by a character attribute (for example, a number (number part 527n)), and a second identification having a discriminating power capable of identifying a symbol by a non-character attribute. A first-class symbol (for example, decorative symbol A) that includes a component (for example, the symbol portion 527s) to form a symbol, and a first identification component (for example, a number (symbol 537)).
)), And the second type symbol (for example, decorative symbol B) that constitutes the symbol by excluding the second identification component, and the control means (for example, the game control device 10) that can be switched and displayed on the display means.
0, the effect control device 300), and the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to the first mode (for example, non-highlighting) when the type 2 symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. The first identification component is shaken in both the first direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction) and the second direction (for example, the left-right direction) different from the first direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction and the left-right direction). When the first type symbol is moved to temporarily stop and display, the outline display of the first identification component is set to a second aspect (for example, highlighting) that is thicker than the first aspect, and the first identification component is set to the first aspect. (See FIG. 17, FIG. 19, and FIG. 21).

(3) The game machine 10 is a display means (for example, display) capable of displaying a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game) that variablely displays symbols (for example, decorative symbol A and decorative symbol B). The device 41), a first identification component having a discriminating power capable of identifying a symbol by a character attribute (for example, a number (number part 527n)), and a second identification having a discriminating power capable of identifying a symbol by a non-character attribute. A first-class symbol (for example, decorative symbol A) that includes a component (for example, the symbol portion 527s) to form a symbol, and a first identification component (for example, a number (symbol 537)).
)), And the second type symbol (for example, decorative symbol B) that constitutes the symbol by excluding the second identification component, and the control means (for example, the game control device 10) that can be switched and displayed on the display means.
0, the effect control device 300), and the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to the first mode (for example, non-highlighting) when the type 1 symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. The first identification component is shaken in both the first direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction) and the second direction (for example, the left-right direction) different from the first direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction and the left-right direction). When the type 2 symbol is moved to temporarily stop and display, the outline display of the first identification component is set to a second aspect (for example, highlighting) that is thicker than the first aspect, and the first identification component is set to the first aspect. (See FIG. 19, FIG. 20, and FIG. 22).

(4) The game machine 10 is a display means (for example, display) capable of displaying a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game) that variablely displays symbols (for example, decorative symbol A and decorative symbol B). The device 41), a first identification component having a discriminating power capable of identifying a symbol by a character attribute (for example, a number (number part 527n)), and a second identification having a discriminating power capable of identifying a symbol by a non-character attribute. A first-class symbol (for example, decorative symbol A) that includes a component (for example, the symbol portion 527s) to form a symbol, and a first identification component (for example, a number (symbol 537)).
)), And the second type symbol (for example, decorative symbol B) that constitutes the symbol by excluding the second identification component, and the control means (for example, the game control device 10) that can be switched and displayed on the display means.
0, the effect control device 300), and the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to the first mode (for example, non-highlighting) when the type 2 symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. The first identification component swings in one of the first direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction) and the second direction (for example, the left-right direction) different from the first direction (for example, the left-right direction). When the first type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the outline display of the first identification component is set to a second aspect (for example, highlighting) that is thicker than the first aspect, and the first identification component is set to the first aspect. It swings in both the direction and the second direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction and the left-right direction) (see FIGS. 19, 21, and 22).

(5) The game machine 10 has a first display area (for example, a display area of a large symbol group 501) and a second display area (for example, a display area 501) capable of displaying a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game). , A display means (for example, a display device 41) including a display area 540 of the small symbol group 502) and a control means capable of independently deriving the result mode of the variable display game in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, a game control device 100, an effect control device 300), and the control means includes.
In the first display area, the first symbol group (for example, large symbol group 501) is variablely displayed, and in the first display area, the second symbol group (for example, small symbol group 502) smaller than the first symbol group is variablely displayed. At this time, the thickness of the contour display during the variation display for each symbol in the second symbol group is made thinner than the thickness of the contour display during the variation stop (see FIG. 24).

(6) The game machine 10 has a display means (for example, a display device 41) capable of displaying an effect related to a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game), and a message display (message display effect 593) as the effect. ) Is performed, the message display is configured by including the character part (message part 595) and the background part (background part 594) which is the background of the character part, and the character part is enlarged with the size of the background part fixed. In addition to displaying, a control unit (for example, a game control device 100, an effect control device 300) that changes the outline display of the character unit from a first thickness to a second thickness different from the first thickness is included (for example, (See FIG. 23).

(7) The game machine 10 is a display means (for example, display) capable of displaying a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game) that variablely displays symbols (for example, decorative symbol A and decorative symbol B). The device 41), a first identification component having a discriminating power capable of identifying a symbol by a character attribute (for example, a number (number part 527n)), and a second identification having a discriminating power capable of identifying a symbol by a non-character attribute. A first-class symbol (for example, decorative symbol A) that includes a component (for example, the symbol portion 527s) to form a symbol, and a first identification component (for example, a number (symbol 537)).
)), And the second type symbol (for example, decorative symbol B) that constitutes the symbol by excluding the second identification component, and the control means (for example, the game control device 10) that can be switched and displayed on the display means.
0, the effect control device 300), and the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to the first mode (for example, non-highlighting) when the type 1 symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. The first identification component swings in one of the first direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction) and the second direction (for example, the left-right direction) different from the first direction (for example, the left-right direction). When the type 2 symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the outline display of the first identification component is set to a second aspect (for example, non-highlighting) thinner than the first aspect, and the first identification component is set to the first aspect. (See, for example, the vertical axis rotation direction and the left-right direction) in both the direction of the above and the second direction (see FIGS. 17, 19, and 21).
..

(8) The game machine 10 is a display means (for example, display) capable of displaying a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game) that variablely displays symbols (for example, decorative symbol A and decorative symbol B). The device 41), a first identification component having a discriminating power capable of identifying a symbol by a character attribute (for example, a number (number part 527n)), and a second identification having a discriminating power capable of identifying a symbol by a non-character attribute. A first-class symbol (for example, decorative symbol A) including a component (for example, the symbol portion 527s) and a first identification component are included, and the second identification component is excluded to form the symbol. The control means includes a second type symbol (for example, a decorative symbol B) and a control means (for example, a game control device 100, an effect control device 300) that can be switched and displayed on the display means. When the seed symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the outline display of the first identification component is set to the first mode (for example, non-highlighting), and the first identification component is set to the first direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction). When swinging in one of the second directions (for example, the left-right direction) different from the first direction (for example, the left-right direction) to temporarily stop the second type symbol.
The outline display of the first identification component is set to a second aspect (for example, highlighting) that is thicker than the first aspect, and the first identification component is set in at least one of the first direction and the second direction. Swing including the other direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction) different from the above (FIGS. 17, 19, 19 and 20).
reference).

(9) The game machine 10 is a display means (for example, display) capable of displaying a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game) that variablely displays symbols (for example, decorative symbol A and decorative symbol B). The device 41), a first identification component having a discriminating power capable of identifying a symbol by a character attribute (for example, a number (number part 527n)), and a second identification having a discriminating power capable of identifying a symbol by a non-character attribute. A first-class symbol (for example, decorative symbol A) including a component (for example, the symbol portion 527s) and a first identification component are included, and the second identification component is excluded to form the symbol. The second type symbol (for example, decorative symbol B) and the control means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300) that can be switched and displayed on the display means are included, and the control means is the first type. When the seed symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the outline display of the first identification component is set to the first mode (for example, highlighting), and the first identification component is set to the first direction (for example, highlighting).
When swinging in one of the second direction (for example, the left-right direction) different from the first direction (vertical direction) and the second direction (for example, the left-right direction) to temporarily stop and display the second type symbol. , The contour display of the first identification component is set to a second aspect (for example, non-highlighting) thinner than the first aspect, and the first identification component is set to at least one of the first direction and the second direction. Swing including the other direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction) different from the direction of (FIG. 17, FIG. 19, FIG. 21).
reference).

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, in which the thickness of the outline display of the decorative pattern can be different for each part, will be described. First, the outline display switching of the decorative symbol during the temporary stop display by rotating the vertical axis will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol of the second embodiment.

It shows a state in which "7" (symbol 537) of the decorative symbol B shown in FIG. 25 (1) is rotated on the vertical axis and temporarily stopped. The symbol 550 indicates that the “7” of the decorative symbol B is rotated counterclockwise on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. The symbol 551 shows a state in which the "7" of the decorative symbol B is viewed from the front. Design 552 is
It shows a state in which "7" of the decorative symbol B is rotated to the right on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. For example, the game machine 10 can perform a temporary stop display by switching from the symbol 550 to the symbol 552 via the symbol 551 and from the symbol 552 to the symbol 550 via the symbol 551.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 25 (2), the game machine 10 can switch the thickness (emphasis degree) of the contour display for each switching target contour display portion (left half of the symbol, right half of the symbol). ..
In the game machine 10, the left half of the symbol 550 is the left portion 550L, and the right half of the symbol 550 is the right portion 55.
When set to 0R, the outline display of the left part 550L, which seems to move in the direction away from it, is thinned (
Non-highlighted, ambiguous display), and the outline display of the right part 550R that seems to move in the approaching direction is displayed thickly (highlighted). In other words, the game machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 550L, which is seen farther than the right portion 550R, more finely than the contour display of the right portion 550R, and the left portion 55.
The contour display of the right portion 550R, which looks closer than 0L, is displayed thicker than the contour display of the left portion 550L.

Further, in the game machine 10, when the left half of the symbol 551 is the left portion 551L and the right half of the symbol 551 is the right portion 551R, the contour display of the left portion 551L and the contour display of the right portion 551R are standard thicknesses. (Standard display). In other words, the game machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 551L and the contour display of the right portion 551R, which appear at substantially the same depth position, with the same thickness (standard thickness).

Further, in the game machine 10, when the left half of the symbol 552 is the left portion 552L and the right half of the symbol 552 is the right portion 552R, the outline display of the left portion 552L which seems to move in the approaching direction is thickened (highlighted). ) Is displayed, and the outline display of the right part 552R, which seems to move in the direction away from the display, is displayed thinly (non-highlighted, ambiguous display). In other words, the game machine 10 has a left portion of 552L.
The contour display of the right part 552R that can be seen farther is displayed thinner than the contour display of the left part 552L.
The contour display of the left portion 552L, which appears closer to the right portion 552R, is displayed thicker than the contour display of the right portion 552R.

As a result, the game machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbol. The left or right part of the symbol may be uniformly highlighted or unhighlighted, but the degree of emphasis or non-highlighting differs depending on the distance from the vertical axis (central axis). You may do so. For example, when highlighting the contour display of the right portion 550R of the symbol 550, the game machine 10 can make the contour display thicker (change rate or amount of change) toward a position farther from the vertical axis (central axis). When the contour display of the left portion 550L of the symbol 550 is not highlighted, the contour display can be made thinner (change rate or amount of change) toward a position farther from the vertical axis (central axis).

Next, as another example of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the contour display switching of the decorative symbol during the temporary stop display, which swings in the left-right direction, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol of the modified example of the second embodiment.

It shows a state in which "7" (symbol 537) of the decorative symbol B shown in FIG. 26 (1) swings in the left-right direction to temporarily stop and display. The symbol 560 indicates that the “7” of the decorative symbol B has moved from the normal position to the left by a predetermined amount. The symbol 561 indicates that the "7" of the decorative symbol B is in the normal position. The symbol 562 indicates that the “7” of the decorative symbol B has moved from the normal position to the right by a predetermined amount. For example, the game machine 10 can perform a temporary stop display by switching from the symbol 560 to the symbol 562 via the symbol 561 and from the symbol 562 to the symbol 560 via the symbol 561.

At this time, the game machine 10 can switch the thickness (emphasis degree) of the contour display as shown in FIG. 26 (2). In the game machine 10, when the left half of the symbol 560 is the left portion 560L and the right half of the symbol 560 is the right portion 560R, the left half of the symbol 560 appears to move away from the center of the display position (broken line in the figure). The outline display is displayed thinly (non-highlighted, ambiguous display), and the outline display of the right portion 560R, which seems to move in the direction approaching the center of the display position, is displayed thickly (highlighted). In other words, the game machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 560L, which is seen farther from the center of the display position than the right portion 560R, more finely than the contour display of the right portion 560R, and is visible closer to the center of the display position than the left portion 560L. The contour display of the portion 560R is displayed thicker than the contour display of the left portion 560L.

Further, in the game machine 10, when the left half of the symbol 561 is the left portion 561L and the right half of the symbol 561 is the right portion 561R, the contour display of the left portion 561L and the contour display of the right portion 561R are standard thicknesses. (Standard display). In other words, the game machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 561L and the contour display of the right portion 561R, which can be seen at substantially the same position from the center of the display position, with the same thickness (standard thickness).

Further, in the game machine 10, when the left half of the symbol 562 is the left portion 562L and the right half of the symbol 562 is the right portion 562R, the left portion 562 seems to move in a direction approaching the center of the display position.
The outline display of L is displayed thick (highlighted), and the outline display of the right portion 562R, which seems to move away from the center of the display position, is displayed thinly (non-highlighted, ambiguous display). In other words, the game machine 10 displays the contour display of the right portion 562R, which is seen farther from the center of the display position than the left portion 562L, more finely than the contour display of the left portion 562L, and is visible closer to the center of the display position than the right portion 562L. The contour display of the portion 562L is displayed thicker than the contour display of the right portion 562R.

As a result, the game machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbol. The left or right part of the symbol may be uniformly highlighted or unhighlighted, but the degree of emphasis or non-highlighting differs depending on the distance from the vertical axis (central axis). You may do so. For example, when highlighting the contour display of the left portion 560L of the symbol 560, the game machine 10 can make the contour display thicker at a position farther from the vertical axis (central axis), and the contour display of the right portion 560R of the symbol 560. When non-highlighting, the contour display can be made thinner as the position is farther from the vertical axis (central axis).

Next, as another example of the game machine 10 of the second embodiment, the outline display switching target portion of the symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a contour display switching target portion during temporary stop display of the decorative symbol of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the game machine 10 can divide the symbol into a left half and a right half at the center line in the vertical direction, and the two portions can be used as the contour display portion to be switched. For example
The symbol 570 shown in FIG. 27 (1) is divided into a left portion 570a and a right portion 570b, and the contour display is highlighted and non-highlighted with each of the left portion 570a and the right portion 570b as the contour display switching target portion. Can be switched to.

Further, in the game machine 10, a part of the symbol on one side (one side portion) and a part on the other side (other side portion) are set as the outline display switching target portion of the symbol, and the remaining portion is the outline display of the symbol. It may not be a switching target part. For example, in the symbol 571 shown in FIG. 27 (2), one side portion 571a and the other side portion 571b are set, and the contour display is highlighted with each of the one side portion 571a and the other side portion 571b as the contour display switching target portion. And can be switched to non-highlighting.
Further, in the symbol 571 shown in FIG. 27 (2), the one-side portion 571a and the other portion not set as the other-side portion 571b are not set as the contour display switching target portion.

It is desirable that one side portion and the other side portion of the symbol have a symmetrical positional relationship with respect to the center of the symbol, but the positional relationship is not limited to this. Further, the one-side portion and the other-side portion of the symbol are preferably set in relation to the swing mode at the time of temporary stop of the symbol, but are not limited to this and are set in an arbitrary positional relationship. You may.

Further, in the game machine 10, only a part of the symbol may be used as the contour display switching target portion of the symbol, and the remaining portion may not be used as the contour display switching target portion of the symbol. For example, FIG. 27 (3)
) Is set as a part of the symbol 572, and the contour display can be switched between highlighted and non-highlighted with the part 572a as the contour display switching target portion. Further, in the symbol 572 shown in FIG. 27 (3), the remaining portion that is not set as a part 572a is not set as the contour display switching target portion.

The outline display switching target portion of the symbol is not limited to one, but may be set to two or three or more, and is set in an arbitrary positional relationship that contributes to the feeling of the temporary stop display. It may be one.

The gaming machine 10 (including a modified example) of the second embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The game machine 10 is a display means (for example, a display device) capable of displaying a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game, a special figure 2 game) that variablely displays a symbol (for example, symbols 570, 571, 572). 41) and the first state (for example, standard thickness) in which the outline display of the symbol is the first thickness when the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the first portion of the symbol (for example, the left portion 570a,
A control means for causing the display means to display the one-side portion 571a and the portion 572a) as a second thickness (for example, highlighting) thicker than the first thickness (see FIGS. 25 to 27).

(2) The control means of (1) is the second remaining of the symbols (for example, symbols 570 and 571).
The display means displays the portion (for example, the right portion 570b and the other side portion 571b) as a second state (for example, non-highlighting) in which the third thickness is thinner than the first thickness (FIGS. 25 to 2).
7).

[Third Embodiment]
In the description of the game machine of the first embodiment, the game machine provided with the game board 30 will be described, but the third embodiment will be described as a game machine having a game board 800 (see FIG. 28) different from the game board 30. .. FIG. 28 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the third embodiment. The first
For the same configuration as that of the embodiment, the reference numerals may be the same and the description thereof may be omitted.

On the surface of the game board 800, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 800, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 820 provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 830 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 820 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 820. That is, the center case 8
20 surrounds the display area of the display device 830, projects forward from the display surface of the display device 830, and is formed so that the game ball is less likely to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 830 is composed of a device having a display screen capable of displaying a dot matrix by LEDs. The display device 830 may include, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (CRT).
It may be composed of a device having a display screen such as a cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 830, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, on the upper part of the center case 820, a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating is provided. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 28 toward the center of the display device 830.

On the lower right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal drawing start gate 34 (the game ball that passes through the normal drawing start gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 29).

Further, a general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower left side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, and a general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 820 and on the right side of the special variable winning device 95 described later. Have been placed. The game balls that have won these general prize openings 35
It is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 29).

Further, below the center case 820 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 forming a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). (Starting port 1) is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 29).

Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.
Further, a normal variable winning device 37 (which is located below the center case 820 and gives a start condition for the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is provided on the left side of the normal figure start gate 34. A second start winning opening and a starting winning area) are provided. The normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) is provided with a movable member 37b at a position serving as an inflow portion. The movable member 37b is in a blocking state in which the movable member 37b is slid in the front-rear direction by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 29) to prevent the inflow of the game ball into the inflow portion, and the movable member 37b is retracted backward to prevent the inflow of the game ball into the inflow portion. Can be changed to an acceptable state. The movable member 37b is always held in a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player). Then, when the result of the normal map variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the game can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is the starting port 2 switch 37a (
(See FIG. 29). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state. Ordinary variable winning device 37
Is equivalent to an ordinary electric accessory (Public).

Further, on the right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, a special figure variation display game (
A special variable winning device (large winning opening 1) 38 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game) is arranged. .. The special variable winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (movable piece) 38c, and the opening / closing member 38c is in a closed state (disadvantageous to the player) depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The opening / closing member 38c retracts from the closed state) and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous for the player) that can be accepted. That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening 1 solenoid 38b (see FIG. 29) as a driving device, and a large winning opening (large winning opening 1) opened and closed by an opening / closing member 38c.
During the jackpot game state (special game state) based on the results of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and the jackpot game state (special game state) due to winning a prize in the specific area 96 described later.
Inside, by converting the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the big winning opening is facilitated, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). ing. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 29) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. ..

Further, on the lower right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 variable display game). A special variable winning device (large winning opening 2) 95 that can be converted into and is arranged. The special variable winning device 95 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 95c, and the opening / closing member 95c is in a closed state (disadvantageous to the player) depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The opening / closing member 95c retracts from the closed state) and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous for the player) that can be accepted. That is, the special variable winning device 95 includes a large winning opening 2 solenoid 95b (see FIG. 29) as a driving device, and a large winning opening (large winning opening 2) opened and closed by an opening / closing member 95c. During the small hit game state according to the result of the display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the game ball is facilitated to flow into the large prize opening by converting the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to a person. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 29) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. ..

Further, the special variable winning device 95 includes a V flow path that guides the winning game ball into the winning opening to the specific region 96. The special variable winning device 95 is provided with a specific area switch 95e (see FIG. 29) that detects a game ball that has flowed into the specific area 96. The specific area switch 95e
The detection of the game ball (winning in the specific area 96) is performed by the special variable winning device (large winning opening 1) 3
It is one of the conditions for generating a jackpot game state (special game state) that converts 8 from a closed state to an open state.

Further, although the center case 820 does not have a warp flow path, it may be provided with a warp flow path. For example, a warp port (warp entrance) is provided on the left side of the center case 820, and a game ball flowing into the warp flow path from the warp port is rolled on a stage in the center case 820, and a part of the game ball is used as a warp outlet. You may want to guide you. In that case, the warp exit may be located directly above the starting winning opening 36 so that the game ball guided to the warp exit can easily win the starting winning opening 36.

In the game machine 10 of the third embodiment, of the game areas 32 in which the game ball flows down, the left area of the center case 820 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 820 is the right game area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed) to aim at winning the starting winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 (located in the left gaming area). By launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38, 95
, General winning opening 35 (located in the game area on the right side), etc. can be aimed at winning a prize.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 800), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are connected. A batch display device 5 that displays various information and displays a game with a variable display of a general map triggered by a prize.
0 is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs and the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a normal symbol display unit. It includes 55, a normal drawing hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the batch display device 50 will be described later.

The game machine 10 is provided with a right-handed guidance display device 91 on the right side in the vicinity of the special variable winning device (large winning opening 1) 38. The right-handed guidance display device 91 lights up when guiding the player to right-handed, and turns off in other states. The right-handed guidance display device 91 is included in the board decoration device 46.

The game machine 10 is provided with a hit opportunity guidance display device 92 on the upper side in the vicinity of the special variable winning device (large winning opening 2) 95. The hit opportunity guidance display device 92 guides the player of the hit chance according to the lighting mode. For example, the hit opportunity guidance display device 92 turns on the LED corresponding to the message "two more chances" when there are two hit chances, and turns off the rest. Further, the hit opportunity guidance display device 92 turns on the LED corresponding to the message "one more chance" when there is one hit chance, and turns off the rest. The hit opportunity guidance display device 92 turns on the LED corresponding to the message "flowering" and turns off the rest during the hit having a hit chance from the next time onward. The hit opportunity guidance display device 92 is included in the board decoration device 46.

The game machine 10 includes a special figure game variation display state display device 98 at the lower right of the center case 50 in the game area 32. The special figure game variable display state display device 98 is a so-called fourth symbol display device, and is composed of two LEDs. The special figure game variable display state display device 98 displays the variable display state of the special figure 1 variable display game by the left LED, and displays the variable display state of the special figure 2 variable display game by the right LED. For example, the special figure game variation display state display device 98 notifies the symbol stop state of the special figure variation display game by lighting, and notifies the symbol variation state of the special figure variation display game by blinking. The special figure game variable display state display device 98 is included in the board decoration device 46.

The game machine 10 has a normal drawing variation display device 9 on the right side of the center case 50 in the game area 32.
3 and a general drawing hold display device 94 are provided. The normal-figure variation display device 93 is composed of two LEDs, and notifies the variable display state of the normal-figure game by alternating blinking, and notifies the variable display result of the normal-figure game by a combination mode of turning on or off. In addition, the general drawing hold display device 94 has two LEDs.
The number of reserved figures from 0 to 4 is notified depending on the combination mode of turning off, turning on, and blinking. The normal drawing variation display device 93 and the normal drawing hold display device 94 are included in the board decoration device 46.

Next, the control system of the game machine will be described with reference to FIG. 29. In the description of the game machine of the first embodiment, the game machine provided with the game control device 100 has been described, but the third embodiment includes a game control device 100a (see FIG. 29) different from the game control device 100. It will be described as a game machine. FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. Regarding the configuration similar to that of the first embodiment, the reference numerals may be the same and the description thereof may be omitted.

The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100a, and the game control device 100a is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. CPU unit 110 having an input port and an input unit 120 having an input port
The output unit 130 has an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 and the like connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 has a start port 1 switch 36 in the start winning port 36.
a, Start port 2 switch 37a in normal variable winning device 37, gate switch 34a in normal figure starting gate 34, winning port switch 35a, special variable winning device 38, 95 large winning port switch 38a, special variable winning device 95 An interface chip (proximity) that is connected to the specific area switch 38e of the above, and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. I / F) 121 is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open / close the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening 1), the opening / closing data of the large winning opening 1 solenoid 38b, and the special variable winning device 95 (large). Large winning opening 2 solenoid 9 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 95c of the winning opening 2)
The first output port 134a for outputting the opening / closing data of 5b, the opening / closing data of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening / closing the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37, and the display data of the performance display device 135 is provided.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the third embodiment. The timer interrupt processing of the third embodiment is performed in step S830 between steps S83 and S84.
Is different from the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment in that the above is executed.

The control unit performs special figure 1 game processing (step S82) for processing the special figure 1 variable display game, and special figure 2 game processing (step S) for performing processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game.
Following 83), a two-kind game process (step S830) that performs a process related to the so-called two-kind game is executed, and then a normal figure game process (step S84) that performs a process related to the normal figure variation display game is executed.

Next, the gaming performance of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 31. Figure 3
1 is a diagram showing an example of the gaming performance of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. The game machine 10 has a so-called type 1 + type 2 game property. The game property called type 1 makes it possible to derive a big hit as a result of a random number lottery in a special figure game (variable display game), and produces notification of the result of the random number lottery by displaying the variable number of symbols. The game property called the second type makes it possible to derive a big hit by detecting a prize in a specific area 96 at a predetermined timing.

The game machine 10 can execute the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game as the special figure game. In the special figure 1 game, one variable display can be executed with one winning in the starting winning opening 36, and up to four execution rights of the variable display (maximum number of pending numbers) can be stored. Special figure 1
In the game, the jackpot probability is 1/199, the small hit probability is 0/199, and the remaining 198.
/ 199 is out of the question. In the special figure 1 game, 1/3 of the jackpots are supported by Fuden, and 2/3 of the jackpots are not supported by Fuden.

In the special figure 2 game, one variable display can be executed with one winning of the normal variable winning device 37, and up to one execution right of the variable display (maximum number of holdings) can be stored. .. In the special figure 2 game, the jackpot probability is 1/199, the small hit probability is 198/199, and the loss is 0/199. Special figure 2 game is 1/3 of the big hit (probability of having support at the time of big hit)
2/3 of the big hits (probability of no support at the time of big hits) will be without public power support. The game machine 10 has the same jackpot probability in the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game, but may be different.

Due to the nature of the game, the two types of games do not have a maximum hold number, a big hit probability, or a small hit probability.
In the two-type game, 1/3 of the jackpots are supported by the public train, and 2/3 of the jackpots are not supported by the public train. In the game machine 10, the probability of having a big hit support and the probability of not having a big hit support are the same in the special figure 1 game, the special figure 2 game, and the two types of games, but they may be different in all games. However, it may be different in some games.

Next, the game characteristics of the gaming machine 10 having such gaming performance will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a game state transition of the game machine of the third embodiment.
The game machine 10 can be controlled by switching between a state with support and a state without support. Further, the game machine 10 can control the lottery probability of the special figure game by fixing it to a low probability. That is, the game machine 10 has a "no support / low probability" state in which the lottery probability of the special figure game is low without the normal electric support, and has a general electric support, and the lottery probability of the special figure game is low. It is possible to switch between a certain "supported / low probability" state.

The "no support / low accuracy" state includes "normal mode" and "chance mode". The "normal mode" in the "no support / low accuracy" state is a gaming state in which the special figure 1 game is executed. "
The "chance mode" in the "no support / low accuracy" state is a gaming state in which the special figure 2 game is executed. The "supported / low accuracy" state includes the "normal mode". The "normal mode" in the "supported / low accuracy" state is a gaming state in which the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game is executed.

In the game machine 10, the "normal mode" in the "no support / low accuracy" state is the initial state when the player starts the game. The game machine 10 transitions from the "normal mode" in the "no support / low probability" state to the "supported / low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition A" is satisfied. The transition condition "state transition A" is the end of the jackpot with support derived in the special figure 1 game. The gaming machine 10 remains in the "no support / low accuracy" state when the transition condition "state transition B" is satisfied from the "normal mode" in the "no support / low accuracy" state. Transition condition "state transition B
Is the end of the jackpot without support derived in the special figure 1 game.

The game machine 10 remains in the "supported / low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition C" is satisfied from the "normal mode" in the "supported / low probability" state. Transition condition "state transition C"
Is the end of the jackpot with support derived in the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game (including the two kinds of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game). The game machine 10 transitions from the "normal mode" in the "supported / low probability" state to the "no support / low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition D" is satisfied. The transition condition "state transition D" is the end of Fuden support.

Fuden Support ends the execution of one variable display in the special figure 2 game. Condition (Condition 1)
And. In addition to condition 1, Fuden support has N times of variable display in the special figure 1 game (
For example, the end of execution (four times larger than the end condition in the special figure 2 game) is set as the end condition (condition 2). Further, in addition to the condition 1 and the condition 2, the Fuden support sets the end condition (condition 3) to be one small hit.
In addition, when the jackpot without support is derived in the special figure 2 game (including the two kinds of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game), the end of the jackpot without support is the transition condition "state transition D".
Is established.

The game machine 10 transitions from the "chance mode" in the "no support / low probability" state to the "supported / low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition E" is satisfied. The transition condition "state transition E" is the end of the jackpot with support derived in the special figure 2 game (including the two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game). The gaming machine 10 remains in the "no support / low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition F" is satisfied from the "chance mode" in the "no support / low probability" state. However, the "chance mode" becomes the "normal mode" when the transition condition "state transition F" is satisfied. The transition condition "state transition F" is the end of the jackpot without support derived in the special figure 2 game (including the two kinds of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game).

The game progress in such a game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 shows
It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the game sequence of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. Game machine 1
0 means that the starting winning opening 36 can be expected to win in the "no support / low accuracy" state, and the normal variable winning device 37 cannot be expected to win. Therefore, the game progress is guided by the left-handed game instead of the right-handed game. To do. Therefore, in the game machine 10, the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold can be expected in the "no support / low accuracy" state, but the occurrence of the special figure 2 hold cannot be expected. Therefore, the game machine 10
It is normal to be in the "normal mode" in which the variable display of the special figure 1 game is executed in the "no support / low accuracy" state.

Sequence 1 indicates that the game state is “big hit (with normal electric support)” derived as a variable display result in the special figure 1 game. Game state "Big hit (with Fuden support)"
Is in operation for big hits, normal electric support "none", probability fluctuation "low probability", special figure 1 hold number "
4 ”, special figure 2 hold number“ 0 ”. The game state "big hit (with normal electric support)" becomes "with public electric support" after the big hit ends. Since the game machine 10 can be expected to win a prize in the special variable winning device (large winning opening 1) 38 during the big hit, it guides the game progress by the right-handed game. Further, since the game machine 10 can be expected to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 in the "supported / low accuracy" state after the end of the big hit, the game progress by the right-handed game is guided.

Sequence 2 shows the game state “special figure 1 symbol variation” after the end of the big hit. The game machine 10
The special figure 2 game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 game, but since the special figure 2 hold number is still "0", the special figure 1 hold number "4" is changed to "3" to play the special figure 1 game. Execute.

Sequence 3 shows the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation". When a prize is generated in the normal variable winning device 37 during the variable display of the special figure 1 game, the game machine 10 sets the special figure 2 hold number “0” to “1”. In addition, in the game machine 10, even if two or more prizes are generated in the normal variable prize device 37, the special figure 2
According to the maximum number of holdings, the upper limit is the number of holdings "1".

Sequence 4 shows the game state "Special Figure 1 symbol stop (missing)". Sequence 5 shows the game state “special figure 2 symbol variation”. Since the game machine 10 has a special figure 2 hold number "1",
Special figure 2 The reserved number "1" is set to "0", and the special figure 2 game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 game.

Sequence 6 shows the game state “special figure 2 symbol variation”. When a prize is generated in the normal variable winning device 37 during the variable display of the special figure 2 game, the game machine 10 changes the special figure 2 hold number “0” to “1”.

Sequence 7 shows the game state "Special Figure 2 symbol stop (small hit / big hit)". Game machine 10
Is shifted to the big hit operation (type 1 game big hit operation) as it is when the big hit is derived as the variable display result in the special figure 2 game, and is special when the small hit is derived as the variable display result in the special figure 2 game. The variable winning device (big winning opening 2) 95 is opened, and the game shifts to the big hit operation (two kinds of game big hit operation) on condition that the specific area 96 is won (two kinds of games).

Sequence 8 indicates that the game state is “big hit (without Fuden support)” derived as a result of the special figure 2 game (including the two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game). .. The game state "big hit (without Fuden support)" is in the jackpot operation, and the Fuden support is "None", the probability fluctuation is "Low probability", the special figure 1 hold number is "3", and the special figure 2 hold number is "1". Is. The game state "big hit (no jackpot support)" will continue to be "no jackpot support" after the jackpot ends. The game machine 10 cannot be expected to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 in the "no support / low accuracy" state, but there is an opportunity to execute the special figure 2 game (special figure 2 hold number "1"), and special figure 2 Since a big hit can be expected as a result of the game (including the two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game), the game progress by the right-handed game is guided.

Sequence 9 shows the game state "special figure 2 symbol variation". The game machine 10 has a special figure 2 hold number "
Since it is "1", the special figure 2 hold number "1" is set to "0" to give priority to the special figure 1 game.
Run the game.

Sequence 10 shows the game state "Special Figure 2 symbol stop (small hit / big hit)". Game machine 1
0 means that when a big hit is derived as a variable display result in the special figure 2 game, the game shifts to a big hit operation (type 1 game big hit operation) as it is, and when a small hit is derived as a variable display result in the special figure 2 game. The special variable winning device (large winning opening 2) 95 is opened, and the process shifts to the big hit operation (two types of game big hit operation) on condition that the specific area 96 is won (two kinds of games).

Sequence 11 indicates that the game state is “big hit (without Fuden support)” derived as a result of the special figure 2 game (including the two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game). .. The game state "big hit (without Fuden support)" is in the jackpot operation, and the Fuden support is "None", the probability fluctuation is "Low probability", the special figure 1 hold number is "3", and the special figure 2 hold number is "0". Is. The game state "big hit (no jackpot support)" will continue to be "no jackpot support" after the jackpot ends. The game machine 10 cannot be expected to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 in the "no support / low accuracy" state, and there is no opportunity to execute the special figure 2 game (special figure 2 hold number "0"), and special figure 2 Since the occurrence of a big hit cannot be expected as a result of the game (including the two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game), the game progress by the left-handed game is guided.

Sequence 12 shows the game state “special figure 1 symbol variation” after the end of the big hit. The game machine 10 executes the special figure 2 game in preference to the special figure 1 game, but since the special figure 2 hold number is "0", the special figure 1 hold number "3" is changed to "2". Figure 1 Run the game. After that, the game machine 10 advances the game by executing the special figure 1 game unless a big hit is derived as a variation display result in the special figure 1 game.

That is, the game machine 10 has a game property in which when a big hit (with Fuden support) is derived as a variable display result in the special figure 1 game, the chance of generating a big hit two times later is obtained. In addition, when the game machine 10 derives a big hit (with Fuden support) out of the two big hits, the game machine 10 gets two more big hits from the big hit.

Here, in the case of deriving a further jackpot (with Fuden support) out of the next two jackpot occurrence opportunities, the game progress assuming that the jackpot without Fuden support in Sequence 11 was with Fuden support. Will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the game sequence of the game machine of the third embodiment.

Sequence 11a is a game state “small hit / big hit (with Fuden support)” derived as a result of the special figure 2 game (including two kinds of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game).
Indicates that. The game state "small hit / big hit (with normal electric support)" is in the big hit operation, and the general electric support "none", probability fluctuation "low probability", special figure 1 hold number "3", special figure 2 hold number It is "0". The game state "big hit (with normal electric support)" becomes "with public electric support" after the big hit ends. The game machine 10 is a special variable winning device (big winning opening 1) during a big hit.
) Since we can expect to win a prize in 38, we will guide you through the progress of the right-handed game. Further, since the game machine 10 can be expected to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 in the "supported / low accuracy" state after the end of the big hit, the game progress by the right-handed game is guided.

Sequence 12a shows the game state “special figure 1 symbol variation” after the end of the big hit. Game machine 10
Executes the special figure 2 game in preference to the special figure 1 game, but since the special figure 2 hold number is still "0", the special figure 1 hold number "3" is changed to "2" and the special figure 1 is held. Run the game.

Sequence 13a shows the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation". When the game machine 10 wins a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 during the variable display of the special figure 1 game, the special figure 2 hold number "0" is changed to "1".
To.

Sequence 14a indicates the game state "Special Figure 1 symbol stop (off)". Sequence 15
a indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol variation". Since the game machine 10 has the special figure 2 hold number “1”, the special figure 2 hold number “1” is set to “0” and the special figure 2 game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 game.

Sequence 16a shows the game state "special figure 2 symbol variation". When the game machine 10 wins a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 during the variable display of the special figure 2 game, the special figure 2 hold number "0" is changed to "1".
To.

Sequence 17a indicates the game state "Special Figure 2 symbol stop (small hit / big hit)". When the game machine 10 derives a big hit as a variable display result in the special figure 2 game, it directly shifts to a big hit operation (type 1 game big hit operation), and when a small hit is derived as a variable display result in the special figure 2 game. The special variable winning device (large winning opening 2) 95 is opened to the specific area 96.
The game shifts to a big hit operation (2 types of game big hit operation) on condition that a prize is won in (2 types of games).

Sequence 18a is a game state “small hit / big hit (without Fuden support)” derived as a result of the special figure 2 game (including two kinds of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game).
Indicates that. The game state "small hit / big hit (without normal electric support)" is in the big hit operation, and the general electric support "none", probability fluctuation "low probability", special figure 1 hold number "2", special figure 2 hold number It is "1". The game state "big hit (no jackpot support)" will continue to be "no jackpot support" after the jackpot ends. The game machine 10 cannot be expected to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 in the "no support / low accuracy" state, but the special figure 2 game execution opportunity (special figure 2 hold number "1"
”), And since a big hit can be expected as a result of the special figure 2 game (including the two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game), the game progress by the right-handed game is guided.

Sequence 19a shows the game state "special figure 2 symbol variation". Since the game machine 10 has the special figure 2 hold number “1”, the special figure 2 hold number “1” is set to “0” and the special figure 2 game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 game.

Sequence 20a indicates the game state "Special Figure 2 symbol stop (small hit / big hit)". When the game machine 10 derives a big hit as a variable display result in the special figure 2 game, it directly shifts to a big hit operation (type 1 game big hit operation), and when a small hit is derived as a variable display result in the special figure 2 game. The special variable winning device (large winning opening 2) 95 is opened to the specific area 96.
The game shifts to a big hit operation (2 types of game big hit operation) on condition that a prize is won in (2 types of games).

Sequence 21a is a game state “small hit / big hit (with Fuden support)” derived as a result of the special figure 2 game (including two kinds of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game).
Indicates that. The game state "small hit / big hit (with normal power support)" is in the big hit operation, normal power support "none", probability fluctuation "low probability", special figure 1 hold number "2", special figure 2 hold number It is "0". The game state "big hit (with normal electric support)" becomes "with public electric support" after the big hit ends. Since the game machine 10 can be expected to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 in the "supported / low accuracy" state, the game machine 10 guides the game progress by the right-handed game.

Sequence 22a shows the game state “special figure 1 symbol variation” after the end of the big hit. Game machine 10
Executes the special figure 2 game in preference to the special figure 1 game, but since the special figure 2 hold number is "0", the special figure 1 hold number "2" is set to "1" and the special figure 1 game is executed. To execute. After this, the game machine 10
Will proceed by executing the special figure 1 game unless a big hit is derived as a variable display result in the special figure 1 game.

Sequence 23a shows the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation". When the game machine 10 wins a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 during the variable display of the special figure 1 game, the special figure 2 hold number "0" is changed to "1".
To.

In this way, the game machine 10 has a game property that it is possible to obtain a large number of big hit occurrence opportunities by repeatedly obtaining the big hit occurrence chances two times later. At this time, the number of reserved special figures 1 can be gradually reduced by repeatedly obtaining the chance of a big hit. However, the number of special figures 1 reserved is the starting winning opening 3
It can be increased if there is a prize in 6, but while the chances of big hits can be repeated, the game machine 10 guides the progress of the game by the right-handed game, so that the player gets the chance to win the starting prize opening 36 like a left-handed game. I can't expect that.

As a result, the game machine 10 which has obtained a large number of big hit occurrence opportunities is shown in the sequence m.
Special figure 1 It is possible to converge to the number of reservations "0". Even in such a case, as shown in the sequence m + 1, it is possible to continue the occurrence of a large number of big hits while obtaining the opportunity to generate the reserved number in Special Figure 2.

In addition, after the special figure 1 hold number "0", as shown in sequences n to n + 1, a large number of big hits continue to occur while obtaining the occurrence opportunity of the special figure 2 hold number without accompanying the special figure 1 symbol fluctuation. can do.

Of the sequences shown in FIG. 33, the sequence 12 corresponds to the "normal mode" in the "no support / low accuracy" state shown in FIG. 32, and the sequences 2 to 7 correspond to the "support" shown in FIG. 32. The sequences 9 and 10 correspond to the "normal mode" in the "presence / low accuracy" state, and the sequences 9 and 10 correspond to the "chance mode" in the "no support / low accuracy" state shown in FIG.

Further, among the sequences shown in FIG. 34, the sequences 12a to 17a, 22a, 23
a, m, m + 1, n to n + 3 correspond to the “normal mode” in the “with support / low accuracy” state shown in FIG. 32, and the sequences 19a and 20a correspond to the “without support / low accuracy” shown in FIG. "
Corresponds to the "chance mode" in the state.

Next, the variation display pattern selection of the special figure 2 game will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35
Is a diagram showing an example of a variable display pattern selection table of the special figure 2 game of the third embodiment.

The special figure 2 game prepares a variation display pattern pt1 having a time value of 10000 ms, a variation display pattern pt2 having a time value of 20000 ms, a variation display pattern pt3 having a time value of 30,000 ms, and a variation display pattern pt4 having a time value of 50,000 ms. That is,
The fluctuation time increases in the order of the fluctuation display patterns pt1, pt2, pt3, and pt4.

The game machine 10 refers to the total value of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number in the selection of the variable display pattern of the special figure 2 game. When the total value of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number is 2 or less,
The variable display pattern pt1 is selected with the probability pr1, and the variable display pattern pt2 is the probability pr1.
The variable display pattern pt3 is selected with a probability pr3 smaller than the probability pr2, and the variable display pattern pt4 is selected with a probability pr4 smaller than the probability pr3. Further, when the total value of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number is 3 or more, the variable display pattern pt1 is selected with the probability pr5, and the variable display pattern pt2 has a probability p greater than the probability pr5.
Selected by r6, the variation display pattern pt3 is selected with a probability pr7 greater than the probability pr6, and the variation display pattern pt4 is selected with a probability pr8 greater than the probability pr7.

As described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34, the game machine 10 can only take a value of "0" or "1" for the special figure 2 hold number, and the special figure 1 hold number is a large number of jackpot occurrence opportunities. Is obtained, gradually decreases, and converges to "0". That is, as for the total value of the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold, the larger the value, the higher the probability that the number of big hits will be small, and the smaller the value, the higher the probability that the number of big hits will be large.

Therefore, the game machine 10 makes it easy for the player to select a fluctuation display pattern having a larger fluctuation time in a period when the excitement does not cool down from the first hit, and secures time for executing an interesting production. Be sex. On the other hand, the game machine 10 has a game property that allows the player to easily select a fluctuation display pattern having a smaller fluctuation time when the player repeats a large number of big hits from the first hit, thereby ensuring a rapid game progress. And.

In this way, the game machine 10 can appropriately divide the execution of the interesting production and the rapid progress of the game according to the time. As a result, the game machine 10 can achieve both suppression of a decrease in motivation for playing when a large number of big hits occur and improvement of interest by various productions.

In the game machine 10, the selection probability of the variable display pattern was different depending on whether the total value of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number was 2 or less and 3 or more, but the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 1 hold number. The larger the total value of the special figure 2 hold number, the easier it is to select the fluctuation display pattern with a larger fluctuation time, and the smaller the total value of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number, the smaller the fluctuation display pattern. It is not limited to this as long as it is easy to select.

The ease of selecting a variable display pattern having a small fluctuation time or the ease of selecting a variable display pattern having a large fluctuation time can be defined by comparing the magnitudes of the expected values of the fluctuation time.

In addition, the game machine 10 refers only to the special figure 1 hold number in the variable display pattern selection of the special figure 1 game, and the larger the special figure 1 hold number is, the easier it is to select the variable display pattern having a smaller fluctuation time. ..

The game machine 10 performs four temporary stop displays and one main stop display by four pseudo fluctuations in the variation display pattern pt1 having a time value of 10000 ms, and has a time value of 20000 m.
In the fluctuation display pattern pt2 of s, 14 temporary stop displays and 1 main stop display are performed by 14 pseudo fluctuations, and in the fluctuation display pattern pt3 with a time value of 30,000 ms, 2
24 temporary stop displays and 1 main stop display due to 4 pseudo fluctuations are performed, and the time value is 50.
In the fluctuation display pattern pt4 of 000 ms, 34 temporary stop displays and 1 main stop display are performed by 34 pseudo fluctuations. The game machine 10 produces an expectation in the main stop display by the number of appearances of a specific symbol (for example, the symbol "3" and the symbol "7") in the temporary stop display in each variation display pattern. For example, in the game machine 10, as the number of appearances of the symbol "3" and the symbol "7" increases in the temporary stop display in each variation display pattern, the jackpot in the combination of the symbol "3" or the combination of the symbol "7" is used. Produce a sense of expectation to derive a big hit. Also, the game machine 10
May change the feeling of expectation depending on the appearance position of a specific symbol and the display mode (for example, a defect display described later).

In the game machine 10, the jackpot with the combination of the symbol "3" and the jackpot with the combination of the symbol "7" are the jackpots (with Fuden support), and the jackpot with the combination of other symbols is the jackpot (Public electricity support). (None) creates a sense of expectation. The game machine 10 is a batch display device 50.
As long as the big hit and the small hit can be distinguished in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the big hit and the small hit may be expressed by the same combination of symbols in the decorative symbol.

Next, an overview of the display device 830 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the display device according to the third embodiment. The display device 830 is a center case 820.
Is provided in the concave chamber formed by the above, and includes a symbol display area 700, a hold display area 701, and a decorative display area 702 and 703.

The symbol display area 700 is located at the center of the display device 830. The symbol display area 700 is
It is possible to display a symbol in a special figure game. The symbol display area 700 can notify the occurrence of a hit or the like by a message, and has an aspect of a message display area in addition to the aspect of the symbol display area. In addition, the design display area 700 can be used for decorative display such as a snowstorm.
In addition to the aspect of the design display area, it has an aspect of the decorative display area. Details of the symbol display area 700 will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

The hold display area 701 is adjacent to the symbol display area 700 and is located below the symbol display area 700. The hold display area 701 can display the hold display in the special figure game. In addition, it should be noted.
The hold display area 701 can display a decorative display such as a blizzard of cherry blossoms, and has an aspect of a decorative display area in addition to the aspect of the hold display area. Details of the reserved display area 701 will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

The decorative display area 702 is adjacent to the hold display area 701 and is located below the hold display area 701. The decorative display area 702 can display decorative items such as a snowstorm. Decorative display area 703
Is located above the symbol display area 700, adjacent to the symbol display area 700. The decorative display area 703 can display decorative items such as a snowstorm. The decorative display areas 702 and 703 can perform decorative display in cooperation with the symbol display area 700 and the hold display area 701.

Next, an overview of the symbol display area 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the symbol display area of the third embodiment. In the symbol display area 700, the left symbol area 704, the middle symbol display area 705, and the right symbol display area 706 are arranged in the horizontal direction. In the symbol display area 700, the symbol "7" is displayed in the left symbol area 704, and the symbol "7" is displayed in the middle symbol display area 705.
7 ”is displayed, and the symbol“ 7 ”is displayed in the right symbol display area 706.

In the left symbol area 704, the middle symbol display area 705, and the right symbol display area 706, segment display units 707 and 708, which can independently control light emission, are arranged in a matrix of 10 rows and 7 columns. The segment display units 707 and 708 are each shaped like cherry blossom petals, and can be lit in cherry blossom color by controlling the light emission of the LED. The segment display unit 707 has a petal shape with the end facing the lower left, and the segment display unit 708 has a petal shape with the end facing the upper right. The left symbol area 704, the middle symbol display area 705, and the right symbol display area 706 are respectively.
The segment display unit 707 and the segment display unit 708 are alternately arranged in the row direction and the column direction.

Next, the symbol of the special figure game displayed by the game machine 10 in the symbol display area 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol to be displayed in the symbol display area in the special figure game of the third embodiment.

The symbol 711 indicates the symbol "1" of the special symbol game to be displayed in the symbol display area 700.
The symbol 712 indicates the symbol "2" of the special symbol game to be displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 713 indicates the symbol "3" of the special symbol game to be displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 714 indicates the symbol "4" of the special symbol game to be displayed in the symbol display area 700. Design 7
Reference numeral 15 denotes a symbol "5" of the special symbol game to be displayed in the symbol display area 700. Design 71
Reference numeral 6 denotes a symbol "6" of the special symbol game to be displayed in the symbol display area 700. Design 717
Indicates the symbol "7" of the special symbol game to be displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 718 indicates the symbol "8" of the special symbol game to be displayed in the symbol display area 700. Design 719 is
The symbol "9" of the special symbol game to be displayed in the symbol display area 700 is shown. The symbol 720 indicates a symbol “0” of the special symbol game to be displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 721 indicates the symbol "Sakura" of the special symbol game to be displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 722 indicates a symbol "flower" of the special symbol game to be displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 723 indicates the symbol "treasure" of the special symbol game to be displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 724 indicates the symbol "moon" of the special symbol game to be displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 725 indicates the symbol "light" of the special symbol game to be displayed in the symbol display area 700.

In this way, the game machine 10 can display 15 types of symbols of the special symbol game in the symbol display area 700. These 15 types of symbols have different display modes so that they can be distinguished from the other symbols even if any one of the segment display units 707 and 708 has a different lighting mode.

For example, when a symbol is displayed on a 7-segment display unit having 7 segments from a segment to g segment, the symbol "8" is displayed by all lighting from a segment to g segment.
Can be represented, and the symbol "0" can be represented by lighting from the a segment to the f segment excluding the g segment (center horizontal), and the a segment to the d segment and the f segment excluding the e segment (lower left vertical) can be represented. , The symbol "9" can be represented by lighting the g segment. On the other hand, if the e-segment is turned on and off differently for decorative purposes, the distinctiveness of the design will be lost. However, 15 displayed in the symbol display area 700
The seed pattern has a configuration in which any one of the segment display units 707 and 708 has a different lighting mode for decorative purposes and does not lose its discriminating power. Of the 15 types of symbols displayed in the symbol display area 700, the most similar symbols are the symbol "8" and the symbol "0", and five specific lighting modes of the segment display units 707 and 708 are the symbols "8". "And the design"
The difference is "0". Therefore, the 15 types of symbols displayed in the symbol display area 700 have a configuration in which the discriminating power as a symbol is not easily lost even if some of the segment display units have different lighting modes as in the 7-segment display unit. There is.

Of the 15 types of symbols displayed in the symbol display area 700, the symbol "3" and the symbol "3"
"7" is a specific symbol that becomes a big hit (with Fuden support) by combining the same type of symbols. Further, among the 15 types of symbols displayed in the symbol display area 700, the symbols other than the symbol "3" and the symbol "7" are non-specific symbols that are big hits (without Fuden support) by combining the same types of symbols. ..

Next, an overview of the hold display area 701 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the hold display area of the third embodiment. The hold display area 701 has a first hold display unit 731 that can display the first hold display, a second hold display unit 732 that can display the second hold display, and a third hold display that can display the third hold display. It includes a number hold display unit 733, a number 4 hold display unit 734 capable of displaying the fourth hold display, and a decorative display unit 735,736,737.

The 1st hold display unit 731, the 2nd hold display unit 732, the 3rd hold display unit 733, and the 4th hold display unit 734 are centered on one flower core-shaped segment display unit 731a and the segment display unit 731a, respectively. It includes five petal-shaped segment display units 731b to be arranged. The segment display unit 731a and the segment display unit 731b can be lit in cherry blossom color by controlling the light emission of the LED, and the light emission can be controlled independently of each other.

The hold display area 701 can display the hold display of the special figure 1 game or the hold display of the special figure 2 game according to the game state. In the hold display area 701, since the maximum number of holds for the special figure 1 game is "4", the first hold display section 731, the second hold display section 732, and the third hold display are displayed when the hold display of the special figure 1 game is performed. The hold display is performed using the unit 733 and the 4th hold display unit 734, but since the maximum number of holds for the special figure 2 game is "1", only the 1st hold display unit 731 is used for the hold display of the special figure 2 game. Hold display using.

The decorative display units 735, 736, 737 are each shaped like a cherry blossom petal and have LEDs.
It can be lit in cherry blossoms by controlling the light emission of. Each of the decorative display units 735, 736, 737 has a petal shape with its ends oriented in random directions, and is responsible for the decorative display of the reserved display area 701 and cooperates with the pattern display area 700 and the decorative display area 702 and 703. Decorative display can be performed.

Next, the animation of the hold display generated when the hold memory is generated will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of an animation for generating a hold display according to a third embodiment.

The 1st hold display unit 731, the 2nd hold display unit 732, the 3rd hold display unit 733, and the 4th hold display unit 734 sequentially switch the display state of the corresponding hold display unit when the hold storage occurs, using a predetermined time. Animate the occurrence of hold display with.

When the hold storage occurs, the hold display unit sets the display state 738 to the initial state and the display state 739.
Is an intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 790 is the final state following the display state 739, and the display state is sequentially switched.

The display state 738 is a display state (initial display state) in which the segment display unit 731a and the segment display unit 731b are turned off. The display state 739 is a display state (intermediate display state) in which the segment display unit 731a is turned on and the segment display unit 731b is turned off. The display state 790 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display unit 731a and the segment display unit 731b are lit.

In this way, the game machine 10 can perform the effect of generating the hold display when the hold memory is generated. As a result, the game machine 10 clearly indicates the generation of the reserved memory to the player, and aims to improve the interest in the generation of the reserved memory.

Next, as one of the display effects using the symbols of the special symbol game displayed in the symbol display area 700, the symbol defect effect that can be executed by the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. FIG. 41 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the symbol defect effect of the third embodiment. FIG. 42
Is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the symbol defect effect of the third embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of the symbol defect effect of the third embodiment.

The symbol defect effect is a display effect in which a part of the symbol of the special symbol game is deleted and displayed. As described above, the 15 types of symbols of the special figure game have different display modes so that they can be distinguished from the other symbols even if any one of the segment display units 707 and 708 is different in lighting mode. The 15 types of symbols in the special figure game can be distinguished from other symbols even if any two of the segment display units 707 and 708 are different in lighting mode, and there are three or more lighting modes depending on the position. Even if they are different, they can be easily distinguished from other symbols.

The symbol defect effect can give the player a surprising feeling and can arouse attention to the symbol. Further, in the symbol defect effect, the display data to be prepared is not excessive and the burden of display control is lighter than that of displaying a decorative element such as a character separately.

The symbol 713 shown in FIG. 41 (1) is a display state in which there is no partial loss in the symbol "3" of the special figure game. The symbol 713 is suitable as the symbol "3" because all the segment display units 707 and 708 at the position to be lit are turned on and all the segment display units 707 and 708 at the position to be turned off are turned off. Has discriminating power.

The symbol 713a shown in FIG. 41 (2) is a display state in which there is one partial defect in the symbol "3" of the special figure game. The symbol 713a is a segment display unit 707 at a position where it should be lit.
, 708, all except the segment display unit 741 are turned on, and all the segment display units 707 and 708 at the positions to be turned off are turned off. The segment display unit 741 has a symbol "
By turning off the part that should be turned on as "3", a partially missing display as the symbol "3" is produced. The symbol 713a has sufficient discriminating power as the symbol "3" although it has a partial defect as the symbol "3".

The symbol 713b shown in FIG. 41 (3) is a display state in which there is one partial defect in the symbol "3" of the special figure game. The symbol 713b is a segment display unit 707 at a position where it should be lit.
, 708, all except the segment display unit 743 are turned on, and all the segment display units 707 and 708 at the positions to be turned off are turned off. The segment display unit 743 has a design "
By turning off the part that should be turned on as "3", a partially missing display as the symbol "3" is produced. The symbol 713b has sufficient discriminating power as the symbol "3" although it has a partial defect as the symbol "3".

As shown in the symbols 713a and 713b, the game machine 10 can produce a partially defective display in which the partially defective positions are different. In this case, the game machine 10 may produce a feeling of expectation of the game depending on where the partially defective position is. For example, the game machine 10 is 1
In the matrix-like arrangement of 0 rows and 7 columns, a defect position located in the upper left may produce a higher expectation, and a defect position located in the lower right may produce a lower expectation. The expectation of the game can produce various expectations regarding the game. For example, it is possible to produce the expectation of hitting, the expectation of distribution with or without the support of Fuden, the expectation of reach production, and the like.

The symbol 713c shown in FIG. 41 (4) is a display state in which a plurality of (for example, two) partial defects are present in the symbol “3” of the special figure game. In the symbol 713c, all of the segment display units 707 and 708 at the position to be lit except for the segment display units 744 and 745 are turned on, and all of the segment display units 707 and 708 at the position to be turned off are turned off. The segment display units 744, 745 turn off the parts that should be turned on as the symbol "3", thereby producing a partially missing display as the symbol "3". The symbol 713c has sufficient discriminating power as the symbol "3" although it has a partial defect as the symbol "3".

As shown in the symbol 713c, the game machine 10 can produce a partial defect display in which the number of partial defects is different. In this case, the game machine 10 may produce a feeling of expectation of the game depending on the number of partial defects. For example, in the matrix arrangement of 10 rows and 7 columns, the game machine 10 may produce a high expectation as the number of defects increases, and may produce a low expectation as the number of defects decreases.

Further, the game machine 10 may produce a feeling of expectation of the game by combining not only how many partial defects are present but also where the partial defects are located. For example, in the matrix arrangement of 10 rows and 7 columns, the game machine 10 produces a high expectation as it is concentrated in a specific position and is defective, and a low expectation is produced as it is scattered and defective as a whole. You may do it.

The symbol 713d shown in FIG. 41 (5) is a display mode that is a modification of the third embodiment.
The segment display units 744 and 745 are displayed in one of two states, a transparent state and a non-transparent state (cherry color). The symbol 713d is a display mode that can be realized by using a transflective LCD display device or an LCD display device instead of the display device 830. The symbol 713d arranges the symbol 713d in front of the background display 746, and makes the background display 746 visible from the segment display units 744 and 745 that are in the transparent state.

The symbol 713d is a display state in which there is no partial loss in the symbol "3" of the special symbol game. The symbol 713d is a segment display unit 707, 70 at a position where it should be in an opaque state (cherry color).
All of 8 are in the opaque state (cherry color), and all of the segment display units 707 and 708 at the positions where the transparent state should be are in the transparent state, so that the background display 746 is transparently displayed and the symbol "3" is displayed. Has suitable discriminating power.

The symbol 713e shown in FIG. 41 (6) is a display state in which there is one partial defect in the symbol "3" (symbol 713d) of the special symbol game. In the symbol 713e, all of the segment display units 707 and 708 that should be in the opaque state (cherry color) except the segment display unit 747 are in the opaque state (cherry color), and the segment display is in the position that should be in the transparent state (cherry color). Part 707
, 708 are all transparent. The segment display unit 747 produces a partially missing display as the symbol "3" by changing the portion that should be in the opaque state (cherry color) as the symbol "3" to the transparent state. The symbol 713e has a partial defect as the symbol "3", but the symbol "3"
Has sufficient discriminating power as. Further, the symbol 713e expands the visible range of the background display 746 through a partial defect of the symbol "3". In addition, the symbol 713e may also produce a sense of expectation of the game by changing the position and number of the partial defects. Further, the symbol 713e may produce a feeling of expectation of the game by the display mode of the background display 746 facing from the partially defective position. In such a case, the background display 746 may have a fixed display mode or may change.

The symbol 713d shown in FIG. 41 (5) is displayed when the segment display units 744 and 745 are in one of three states: a transparent state, an opaque state (white), and an opaque state (cherry color). It may be. The symbol 713f shown in FIG. 41 (7) is the symbol “3” of the special figure game.
"(Symbol 713d) is in a display state with one partial defect. In the symbol 713f, all of the segment display units 707 and 708 that should be in the opaque state (cherry color) except the segment display unit 748 are in the opaque state (cherry color), and the segment display is in the position that should be in the transparent state (cherry color). All of the parts 707 and 708 are in a transparent state. Segment display 748
Is opaque (white) where it should be opaque (cherry-colored) as the symbol "3", thereby producing a partially missing display as the symbol "3". The symbol 713f has sufficient discriminating power as the symbol "3" although it has a partial defect as the symbol "3". Also, the design 713f
Makes it easy to distinguish a partial defect of the symbol "3" from the background display 746. The design 713f
Also, the position and number of partial defects may be changed to produce a feeling of expectation of the game. Also,
When there are two or more defects, the symbol 713f may be a mixture of defects due to the opaque state (white) and defects due to the transparent state. In such a case, the symbol 713f may produce a feeling of expectation of the game by changing the mixed state of the defect due to the opaque state (white) and the defect due to the transparent state.

The symbol 713g shown in FIG. 41 (8) is a display state in which there is one partial defect in the symbol "3" of the special figure game. In the symbol 713g, all of the segment display units 707 and 708 in the position to be lit in cherry blossom color are lit in cherry blossom color except for the segment display unit 749, and all of the segment display units 707 and 708 in the position to be turned off are extinguished. .. Segment display unit 74
In No. 9, the part that should be lit in cherry blossom color as the symbol "3" blinks in cherry blossom color, thereby producing a partially defective display as the symbol "3". The symbol 713g has sufficient discriminating power as the symbol "3" although it has a partial defect as the symbol "3". The segment display unit 749 has a design "
It is assumed that the part that should be lit in cherry blossom color blinks in cherry blossom color as "3", but it may be possible to produce a partial defect as the symbol "3" by blinking or lighting in a color different from the cherry blossom color. In such a case, the symbol 713g may produce a feeling of expectation of the game depending on the blinking mode (blinking pattern, cycle, etc.) and the lighting color. Further, the symbol 713g may produce a sense of expectation of the game by combining it with the defect position and the number of defects in addition to the blinking mode and the lighting color.

The symbol 713h shown in FIG. 42 (1) is a display state in which there is one partial defect in the symbol “3” of the special figure game. The symbol 713h is a segment display unit 707 at a position where it should be lit.
, 708 are all turned on, and all of the segment display units 707 and 708 at positions where they should be turned off are turned off except for the segment display unit 750. The segment display unit 750 has a design "
By turning on the part that should be turned off as "3", a partial missing display (margin missing display, base missing display) as the symbol "3" is produced. The symbol 713h has sufficient discriminating power as the symbol "3" although it has a partial defect as the symbol "3". According to another viewpoint, the symbol 713h has sufficient discriminating power as the symbol "3" although there is a partial surplus display as the symbol "3".

The symbol 713i shown in FIG. 42 (2) is a display state in which there is one partial defect in the symbol “3” of the special figure game. In the design 713i, all of the segment display units 707 and 708 located at positions to be lit in cherry blossoms are lit in cherry blossoms, and the segment display units 707 are located at positions to be turned off.
, 708, all except the segment display unit 751 are turned off. Segment display 75
In No. 1, the part to be turned off as the symbol "3" blinks in cherry blossom color, thereby producing a partial defect display (margin defect display, base defect display) as the symbol "3". The symbol 713i is the symbol "3".
Although there is some deficiency as "", it has sufficient discriminating power as the design "3". According to another viewpoint, the symbol 713i has sufficient discriminating power as the symbol "3" although there is a partial surplus display as the symbol "3". In the segment display unit 749, the part that should be lit in cherry blossom color as the symbol "3" blinks in cherry blossom color, but the symbol "3" is blinked or lit in a color different from the cherry blossom color.
It may be to produce a partial defect as.

The symbol 713j shown in FIG. 42 (3) is a display state in which a plurality of (for example, two) partial defects are present in the symbol “3” of the special figure game. In the symbol 713j, all of the segment display units 707 and 708 in the position to be lit except for the segment display unit 753 are lit, and all of the segment display units 707 and 708 in the position to be turned off except the segment display unit 752 are lit. Turns off. In the segment display units 752 and 753, the part that should be turned off is turned on as the symbol "3", and the part that should be turned off is turned off, so that a part of the missing part is displayed as the symbol "3" (
(Lighting part missing display, turning off part missing display) is produced. The symbol 713j has sufficient discriminating power as the symbol "3" although it has a partial defect as the symbol "3". According to another viewpoint, the symbol 71
In 3j, the symbol "3" is a mixture of the lighting portion missing display and the extinguished portion missing display as the symbol "3".
Has sufficient discriminating power.

The symbol 713k shown in FIG. 42 (4) is a display state in which a plurality of (for example, two) partial defects are present in the symbol “3” of the special figure game. In the symbol 713k, all of the segment display units 707 and 708 that should be lit in cherry blossom color except the segment display unit 755 are lit in cherry blossom color, and the segment display unit of the segment display units 707 and 708 that should be turned off is All but 754 are turned off. In the segment display units 754 and 755, the part that should be turned off as the symbol "3" blinks, and the part that should be turned on blinks, so that the part that should be turned off is displayed as the symbol "3". To produce. The symbol 713k is the symbol "3".
Although there is some deficiency as "", it has sufficient discriminating power as the design "3". According to another viewpoint, the symbol 713k has sufficient discriminating power as the symbol "3" although the lighting portion defect display and the extinguishing portion defect display as the symbol "3" are mixed. Although the segment display units 754 and 755 are supposed to blink in cherry blossom color, the segment display units 754 and 755 may be blinked or lit in a color different from the cherry blossom color to produce a partial defect as the symbol "3".

The symbol 713m shown in FIG. 42 (5) is a modified example of the symbol 713j shown in FIG. 42 (3). The position of the segment display unit that lights up at the position where the symbol 713m should be turned off can be changed. In the symbol 713m, the initial position of the segment display unit that lights up at the position where it should be turned off is set as the segment display unit 752.
Switch to 708. As a result, the symbol 713m is produced so that the segment display unit that lights up at the position where it should be turned off moves and displays in the path 756. By moving the segment display unit that lights up at the position where it should be turned off to the segment display unit 753, the symbol 713m cancels out a partial defect that lights up at the position where it should be turned off and a partial defect that lights up at the position where it should be turned off. And design 713
(See FIG. 23 (1)). In this way, the symbol 713m moves and displays the position of the light-off portion defect display that lights up at the position where it should be turned off, or the position of the lighting portion defect display that lights up at the position where it should be turned off, in the symbol display area. In such a case, the symbol 713m may produce a sense of expectation of the game by the moving path of the lighting portion missing display and the moving route of the extinguished portion missing display.

The symbol 713n shown in FIG. 42 (6) is a modified example of the symbol 713 m shown in FIG. 42 (5). The symbol 713n moves and displays the position of the light-off portion defect display that lights up at the position to be turned off or the position of the lighting portion defect display that turns off at the position that should be turned off beyond the symbol display area. Design 7
The 13n moves and displays the segment display unit 752 that lights up at the position to be turned off by the path 757, and moves the segment display unit 752 out of the symbol display area to correct the lighting mode of the segment display unit 752 to be turned off. Further, in the symbol 713n, the segment display unit 753 that is turned off at the position where it should be turned on is moved and displayed by the pass 757, and the segment display unit 758 that is turned on outside the symbol display area is moved and displayed so as to move within the symbol display area. , The lighting mode of the segment display unit 753 is corrected to lighting. In this way, the symbol 713n moves and displays the position of the light-off portion defect display that lights up at the position where it should be turned off, or the position of the lighting portion defect display that turns off at the position where it should be turned off, beyond the symbol display area. In such a case, the symbol 713n may produce a sense of expectation of the game by the moving path of the lighting portion missing display and the moving route of the extinguished portion missing display.

The symbol 713p shown in FIG. 42 (7) and the symbol 713q shown in FIG. 42 (8) are the symbols 713 (
It is a temporary stop display mode of FIG. 23 (1)). The symbol 713p shows a state in which the symbol 713 is moved upward by one row in the matrix-shaped symbol display area of 10 rows and 7 columns, and the symbol 713q is
It shows how the symbol 713 moves down one row in the matrix-shaped symbol display area of 10 rows and 7 columns. By switching and displaying the symbol 713p, the symbol 713, the symbol 713q, the symbol 713, ..., The gaming machine 10 can produce a temporary stop operation in which the symbol "3" swings in the vertical direction.

At this time, the symbol 713p partially displays the segment display unit 762 in the top row 760. Further, the symbol 713q partially displays the segment display unit 763 in the lowest row 761. That is, the game machine 10 switches and displays the symbol 713 without a partial defect and the symbols 713p and 713q with a partial defect in the temporary stop operation of the symbol "3".
The discriminating power as the symbol "3" is secured by the symbol 713. As a result, the game machine 10
Even if the symbols 713p and 713q are partially defective until they lose some discriminating power, a temporary stop operation having the discriminating power as the symbol "3" is realized. In addition, the game machine 10 can alert the player to the symbol during the temporary stop by performing a partial defect effect at a partial timing of the temporary stop operation. It should be noted that the game machine 10 is intended to perform a partial defect effect at a partial timing of the temporary stop operation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a partial defect effect is performed at a partial timing in the moving display or the deformed display. You may.

Left symbol area 704, middle symbol display area 705, and right symbol display area 706 shown in FIG. 43 (1).
Indicates the reach display state in which the left symbol and the right symbol temporarily stop and display the symbol "7" and the middle symbol is in a variable display. The symbol "7" displayed by the left symbol area 704 partially lacks the segment display unit 765, and the symbol "7" displayed by the right symbol area 706 partially lacks the segment display unit 766. The segment display unit 765 and the segment display unit 766 have the same positional relationship in the matrix-shaped symbol display area of 10 rows and 7 columns. In this way, the game machine 10 can perform the symbol defect effect in a plurality of symbol regions, and the position and the number of the partial defect display corresponding to that case can be made the same. Such a game machine 10 reduces the burden of control processing for the symbol defect effect.

Left symbol area 704, middle symbol display area 705, and right symbol display area 706 shown in FIG. 43 (2).
Indicates the reach display state in which the left symbol and the right symbol temporarily stop and display the symbol "7" and the middle symbol is in a variable display. The symbol "7" displayed by the left symbol area 704 partially lacks the segment display unit 765, and the symbol "7" displayed by the right symbol area 706 partially lacks the segment display unit 766,767. The segment display unit 765 and the segment display unit 766 have the same positional relationship in the matrix-shaped symbol display area of 10 rows and 7 columns, but the segment display unit 765 and the segment display unit 767 have a matrix-shaped symbol of 10 rows and 7 columns. They do not have the same positional relationship in the display area. As described above, when the game machine 10 performs the symbol defect effect in a plurality of symbol regions, the position and the number of the corresponding partial defect display can be changed. In such a game machine 10, the symbols displayed in different symbol display areas can supplement the mutual discriminating power. In such a case, the game machine 10 may produce a feeling of expectation of the game by combining a plurality of missing symbols.

Left symbol area 704, middle symbol display area 705, and right symbol display area 706 shown in FIG. 43 (3).
Indicates that the left symbol and the middle symbol temporarily stop and display the symbol "7", and the right symbol temporarily stops and displays the symbol "3". In the symbol "7" displayed by the left symbol area 704, the segment display unit 768 is displayed as a missing part in the lighting portion, the defect display portion is moved and displayed by the path 769, and the segment display unit 770 is displayed as a missing portion in the extinguished portion. In the symbol "7" displayed by the middle symbol area 705, the segment display unit 771 is displayed as a missing part in the lighting portion, the defective display portion is moved and displayed by the path 772, and the segment display unit 773 is displayed as a missing portion in the extinguished portion.

Since the segment display unit 770 is outside the area of the left symbol area 704, it may be a decorative display unit 735,736,737 in the hold display area 701 or a segment display unit included in the decorative display area 702,703. it can.

As described above, in the left symbol area 704, the middle symbol display area 705, and the right symbol display area 706, the defect display unit can be moved and displayed within each display area, and the defect display unit can be moved and displayed beyond each display area.

Left symbol area 704, middle symbol display area 705, and right symbol display area 706 shown in FIG. 43 (4).
Indicates that the left symbol and the middle symbol temporarily stop and display the symbol "7", and the right symbol temporarily stops and displays the symbol "3". The symbol "3" displayed by the right symbol display area 706 displays the segment display unit 774 as a lighting unit defect, and moves and displays the defect display unit to the segment display unit 771 of the middle symbol display area 705 by the pass 775. As a result, the segment display unit 771 of the middle symbol display area 705
Restores the lighting part defect display to the normal display mode.

Further, in the symbol "7" displayed by the middle symbol display area 705, the segment display portion 773 that had been displayed as missing in the extinguished portion is restored to a normal display mode, and the defective display portion is displayed in the path 778 in the left symbol area 70.
The segment display unit 768 of 4 is moved and displayed. As a result, in the segment display unit 773 of the middle symbol display area 705, the display mode in which the light-off portion is missing is restored to the normal display mode, and the left symbol area 704
In the segment display unit 768 of the above, the display mode in which the light-off portion is missing is restored to the normal display mode.

In this way, the left symbol area 704, the middle symbol display area 705, and the right symbol display area 706 can move and display the missing display unit between the display areas. Further, the left symbol area 704 and the middle symbol display area 7
The 05 and the right symbol display area 706 are between symbols of the same type (for example, the left symbol "7" and the middle symbol "7".
) Can be used to move and display the missing display, and between different types of symbols (for example, the right symbol "3" and the middle symbol "3".
7 ”) allows the defect display unit to be moved and displayed.

Next, in the symbol defect effect of the modified example of the third embodiment, the segment display of the regular shape is deleted by changing the segment display that is a part of the symbol to a different shape display instead of the regular shape display. The symbol defect effect of the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol defect effect of a modified example of the third embodiment.

The display device 830a is, for example, an LCD display device, and displays a symbol in a segment by the LCD. The left symbol area 704a, the middle symbol display area 705a, and the right symbol display area 706a each display a symbol by a set of segment displays having a regular petal shape.

In such a display device 830a, the shape of the segment display units 780 and 781 is changed to remove a part of the symbol. For example, the segment display unit 780 is different in size and lacks one petal-shaped segment display having a regular size. Further, the segment display unit 781 changes the shape to a single flower shape, and lacks one segment display having a petal shape, which is a regular shape.

Similar to the left symbol area 704a, the middle symbol display area 705a, and the right symbol display area 706a, the display device 830a can perform a loss effect of the hold display in the hold display area 701a.

Next, the missing effect of the hold display will be described. Since the hold display is also displayed as a set of a plurality of segment displays like the symbol, it is possible to perform a defect effect in which a part of the display is missing. First, the defect effect when the hold display occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a defect effect when a hold display occurs according to the third embodiment.

As described with reference to FIG. 40, the game machine 10 performs a hold display generation animation when the hold storage occurs. When the defect effect is not performed, the generated animation changes the display state 738 to the initial state, the display state 739 to the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 790 to the display state 739 for the hold display unit corresponding to the hold memory occurrence. The display state is sequentially switched as the subsequent final state.

On the other hand, when performing the defect effect, the generated animation displays the display state 738 as the initial state, the display state 739 as the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 791 as the hold display unit corresponding to the hold memory occurrence. The display state is sequentially switched as the final state following 739. Alternatively, the generation animation sequentially displays the display state 738 as the initial state, the display state 739 as the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 792 as the final state following the display state 739 for the hold display unit corresponding to the hold storage occurrence. Switch states.

The display state 790 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display unit 731a and the segment display unit 731b are lit, and is a display state without any defects. The display state 791 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display unit 731a is turned on and the segment display unit 731b is turned off, and the display state is partially defective. The display state 792 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display unit 731a is turned off and the segment display unit 731b is turned on, and the display state is partially defective. In this way, the game machine 10 can perform a defect effect when the hold display occurs. Further, since the game machine 10 can perform a different mode of defect effect when the hold display occurs, the game machine 10 may produce a feeling of expectation of the game depending on the hold display defect mode.

Further, the game machine 10 has three final states (display state 79) with the display state 739 as an intermediate state.
Although it branched to 0,791,792), it may be branched into three final states (display state 790,791,792) with the display state 790 as an intermediate state. Also, the game machine 10
Is the initial state of the display state 738, omitting the intermediate state, and three final states (display state 79).
You may branch to 0,791,792).

Here, a defect effect of a different development form will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 46 shows the third
It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the defect effect at the time of the hold display occurrence of the embodiment.
For example, in the defect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 46 (1), the display state 738 is the initial state, the display state 739 is the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 791 is the final state following the display state 739. In such a developed form (defective pattern 1), since the display state 790 without the defect display is not included in the intermediate state, a surprising feeling can be strongly produced.

Further, in the defect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 46 (2), the display state 738 is set as the initial state, the display state 739 is set as the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 790 is set as the intermediate state following the display state 739, and the display state is set. 791 is the final state following the display state 790. In such a developed form (deficiency pattern 2), the display state 790, which is an intermediate state, can be held for a predetermined time, and a time lag can be provided to perform the defect display effect. it can.

For example, in the defect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 46 (3), the display state 738 is the initial state, the display state 739 is the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 792 is the final state following the display state 739. In such a developed form (defective pattern 3), since the display state 790 without the defect display is not included in the intermediate state, a surprising feeling can be strongly produced.

Further, in the defect pattern 4 shown in FIG. 46 (4), the display state 738 is set as the initial state, the display state 739 is set as the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 790 is set as the intermediate state following the display state 739, and the display state is set. 792 is the final state following the display state 790. In such a developed form (deficiency pattern 4), the display state 790, which is an intermediate state, can be held for a predetermined time, and a time lag can be provided to perform the defect display effect. it can.

In this way, since the game machine 10 can perform the defect effect in a different development form when the hold display occurs, the expectation of the game is produced by the development form up to the defect mode when the hold display occurs. May be good.

Next, the display mode of the hold display unit will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the hold display unit of the third embodiment. FIG. 47 (1) shows the hold display area 70.
1 shows a state in which the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is “0” when the special figure 1 game is being held and displayed (special figure 1 hold 0). At this time, the hold display area 701 is the first hold display unit 731, the second hold display unit 732, the third hold display unit 733, and the fourth hold display unit 7.
34 and the decorative display unit 735,736,737 are displayed in a light-off state.

In FIG. 47 (2), when the hold display of the special figure 1 game is performed in the hold display area 701, the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is “3”, and the third hold display is missing and displayed. It shows the state of being (Special Figure 1 Hold 3 (No. 3 missing)). At this time, the hold display area 701 displays the first hold display unit 731 and the second hold display unit 732 in the display state 790, and the third hold display unit 7
33 is displayed in the display state 791, and the 4th hold display unit 734 and the decorative display unit 735,736,7 are displayed.
37 is displayed in the off state.

The hold display area 701 of FIG. 47 (3) shows a state in which the hold shift is performed from the state of FIG. 47 (2) due to the start of fluctuation. Therefore, in FIG. 47 (3), the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is “2”.
It shows a state in which the second hold display is missing (Special Figure 1 Hold 2 (No. 2 missing)). At this time, the hold display area 701 displays the first hold display unit 731 in the display state 790.
The second hold display unit 732 is displayed in the display state 791, and the third hold display unit 733, the fourth hold display unit 734, and the decorative display unit 736, 737 are displayed in the off state. The decorative display unit 735
Lights up in a display mode indicating that variable display is in progress. In the hold display area 701, the decorative display unit 735 also serves as the hold digestion display, instead of providing the hold digestion display indicating that the hold digestion is in progress.

The hold display area 701 of FIG. 47 (4) shows a state in which hold occurs from the state of FIG. 47 (3). Therefore, in FIG. 47 (4), the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is "3", the second reserved display is missing, and the third reserved display is displaying the generated animation. (Special Figure 1 Hold 3 (No. 2 Missing, No. 3 Occurrence Animation)) is shown. At this time, the hold display area 701 displays the first hold display unit 731 in the display state 790, and the second hold display unit 7
The 32nd and 3rd hold display units 733 are displayed in the display state 791, and the 4th hold display unit 734 and the decorative display unit 736 are displayed in the off state. The decorative display unit 735 lights up in a display mode indicating that variable display is in progress, and the decorative display unit 737 lights up in a display mode indicating that a hold has occurred. Hold display area 7
01 indicates that the decorative display unit 737 indicates that the hold has occurred, so that the third hold display unit 733, which is in the process of being held, is not confirmed as a missing display.

The hold display area 701 of FIG. 47 (5) shows how the generated animation performed in the state of FIG. 47 (4) has ended. Therefore, FIG. 47 (5) shows a state in which the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is “3” and the second reserved display is missing (special figure 1 reserved 3 (2nd missing)). .. At this time, in the hold display area 701, the first hold display unit 731 and the third hold display unit 733 are displayed in the display state 790, and the second hold display unit 732 is displayed in the display state 791.
The 4th hold display unit 734 and the decorative display unit 736 and 737 are displayed in the off state. The decorative display unit 735 lights up in a display mode indicating that the variable display is in progress. The hold display area 701 guides that the third hold display unit 733, which has been held due to the decorative display unit 737 being turned off, does not display a defect. It should be noted that the No. 3 hold display unit 733 may display the defect at a different time such as when shifting.

FIG. 47 (6) shows a state in which the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game is “1” when the hold display of the special figure 2 game is performed in the hold display area 701 (special figure 2 hold 1). At this time, the hold display area 701 displays the first hold display unit 731 in the display state 790, the second hold display unit 732, the third hold display unit 733, the fourth hold display unit 734, and the decorative display unit 735,73.
7 and are displayed in the off state. The decorative display unit 736 is lit in a display mode indicating that the special figure 2 game is on hold. The hold display area 701 is provided with a distinctive display for distinguishing between the hold display of the special figure 1 game and the hold display of the special figure 2 game, instead of providing the decorative display unit 73.
6 also serves as a distinction display.

It should be noted that the game machine 10 can perform another effect (special effect) in addition to the defect effect when performing the defect effect of the symbol or the hold display. For example, the special effect includes a moving display effect of the defect display unit performed together with the defect effect of the symbol, and a decorative display unit 735 together with the defect effect of the hold display.
, 736,737, etc. In addition, the special effect includes an effect related to a hold display during a symbol defect effect, an effect related to a symbol during a hold display defect effect, and the like. In addition, the special effect is a symbol display area 700, a hold display area 701, and a decorative display area 702.
, 703, there are a reversal effect of light and darkness, a scattered effect of petals by a segment display unit imitating a petal, and other effect effects. In addition to other display effects performed by the display device 830 and the like, the special effects include sound output effects performed by the sound output devices 19a and 19b, operation effects performed by using the push buttons 25, and the board decoration device 46. There are a light emitting effect performed by using the frame decoration device 18 and the like, a movable effect performed by using the board effect device 44 and the like.

Next, as a modification of the third embodiment, a defect effect for a symbol that highlights and ambiguously (non-emphasizes) the outline of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 shows
It is a figure which shows the highlighting display and the ambiguous (non-emphasis) display of the outline of the symbol during the defect effect of the modification of the third embodiment.

The symbol width and outline of the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B during the defect effect are shown in FIG. 48 (1), and the thickness of the outline and the thickness of the outline of the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B during the defect effect are shown in FIG. 48 (1). Comparison is shown in FIG. 48 (2)
Shown in.

Each of the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B can perform a defect effect in which a part of the symbol is deleted. In each of the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B, when a partial defect of the symbol causes the contour line to be deleted, the defect portion contour line is displayed corresponding to the partial defect of the symbol.

In the decorative symbol A, the symbol width is w1, the width of the number part is w2 (<w1), the width (thickness) of the contour line of the number part is w3 (<w2), and the thickness of the contour line of the missing part is w10. To do. In the decorative symbol B, the symbol width is w4, the width (thickness) of the outline of the symbol is w5 (<w4), and the thickness of the contour line of the defective portion is w11.

The game machine 10 emphasizes the contour display of the number part of the decorative symbol A and decorates it by making the width w3 of the contour line of the number part of the decorative symbol A larger than the width w5 of the contour line of the symbol of the decorative symbol B. It is possible to make the player feel that the outline display of the symbol of the symbol B is ambiguous.

Further, the defect contour line thickness w10 is thinner than the contour line width w3 of the number portion of the decorative symbol A, thereby assisting the perception of the thickness of the contour line width w3 of the number portion of the decorative symbol A. be able to. Further, the defect contour line thickness w11 is thinner than the contour line width w5 of the decorative symbol B, so that the thickness of the contour line width w5 of the decorative symbol B can be assisted. it can.

Further, since the defect portion contour line thickness w10 is thicker than the width w3 of the contour line of the number portion of the decorative symbol A, it is possible to assist the perception of the defect of the number portion of the decorative symbol A. Further, since the defect portion contour line thickness w11 is thicker than the width w5 of the contour line of the symbol of the decorative symbol B, it is possible to assist the perception of the defect of the symbol of the decorative symbol B.

In the game machine 10, the width of the contour line of the number part of the decorative symbol A is set by making the thickness w10 of the defective portion of the decorative symbol A and the thickness w11 of the defective portion of the decorative symbol B the same. It can be used as a reference when the width w5 of the contour line of the symbol w3 or the symbol of the decorative symbol B is perceived.

Further, in the game machine 10, the defect portion contour line thickness w10 of the decorative symbol A and the defect portion contour line thickness w11 of the decorative symbol B may be different. In this case, the game machine 10 sets the defect contour line thickness w10 of the decorative symbol A to the symbol width w1, the width w2 of the number portion, or the width w3 of the contour line of the number portion.
It may be determined according to the ratio or difference between. Further, the game machine 10 has a decorative pattern B.
The defect portion contour line thickness w11 may be determined according to the ratio or difference between the symbol width w4 and the contour line width w5 of the symbol.

Further, the game machine 10 makes the size of the defect contour line thickness w10 of the decorative symbol A variable, and guides the expectation of the game according to the size of the defect contour line thickness w10 of the decorative symbol A. It may be a thing. Further, the game machine 10 makes the size of the defective contour line thickness w11 of the decorative symbol B variable, and guides the expectation of the game according to the size of the defective contour line thickness w11 of the decorative symbol B. It may be a thing.

Further, the defect contour line thickness w10 of the decorative symbol A and the defect contour line thickness w11 of the decorative symbol B may be fixed at all times, but can be switched according to the variable display state. It may be a thing. For example
The emphasis of the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A and the non-emphasis of the outline display of the symbol of the decorative symbol B are
It may be fixed at all times, but it may be switchable according to the variable display state. In that case, the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A is emphasized and the symbol of the decorative symbol B is emphasized. From the viewpoint of facilitating the non-emphasis of the contour display of the decorative symbol A, it is desirable that the defect contour line thickness w10 of the decorative symbol A and the defect contour line thickness w11 of the decorative symbol B are fixed.

The non-emphasis of the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A and the emphasis of the outline display of the symbol of the decorative symbol B are
It may be fixed at all times, but it may be switchable according to the variable display state. In that case, the non-emphasis of the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B may be changed. From the viewpoint of facilitating the impression of emphasizing the outline display of the symbol, it is desirable that the defect contour line thickness w10 of the decorative symbol A and the defect contour line thickness w11 of the decorative symbol B are fixed.

Next, a modified example of a more detailed display mode of the decorative symbols A and B during the temporary stop display will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop display using a decorative symbol during the defect effect of the modified example of the third embodiment. Regarding the configuration similar to that of the first embodiment, the reference numerals may be the same and the description thereof may be omitted.

FIG. 49 (1) shows a temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 as an example of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display while performing the defect effect. Temporary stop display modes of symbol 527 are (a), (b), (
c) and (d) are repeated periodically.

In the symbol 527 during the temporary stop display, the background portion 527d is fixed, and the number portion 527n having the distinctiveness as the symbol 527 while having a part missing thereof swings in the left-right direction (first temporary stop operation). While expanding and contracting in the vertical direction (second temporary stop operation).

The number portion 527n expands and contracts in the vertical direction while fixing the relative position and relative size of the defective portion and the (relative) thickness w10 of the contour line of the defective portion and swinging in the left-right direction. Further, the number portion 527n is the absolute position, absolute size, and (absolute) thickness w10 of the contour line of the defect portion.
It expands and contracts in the vertical direction while fixing and swinging in the horizontal direction. The relative here means the relationship between the number part 527n and the defective part, and the absolute means the relationship between the display area of the display device 830 and the display position of the defective part.

Further, the number portion 527n may display the temporary stop by making at least one of the position, size, and the thickness w10 of the contour line of the defective portion variable (third temporary stop operation).
Further, the number portion 527n expands and contracts in the vertical direction while swinging in the horizontal direction, instead of expanding and contracting in the vertical direction.
The temporary stop operation may be performed by making at least one of the position, size, and contour line thickness w10 of the defective portion variable.

As an example of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display while performing the defect effect in FIGS. 49 (2) and 49 (3), the temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 is shown. The temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 is (a).
, (B), (c), (d) are repeated periodically. The symbol 537 in the temporary stop display swings the entire symbol 537 in the vertical direction while losing a part of the symbol 537.

The symbol 537 may be temporarily stopped by changing at least one of the position, size, and contour line thickness w11 of the defective portion. Further, the symbol 537 performs a temporary stop operation by changing at least one of the position and size of the defective portion and the contour line thickness w11 of the defective portion instead of swinging in the vertical direction. There may be.

It should be noted that the decorative symbol B shown in FIG. 49 (2), which is temporarily stopped and displayed while performing the defect effect, is
This is a display mode in which the relative position of the defective portion is fixed (not variable) with respect to the symbol 537, and the absolute position is variable (not fixed) with respect to the display area of the display device 830. In such a defect display, the symbol 537 and the defect portion can be displayed integrally, and the display range on the back side facing from the defect portion can be increased by swinging the symbol 537.

Further, the decorative symbol B shown in FIG. 49 (3), which is temporarily stopped and displayed while performing the defect effect, is
It is a display mode in which the relative position of the defective portion is variable (not fixed) with respect to the symbol 537, and the absolute position is fixed (not fixed) with respect to the display area of the display device 830. Such a defect display can be displayed without a sense of unity between the symbol 537 and the defect portion, and even if the symbol 537 swings, the display range on the back side facing from the defect portion can be fixed.

Next, as a modification of the third embodiment, FIG. 50 is used to apply the defect effect to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment in which the thickness of the contour display can be different for each part of the decorative pattern. explain. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol during the defect effect of the modified example of the third embodiment.

FIG. 50 (1) shows a state in which the partially missing “7” (symbol 537) of the decorative symbol B is rotated on the vertical axis to temporarily stop and display. The symbol 550 indicates that the “7” of the decorative symbol B is rotated counterclockwise on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. The symbol 551 shows a state in which the "7" of the decorative symbol B is viewed from the front. The symbol 552 shows a state in which "7" of the decorative symbol B is rotated to the right on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. For example
The game machine 10 can perform a temporary stop display by switching from the symbol 550 to the symbol 552 via the symbol 551 and from the symbol 552 to the symbol 550 via the symbol 551.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 50 (2), the game machine 10 can switch the thickness (emphasis degree) of the contour display for each switching target contour display portion (left half of the symbol, right half of the symbol). ..
Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (2), the game machine 10 can switch the thickness (degree of emphasis) of the defect outline display.

In the game machine 10, the left half of the symbol 550 is the left portion 550L, and the right half of the symbol 550 is the right portion 5.
When it is set to 50R, the outline display of the left part 550L that seems to move in the moving direction is displayed thinly (non-highlighted, ambiguous display), and the outline display and the missing part outline of the right part 550R that seems to move in the approaching direction. Make the display thicker (highlighted). In other words, the game machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 550L, which looks farther than the right portion 550R, thinner than the contour display of the right portion 550R and the contour display of the missing portion, and displays the contour of the right portion 550R, which looks closer than the left portion 550L. The contour display and the contour display of the defective portion are displayed thicker than the contour display of the left portion 550L.

Further, in the game machine 10, when the left half of the symbol 551 is the left portion 551L and the right half of the symbol 551 is the right portion 551R, the contour display of the left portion 551L, the contour display of the right portion 551R, and the contour display of the missing portion are performed. Is the standard thickness (standard display). In other words, the game machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 551L, the contour display of the right portion 551R, and the contour display of the missing portion, which appear at substantially the same depth position, with the same thickness (standard thickness).

Further, in the game machine 10, when the left half of the symbol 552 is the left portion 552L and the right half of the symbol 552 is the right portion 552R, the outline display of the left portion 552L which seems to move in the approaching direction is thickened (highlighted). ) Is displayed, and the outline display of the right portion 552R and the outline display of the missing portion, which appear to move in the direction away from the display, are displayed thinly (non-highlighted, ambiguous display). In other words, the game machine 10
Shows the contour display of the right portion 552R and the contour display of the missing portion, which can be seen farther than the left portion 552L, from the left portion 55.
The contour display of the left portion 552L, which is displayed thinner than the contour display of 2L and is closer to the right portion 552R and the defect portion contour display, is displayed thicker than the contour display of the right portion 552R.

As a result, the game machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbol and the defect effect. The left or right part of the symbol may be uniformly highlighted or unhighlighted, but the degree of emphasis or non-highlighting differs depending on the distance from the vertical axis (central axis). You may do so.

Further, the game machine 10 may divide one defect display into two regions in the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbol, and control the thickness of the defect outline display in each region.
It is also possible to control the thickness of the defect outline display in each of the defect displays by performing one or more defect displays. For example, the game machine 10 narrows the outline display of the defect portion (non-highlighting, non-highlighting) for the left defect portion of the symbol 550 (the left region when one defect display is divided into two, or the left defect display of the two defect displays). (Vague display) is displayed, and the outline display of the defect portion is displayed thickly (highlighted) for the right defect portion (the right region when one defect display is divided into two, or the right defect display of the two defect displays). Further, the game machine 10 uses a standard thickness for the defect portion outline display for the left-side defect portion and the right-side defect portion of the symbol 551 (standard display). In addition, game machine 1
0 indicates that the defect portion outline display is thickened (highlighted) for the left-side defect portion of the symbol 552, and the defect portion outline display is thinned (non-highlighted, ambiguous display) for the right-side defect portion.

Further, the game machine 10 may display the defect outline display as no outline display in the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbol.
Further, the game machine 10 may display the defect outline display with a thickness in the depth direction in the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbol, and in that case, one defect display may be displayed at the front position and the depth position, respectively. The thickness of the defect outline display may be controlled. For example, the game machine 10 displays the defect outline display thinly (non-highlighted, ambiguous display) for the front of the defective portion with depth of the symbol 550, and thickens (highlighted) the defect portion outline display for the back of the defective portion with depth. To do. Further, the game machine 10 has a standard thickness of the defect portion outline display for the front of the defective portion with depth and the back of the defective portion with depth of the symbol 551 (standard display). Further, the game machine 10 displays the defect outline display thickly (highlighted) in front of the defective portion with depth of the symbol 552, and thins the defect portion outline display (non-highlighted, ambiguous display) in the back of the defective portion with depth. ..

The game machine 10 may perform a missing effect on the message effect in the variable display game described with reference to FIG. 23, and may perform a missing effect on the message display in which the thickness of the outline display portion of the message display is controlled. You can do it. At this time, the game machine 1
When 0, the position, number, size, and contour line thickness of the defective portion can be controlled with respect to the message display.

The gaming machine 10 (including a modified example) of the third embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The game machine 10 is a first production means (for example, a first production means (for example,) capable of displaying display elements (for example, special symbols, hold display) related to a game (for example, a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game) to produce a game. A game control device 100a, an effect control device 300, and a display device 83 that perform a defect effect.
0) and a second effect means (for example, a game control device 100a for performing a special effect, an effect control device 300) capable of producing a game in an effect mode different from that of the first effect means at the same time as the first effect means.
, Display device 830), and the first effect means, when displaying a display element, has a first state (for example, a symbol 713, a display state of a hold display 790) for displaying all of the display elements, and a display element. It can be displayed in the second state (for example, symbol 713a, display state 791 of the hold display) in which a part of the display is missing (see FIGS. 41 and 47).

(2) The game machine 10 is a first production means (for example, a first production means (for example,) capable of displaying display elements (for example, special symbols, hold display) related to a game (for example, special figure 1 game, special figure 2 game) and directing the game. A game control device 100a, an effect control device 300, and a display device 83 that perform a defect effect.
0) and a second effect means (for example, a game control device 100a for performing a special effect, an effect control device 300) capable of producing a game in an effect mode different from that of the first effect means at the same time as the first effect means.
, Display device 830), and the first effect means displays a display configuration when displaying the display element as an aggregate of two or more display components (for example, one of the segment display units 707 and 708 that lights up). The first state in which the display element is displayed by all of the elements (for example, symbol 71).
3. The display state of the hold display 790) and the second state (for example, the symbol 713a, the display state 791 of the hold display) in which a part of the display component is deleted and the display element is displayed can be displayed (for example).
41 and 47).

(3) The display element of (1) or (2) is a symbol that is variablely displayed in the game (
41 to 43).
(4) The display element of (1) or (2) is a hold display for displaying the execution right of the game in the game (see FIGS. 45 to 47).

(5) The game machine 10 has an execution time (for example, variable display time) exclusively predetermined for the first game (for example, the special figure 1 game) and the second game (for example, the special figure 2 game). It includes an executable control unit (for example, a game control device 100a, an effect control device 300). The control unit determines the execution time of the first game based on the total value of the storage number of the execution right of the first game and the storage number of the execution right of the second game (see FIG. 35).

(6) In the control unit of (5), the larger the total value of the number of stored execution rights of the first game and the number of stored execution rights of the second game, the longer the execution time of the first game. (See FIG. 35).

(7) The control unit of (5) expects the execution time of the first game as the total value of the number of stored execution rights of the first game and the number of stored execution rights of the second game is larger. The value is determined to be large (see FIG. 35).

(8) The game machine 10 has an execution time (for example, variable display time) exclusively predetermined for the first game (for example, the special figure 1 game) and the second game (for example, the special figure 2 game). It includes an executable control unit (for example, a game control device 100a, an effect control device 300). The control unit determines the execution time of the first game based on the number of stored execution rights of the first game and the number of stored execution rights of the second game, and determines the execution time of the second game. The determination is made based only on the number of stored execution rights of the second game, not on the number of stored execution rights of the first game (see FIG. 35).

(9) The maximum number of stored execution rights of the second game in (5) to (8) is smaller than the maximum number of stored execution rights of the first game (see FIG. 31).
(10) The maximum number of stored execution rights of the second game in (9) is 1 (see FIG. 31).
..

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the description of the game machines of the first to third embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2).
Alternatively, the game machine provided with the game board 800 (see FIG. 28) has been described, but the game machine of the fourth embodiment can be applied to any of them. Regarding the same configurations as those of the first to third embodiments, the reference numerals may be the same and the description thereof may be omitted.

The game machine 10 of the fourth embodiment prevents the game production after the notice notification from becoming redundant by notifying the result of the variable display game first by the notice notification, and makes it possible to reduce the deterioration of the interest.

First, among the fluctuation display commands prepared by the game machine 10, three fluctuation display commands (variation display commands A, B, and C) that can be notified of advance notice and have different fluctuation display times will be described. First, a variation display command A capable of deriving a hit in a relatively short time will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of a variation display mode corresponding to the variation display command A of the fourth embodiment.

The variation display command A is one of the variation display commands transmitted by the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. The game control device 100 may transmit a stop symbol command, a hold display command, or the like together with the variation display command. The variation display command A is a command corresponding to the variation display effect of the variation time T0.

The effect control device 300 receives the variation display command A, generates a variation display effect of the variation time T0, and executes the variation display effect in the required effect device. The variation display command A has an aspect that the time is not sufficient to perform various effects because the variation time is short, but it also has an aspect that the time for deriving the result is fast.

The effect control device 300 executes the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation within the fluctuation time T0. The first half variation is a common effect mode in a plurality of variation display commands, and is responsible for displaying the stop-displayed symbol in a variable speed at a predetermined speed, for example. The latter half variation is an effect mode that differs for each variation display command, and is responsible for stopping the symbol, including, for example, a reach effect. The variation display command A allocates the time T01 to the first half variation and the time T02 to the second half variation of the variation time T0. The time T01 is shorter than the time T02.

The latter half variation of the variation display command A includes a notice effect of time T021, a reach effect of time T022, and a short SP (special) reach effect of time T023. Notice production
It is a production that announces the result of the variable display game with a predetermined reliability. For example, the notice production includes a confirmation notice (correct notice) effect that notifies the jackpot confirmation, a high reliability notice effect that notifies the jackpot with a higher reliability than the low reliability notice effect, and a high reliability notice. There is a low-reliability notice production that announces a big hit with a low reliability compared to the production. It should be noted that the advance notice effect may be an advance notice of the value of the hit and the effect mode of the process of deriving the hit.

The reach effect is an effect of the variable display process of the variable display game. For example, a reach establishment process and a reach with low expectation, which is regarded as a normal reach, are produced. Short SP reach production is a form of development reach that develops from normal reach, and produces reach with medium expectations.

The variable display command A derives a hit as a result of the short SP reach effect, and the game machine 10 prepares a command for deriving a loss as a result separately from the variable display command A.

Next, the variation display command B, which can derive a hit in a longer time than the variation display command A, will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a variation display mode corresponding to the variation display command B of the fourth embodiment.

The variation display command B is one of the variation display commands transmitted by the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. The variation display command B is a command corresponding to the variation display effect of the variation time T1 (> T0).

The effect control device 300 receives the variation display command B, generates the variation display effect of the variation time T1, and executes the variation display effect in the required effect device. Since the variation display command B has a longer variation time than the variation display command A, it has an aspect that it can perform more various effects than the variation display command A, but it takes more time to derive a result than the variation display command A. It also has the aspect of being slow.

The effect control device 300 executes the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation within the fluctuation time T1. The variation display command B allocates the time T11 (= T01) of the variation time T1 to the first half variation and the time T12 (> T02) to the second half variation. The time T11 is shorter than the time T12.

The latter half variation of the variation display command B includes a notice effect of time T121, a reach effect of time T122, and a long SP reach effect of time T123 (effect pattern B01).
Notice production of time T121, reach production of time T122, and time T124 (= T023)
There is a case where the short SP reach effect of the above and the correct effect during the fluctuation of the time T125 are included (effect pattern B02).

Long SP reach production is a form of development reach that develops from normal reach, and produces a reach with high expectations. During the fluctuation, the correct effect is produced that the hit is confirmed before the variation display result is derived. The variable production may be, for example, a fanfare production performed during the fluctuation, or a lottery production such as a symbol, a probability fluctuation, or a general electric support. Further, the fluctuating correct effect may be a freeze effect, a lively effect, or the like, and may also display the fluctuating remaining time. In addition, the accuracy effect during fluctuation may be performed by displaying the symbol as the variable display result, or may be performed by hiding the symbol as the variable display result. Even when the variable display result is hidden, the variable display result is displayed by the end of the variable display result.

The effect control device 300 can selectively execute the effect pattern B01 and the effect pattern B02 when the variable display command B is received, and when the correct effect is executed in the advance notice effect, the effect pattern B02 is more than the effect pattern B01. Makes it easier to select.

Since the game machine 10 does not contribute to the improvement of the interest even if the expectation is raised in the production after the execution of the final notice production, it is easy to select the production pattern B02 that can notify the result before the production pattern B01. .. As a result, the game machine 10 suppresses that the game production after the advance notice is redundant and causes a decrease in the interest, and enables the game production after the result is confirmed even during the variable display to improve the interest. ..

As described above, the game machine 10 can make the game effect after the advance notice non-redundant by the amount that the short SP reach effect time T124 is shorter than the long SP reach effect time T123. Further, the game machine 10 can be allocated to the effect after the hit is confirmed only for the time T125 of the correct effect during the fluctuation.

Further, the game machine 10 guides the game result by the same short SP reach effect as the fluctuation display command A in the fluctuation display command B whose fluctuation time is longer than that of the fluctuation display command A.
Non-redundant game progress can be realized by assigning the correct effect during fluctuation to the surplus time.

The variable display command B derives a hit as a result of the short SP reach effect or as a result of the long SP reach effect, and the game machine 10 refers to a command for deriving the loss as a result of the variable display command B. Prepare separately.

Next, the variation display command C, which can derive a hit in a longer time than the variation display command B, will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of a variation display mode corresponding to the variation display command C of the fourth embodiment.

The variation display command C is one of the variation display commands transmitted by the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. The variation display command C is a command corresponding to the variation display effect of the variation time T2 (> T0, T1).

The effect control device 300 receives the variation display command C, generates the variation display effect of the variation time T2, and executes the variation display effect in the required effect device. The variation display command C has an aspect that it can perform more various effects than the variation display commands A and B because the variation time is longer than the variation display commands A and B, but it is more than the variation display commands A and B. It also has the aspect that the time to derive the result is slow.

The effect control device 300 executes the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation within the fluctuation time T2. The variation display command C allocates the time T21 (= T01, T11) of the variation time T2 to the first half variation and the time T22 (> T02, T12) to the second half variation. In addition, time T21
Is shorter than the time T22.

The latter half variation of the variation display command C includes the advance notice effect of the time T221, the reach effect of the time T222, and the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach of the time T223 (effect pattern C01), and the advance notice effect of the time T221. There is a case where the reach effect of the time T222, the short SP reach effect of the time T224 (= T023), and the correct effect during the fluctuation of the time T225 (> T125) are included (effect pattern C02).

Long SP reach production via short SP reach is a form of development reach that develops from normal reach, and produces a reach with high expectations that leads to long SP reach through short SP reach.

The effect control device 300 can selectively execute the effect pattern C01 and the effect pattern C02 when the variable display command C is received, and when the correct effect is executed in the advance notice effect, the effect pattern C02 is more than the effect pattern C01. Makes it easier to select.

Since the game machine 10 does not contribute to the improvement of the interest even if the expectation is raised in the production after the execution of the final notice production, it is easy to select the production pattern C02 that can notify the result before the production pattern C01. .. As a result, the game machine 10 suppresses that the game production after the advance notice is redundant and causes a decrease in the interest, and enables the game production after the result is confirmed even during the variable display to improve the interest. ..

As described above, the game machine 10 can make the game effect after the advance notice non-redundant by the amount that the short SP reach effect time T224 is shorter than the long SP reach effect time T223 via the short SP reach. In addition, the game machine 10 has a time T225 of the correct production during the fluctuation.
It can be assigned to the production after the hit is confirmed.

Further, the game machine 10 guides the game result by the same short SP reach effect as the fluctuation display command A in the fluctuation display command C whose fluctuation time is longer than that of the fluctuation display command A.
Non-redundant game progress can be realized by assigning the correct effect during fluctuation to the surplus time.

The variable display command C derives a hit as a result of the short SP reach effect or as a result of the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach, and the game machine 10 varies the command for deriving the loss as a result. Prepare separately from the display command C.

In this way, the game machine 10 uses the variable display commands A, B, and C as a hit as a result of the short SP reach effect by the variable display command A and as a result of the long SP reach effect by the variable display command B. Achieve a hit as a result of a long SP reach effect via a short SP reach by the variable display command C, and a hit as a result of a short SP reach effect accompanied by a correct effect during fluctuation by the variable display commands B and C. ..

The fluctuation pattern table described with reference to FIG. 2 includes a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and a reach state. A table (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern before the above, is included. The first half variation in the variation display commands A, B, and C may correspond to the effect content selected in the first half variation group table, the first half variation pattern selection table, or the like. Further, the latter half variation in the variation display commands A, B, and C may correspond to the effect content selected in the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, or the like.

Further, in the fluctuation display commands A, B, and C, the first half fluctuation is a common effect mode in a plurality of fluctuation display commands, and for example, it is said that the stop-displayed symbol is responsible for the fluctuation display at a predetermined speed. In addition, it may be responsible for a predetermined production break.

Next, the display screens during the game corresponding to the variable display commands A, B, and C will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 58. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the game of the fourth embodiment (
That is 1). FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the game of the fourth embodiment (No. 2).
). FIG. 56 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of the display screen during the game of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 57 is a diagram (No. 4) showing an example of the display screen during the game of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 58 is a diagram (No. 5) showing an example of the display screen during the game of the fourth embodiment.

The display screen 600 shown in FIG. 54 (1) is a display screen in which the symbol is stopped, and after the end of the variable display in the variable display game (before the start of the next variable display game), the symbol which is the result mode of the variable display game is determined. The period is stopped and displayed. The display screen 600 includes a large symbol group 501, a small symbol group 502, a special figure 1 hold number display 503, a special figure 2 hold number display 504, a hold display (hold standby display) 505, and a hold digestion display 506. Is displayed.

On the display screen 600, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", and the middle symbol is
The symbol on the right indicates that the symbol is stopped at "5", and the symbol on the right indicates that the symbol is stopped at "7". That is, on the display screen 600, the large symbol group 501 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in the stopped state (the symbol is stopped). On the display screen 600, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 502 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the stopped state.

The special figure 1 hold number display 503 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 600, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is “3”.
The special figure 2 hold number display 504 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. On the display screen 600, the special figure 2 hold number display 504 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game is “0”. The hold display 505 performs a hold display corresponding to the number of hold storages of the special figure 1 game or the number of hold storages of the special figure 2 game according to the game state. On the display screen 600, the hold display 505 is the special figure 1.
Three hold icons 507 are displayed according to the number of hold memories of the game.

The hold digestion display 506 can indicate whether or not the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result depending on the display mode. On the display screen 600, the hold digestion display 506 sets a blank in the frame to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in the stopped state. After that, the game machine 10 starts the variation display corresponding to, for example, the variation display command A, the variation display command B, and the variation display command C.

The display screen 602 shown in FIG. 54 (2) is a display screen after the variation display is started, and is a display screen corresponding to the first half variation common to the variation display commands A, B, and C. The display screen 602 is
It is a screen after the display screen 600, and shows a screen during variable display (during three symbols changing). On the display screen 602, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group 501 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, on the display screen 602, the small symbol group 502
The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the variation display.

On the display screen 602, in the special figure 1 hold number display 503, the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is "2".
The special figure 2 hold number display 504 indicates that the hold memory number of the special figure 2 game is "0", and the hold display 505 indicates that the hold memory number of the special figure 1 game is "2". Indicates that. Further, on the display screen 602, the hold digestion display 506 displays the hold digestion icon 508 (hold memory display during digestion), indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the variation display.

The display screen 604 shown in FIG. 54 (3) is a display screen corresponding to the latter half fluctuation, and is a display screen (No. 1) corresponding to the advance notice effect among the latter half fluctuations common to the fluctuation display commands A, B, and C. ..

The display screen 604 includes the advance suggestion effect display 520 as the display content. The display screen 604 is a display screen in which a prior suggestion effect is performed when the left symbol of the large symbol group 501 is temporarily stopped. The advance suggestion effect display 520 starts the operation effect of the push button by displaying an image imitating the push button (effect button 25) and the characters "Ready?" (The push button can be operated). Is suggested in advance (notice).

The display screen 606 shown in FIG. 55 (1) is a display screen (No. 2) corresponding to the advance notice effect following the display screen 604. The display screen 606 includes the suggestion effect reception display 523 in the display content.
The suggestion effect reception display 523 displays an image imitating a push button and the characters "press!" To inform that the push button operation can be received. In addition, the suggestion effect reception display 523 displays a gauge of the time when the push button operation can be received.

The display screen 608 shown in FIG. 55 (2), the display screen 610 shown in FIG. 55 (3), and FIG.
The display screen 612 shown in 6 (1) is displayed when a push button operation is accepted.
Variable display This is a display screen that announces the result of the game. The game machine 10 may not give notice of the result of the variable display game when the push button operation is not accepted within the push button operation acceptable time, or the push button operation acceptable time is increased. You may wait for the result of the variable display game to be announced. When the game machine 10 waits for the time-up of the available time for accepting the push button operation to announce the result of the variable display game, the game machine 10 receives the push button operation and announces the result of the variable display game, as compared with the case where the result of the variable display game is announced. The appearance rate of high-expected notices may be reduced.

The display screen 608 is a display screen (No. 3) corresponding to the advance notice effect following the display screen 606. The display screen 608 includes a notice notification display 609 in the display content. The notice notification display 609 is
The cut-in display that overlaps the large symbol group 501 includes a tiger-like character and the dialogue "Chance!". The notice notification display 609 is a notice effect display that suggests that there is a possibility of a hit even though the expectation is low as a result of the variable display game, and is a form of a non-confirmed notice effect that does not notify the confirmation of the hit. Among them, it is a form of low reliability notice production.

The display screen 610 is a display screen (No. 4) corresponding to the advance notice effect following the display screen 606. The display screen 610 includes the notice notification display 611 in the display content. The notice notification display 611 is
The cut-in display that overlaps the large pattern group 501 includes a tiger-like character wearing sunglasses and the line "Hot!". The notice notification display 611 is a notice effect display that suggests that the expectation of a hit is high as a result of the variable display game, and is a form of a non-confirmed notice effect that does not notify the confirmation of the hit. It is a form of. The cut-in display of the notice notification display 611 is displayed larger than the cut-in display of the notice notification display 609, which suggests high reliability.

The display screen 612 is a display screen (No. 5) corresponding to the advance notice effect following the display screen 606. The display screen 612 includes the notice notification display 613 in the display content. The notice notification display 613
The cut-in display that overlaps the large symbol group 501 includes a pig-like character and a message tape "Congratulations!". The notice notification display 613 is a notice effect display that suggests that the hit has been confirmed as a result of the variable display game, and is a form of the confirmation notice effect that notifies the confirmation of the hit. The cut-in display of the notice notification display 613 is the notice notification display 60.
It is displayed larger than the cut-in display of 9,611, suggesting higher reliability.

The display screen 614 shown in FIG. 56 (2) is a display screen after the advance notice effect, and is a display screen corresponding to the reach effect common to the variable display commands A, B, and C. The display screen 614 shows a screen during variable display (during three symbols changing). The display screen 614 indicates that the left symbol and the right symbol of the large symbol group 501 display the symbol "3" and temporarily stop, and the middle symbol is in a reach state in which it fluctuates.
The display screen 614 produces a so-called normal reach. In the normal reach, although the hit is rarely derived as a result of the variable display game, the loss is derived in many cases, and when the result is not derived, the development reach is connected. The reach corresponding to the variation display command A, the variation display command B, and the variation display command C is a connection effect of the development reach.

The display screen 616 shown in FIG. 56 (3) is a display screen after the reach effect, and is a display screen of the short SP reach effect developed from the reach effect. The short SP reach production is positioned as a so-called low-reliability development reach, and produces a low-reliability development reach in a relatively short production time. For example, the short SP reach effect produces a higher expectation than the normal reach by varying the middle symbol in a manner different from the normal reach. In the reach effect (normal reach, short SP reach, long SP reach, etc.) or other effects, the game machine 10 has the first embodiment or the second embodiment for the symbol being displayed in a variable manner.
It is also possible to perform an effect of changing the thickness of the contour as described in the third embodiment, or an effect of removing a part of the pattern.

The display screen 618 shown in FIG. 57 (1) is a display screen after the reach effect, and is a display screen of the long SP reach effect developed from the reach effect. The long SP reach production is positioned as a so-called highly reliable development reach, and produces a highly reliable development reach in a relatively long production time. For example, the long SP reach effect is a normal reach or short SP by suggesting the success or failure of the game result by hiding the large symbol group 501 and performing the battle effect.
Produce a feeling of expectation higher than reach.

In addition, although the game machine 10 is said to produce short SP reach and long SP reach via normal reach, it also produces a two-stage development reach that develops into long SP reach via short SP reach via normal reach and short SP reach. it can.

The display screen 620 shown in FIG. 57 (2) is a short S corresponding to the variable display commands B and C.
It is a display screen of the correct effect during the fluctuation after the P reach effect. The display screen 620 is a large symbol group 501.
Temporarily stop and display the three sets of symbols "3" that are the hit modes. In addition, three sets of symbols "3"
Is an example of a hit mode. In addition, the display screen 620 includes the correct effect display 621 as the display content. The correct effect display 621 displays an effect image including the character "celebration!" And the message "big hit !!" in the fireworks suggesting the correctness at the substantially center of the display screen 620. The display screen 620 moves and displays the large symbol group 501 to the corners, and secures the display area of the correct effect display 621. Further, the display screen 620 reduces and displays the large symbol group 501 to secure the display area of the correct effect display 621. In addition, the display screen 620 hides the large symbol group 501, and the correct effect display 6
The display area of 21 may be secured.

The display screen 624 shown in FIG. 58 (1) is a display screen that displays a symbol combination as a variation result corresponding to any of the variation display commands A, B, and C. The display screen 624 is a display screen after the short SP reach effect in the case of the variable display effect corresponding to the variable display command A, and the long SP reach effect or the variable in the case of the variable display effect corresponding to the variable display command B. It is a display screen after the middle-time accuracy effect, and in the case of the variation display effect corresponding to the variation display command C, it is a display screen after the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach or the change-time accuracy effect.

The display screen 624 stops and displays three sets of symbols "3", which are hit modes for each of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502. On the display screen 624, the hold digestion display 506 sets a blank in the frame to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in the stopped state.

The display screen 626 shown in FIG. 58 (2) is a fanfare display screen. Display screen 62
Reference numeral 6 includes a fanfare effect display 627 similar to the accuracy effect display 621 of the variable effect effect in the display content. The fanfare effect display 627 displays an effect image including the character "celebration!" And the message "big hit !!" in the fireworks that guide the hit at the substantially center of the display screen 626. The display screen 626 hides the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502. In addition, the display screen 626 hides the hold display 505 and the hold digestion display 506. After displaying the fanfare display screen, the game machine 10 displays a winning round display or an interval display.

Next, a notice effect pattern selection table common to the variable display commands A, B, and C will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the advance notice effect pattern selection table and the advance notice effect pattern reliability of the fourth embodiment.

The notice effect pattern selection table (hit) shown in FIG. 59 (1) is referred to when the effect control device 300 selects the advance notice effect as the display effect corresponding to the variable display commands A, B, and C. The fluctuation display commands A, B, and C are all fluctuation display commands selected when deriving a hit.

When the effect control device 300 receives the variable display commands A, B, and C and determines the advance notice effect, the effect control device 300 selects the advance notice effect pattern YP1 corresponding to the final advance notice effect with the selection probability YR01, and corresponds to the high reliability advance notice effect. The advance notice effect pattern YP2 to be used is selected with the selection probability YR02, and the advance notice effect pattern YP3 corresponding to the low reliability advance notice effect is selected with the selection probability YR03. For example
The selection probability YR01 is a 10% probability by defining the finalized advance notice effect as an effect with a low appearance frequency. The selection probability YR02 has a probability of 70%, and the selection probability YR03 has a probability of 20%. By setting the appearance rate of the advance notice effect pattern YP2 at the time of hitting higher than that of the advance notice effect pattern YP3, the advance notice effect pattern YP2 is high. Produce reliability.

The notice effect pattern selection table (off) shown in FIG. 59 (2) is the effect control device 300.
When selecting a preview effect as a display effect corresponding to a variable display command (for example, variable display commands D, E, F) that derives "off" while being assigned the same effect as the variable display commands A, B, and C. Referenced.

When the effect control device 300 receives the variable display commands D, E, and F and determines the advance notice effect, the effect control device 300 selects the advance notice effect pattern YP1 corresponding to the final advance notice effect with the selection probability YR11, and corresponds to the high reliability advance notice effect. The advance notice effect pattern YP2 to be used is selected with the selection probability YR12, and the advance notice effect pattern YP3 corresponding to the low reliability advance notice effect is selected with the selection probability YR13. For example
The selection probability YR11 is a probability of 0% in order to produce a finalized notice effect. Selection probability YR12
Is a 10% probability, the selection probability YR13 is a 90% probability, and the advance notice effect pattern YP.
By setting the appearance rate of the notice effect pattern YP3 at the time of disconnection higher than that of 2, the low reliability of the notice effect pattern YP3 is produced.

The reliability of the notice effect pattern shown in FIG. 59 (3) includes the hit probability and the variable display commands A, B, C, D, in addition to the notice effect pattern selection table (hits) and the notice effect pattern selection table (missing). It is determined by the distribution rate of E and F. According to the advance notice effect pattern selection table (hit), the advance notice effect pattern selection table (missing), and other conditions, the advance notice effect pattern reliability is such that the advance notice effect pattern YP1 corresponding to the final advance notice effect has a reliability YE1. The notice effect pattern YP2 corresponding to the high reliability advance notice effect is the reliability YE2, and the advance notice effect pattern YP3 corresponding to the low reliability advance notice effect is the reliability YE3. For example, the reliability YE1 is 100% reliability for producing a definite notice, the reliability YE2 is 50% reliability for producing a high reliability notice, and the reliability YE3 is a reliability for producing a low reliability notice. The degree is 5%.

In addition, the advance notice effect pattern selection table (hit) and the advance notice effect pattern selection table (
(Out) is common to the variable display commands A, B, and C, but it may be provided for each. Further, when the game machine 10 has a plurality of game modes and game states, the notice effect pattern selection table (hit) and the notice effect pattern selection table (miss) may be common to all the game modes and game states. It may be different. In addition to the notice effect pattern selection table (hits) and the notice effect pattern selection table (missing), the notice effect pattern reliability includes the hit probability and the fluctuation of the fluctuation display commands A, B, C, D, E, and F. Although it is determined by the fraction, the advance notice effect pattern reliability may be set in advance in the advance notice effect pattern, and what is the advance notice effect pattern selection table (hit) and the advance notice effect pattern selection table (missing)? , The selection probability corresponding to the reliability of the advance notice effect pattern is set.

Next, the selection probability of the specific effect pattern executed when the variable display commands A, B, and C are received will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of the specific effect pattern selection probability of the fourth embodiment.

The specific effect pattern refers to a combination pattern of effects after the reach effect in the latter half variation. The specific effect pattern related to the variable display commands A, B, and C is the specific effect pattern TP1.
, TP2, TP3 are included. The specific effect pattern TP1 is a specific effect pattern in which a short SP reach effect is executed after the reach effect to derive a hit. The specific effect pattern TP2 is a specific effect pattern in which a long SP reach effect is executed after the reach effect to derive a hit. The specific effect pattern TP3 is a short SP after the reach effect and a long SP via reach.
It is a specific effect pattern that executes reach effect and derives a hit.

In the variable display commands A, B, and C, the specific effect pattern TP1 is selected by the selection probability TR1, the specific effect pattern TP2 is selected by the selection probability TR2, and the specific effect pattern TP3.
Is selected with a selection probability TR3. Then, also in the variable display commands D, E, and F, the specific effect patterns TP1, TP2, and TP3 are selected with a required probability, respectively.

As a result, the game machine 10 sets the reliability TE1 in the specific effect pattern TP1, sets the reliability TE2 in the specific effect pattern TP2, and sets the reliability TE3 in the specific effect pattern TP3. For example, reliability TE1 is 5%, reliability TE2 is 10%, and reliability T.
E3 is 20%. As a result, the game machine 10 has a short SP reach effect and a long SP.
It can be set so that the reliability increases in the order of reach production and long SP reach production via short SP reach. The gaming machine 10 may be set so that the reliability increases in the order of short SP reach effect, long SP reach effect via short SP reach, and long SP reach effect.

In addition to the selection probabilities of the variable display commands A, B, and C, the reliability TE1, TE2, and TE3 include the selection probabilities of the variable display commands D, E, and F, and the variable display commands A,
It may vary depending on other parameters such as the distribution rate of B, C, D, E, and F.

The selection of such a specific effect pattern is classified in more detail according to the mode of the advance notice effect. For example, the selection probability of the specific effect pattern can be classified into cases depending on which of the final announcement, the low reliability announcement, and the high reliability announcement is executed in the advance announcement effect. It should be noted that the combination of the advance notice effect pattern and the specific effect pattern set in advance is not limited to the two-stage lottery in which the advance notice effect pattern is drawn in the advance notice effect and then the specific effect pattern is drawn according to the lottery result of the advance notice effect pattern. It may be a lottery.

Here, the hit time, that is, the specific pattern selection ratio for each notice effect in the variable display commands A, B, and C will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of a specific pattern selection ratio (hit) for each notice effect of the fourth embodiment.

In the variable display effect based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the effect control device 300 executes the short SP reach effect at a rate of 70% when the final notice is executed in the advance notice effect.
The long SP reach effect is executed at a rate of 10%, and the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach is executed at a rate of 20%. Further, the effect control device 300 uses the variable display command A,
In the variable display effect based on B and C, when the low reliability advance notice is executed in the advance notice effect, the short SP reach effect is executed at a rate of 20%, the long SP reach effect is executed at a rate of 60%, and the short SP reach effect is executed. Perform long SP reach production via 20%. Further, the effect control device 300 executes the short SP reach effect at a rate of 10% when the high reliability advance notice is executed in the advance notice effect in the variable display effect based on the variable display commands A, B, and C.
The long SP reach effect is executed at a rate of 30%, and the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach is executed at a rate of 60%.

In the variable display effect based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the effect control device 300 performs a short SP reach effect (20 ×) when the non-confirmed notice is executed in the advance notice effect or when the finalized notice is not executed. Execute at a rate of a + 10 × b)%, execute a long SP reach effect at a rate of (60 × a + 30 × b)%, and execute a long SP reach effect via short SP reach at a rate of (20 × a + 60 × b)%. Execute. At this time, a is the selection probability of the low reliability notice in the non-confirmed notice, and b is the selection probability of the high reliability notice in the non-confirmed notice. However, a and b <1 and a + b = 1.

As described above, in the game machine 10, when the final notice effect is executed, the short SP reach effect is more likely to be executed than the long SP reach effect or the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach. As a result, when the final notice effect is executed, the game machine 10 prevents the game effect after the advance notice from becoming redundant and makes it possible to reduce the decline in interest. Also,
The game machine 10 suppresses the game effect after the advance notice from becoming redundant by performing the correct effect during the change in the surplus time in the latter half of the variation display effect based on the variation display commands B and C, and the interest is reduced. Can be reduced.

Specifically, when the final notice effect is executed, the shortstop 10 reduces the chances of the long SP reach effect and the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach appearing, so that the game effect after the advance notice is redundant. Suppress becoming a thing.

Further, the game machine 10 selects the probability that the short SP reach effect is selected when the low reliability notice is executed in the notice effect, and the short SP reach effect is selected when the high reliability notice is executed in the notice effect. It is larger than the probability.

As a result, the player who lost the sense of expectation due to the low reliability notice of the game machine 10 has a long S.
Suppress the chance of feeling redundant by P reach production and long SP reach production via short SP reach. In addition, the game machine 10 prevents a player who has lost a sense of expectation due to a low reliability notice from losing a sense of expectation due to a short SP reach effect, and has a low reliability notice and a short SP reach effect with a poor sense of expectation. Despite the overlap with, it is possible to produce a surprising feeling of deriving a hit and improve the interest. On the other hand, the shortstop 10 can expand the chances that a player who has a sense of expectation due to the high reliability notice can feel the interest by the long SP reach production and the long SP reach production via the short SP reach.

The specific pattern selection ratio for each notice effect in the variable display commands A, B, and C may be changed according to the game mode and the game state. A modified example of changing the specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a specific pattern selection ratio (hit) for each notice effect of the modified example of the fourth embodiment (No. 1).
). FIG. 63 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a specific pattern selection ratio (hit) for each notice effect of the modified example of the fourth embodiment.

The game machine 10 has, for example, modes A, B, and C as a plurality of effect modes, and the mode transitions with a predetermined event trigger (may be a timer trigger). The game machine 10 produces game playability for each mode by properly using a specific pattern selection ratio for each mode.

FIG. 62 (1) shows a specific pattern selection ratio (mode A) for each notice effect. The specific pattern selection ratio (mode A) for each advance notice effect is the same as the specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice effect described with reference to FIG. 61. In the mode A, the shortstop 10 suppresses an opportunity for a player who has lost a sense of expectation due to a low reliability notice to feel redundant by a long SP reach effect or a long SP reach effect via a short SP reach. Further, in the game machine 10, in mode A, the player who has lost the sense of expectation due to the low reliability notice is prevented from further losing the sense of expectation due to the short SP reach effect, and the low reliability notice with poor sense of expectation. Even though it overlaps with the short SP reach production, it is possible to produce an unexpected feeling of deriving a hit and improve the interest. On the other hand, in the mode A, the shortstop 10 can expand the chances that the player who has a sense of expectation due to the high reliability notice can feel the interest by the long SP reach production and the long SP reach production via the short SP reach.

FIG. 62 (2) shows a specific pattern selection ratio (mode B) for each notice effect. In the variable display effect based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the effect control device 300 executes the short SP reach effect at a rate of 100% when the final notice is executed in the advance notice effect, and the long SP reach effect is 0%. The long SP reach effect via the short SP reach is executed at the ratio of 0%. Further, the effect control device 300 executes the short SP reach effect at a rate of 0% when the low reliability advance notice is executed in the advance notice effect in the variable display effect based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, and the long SP reach. The effect is executed at a rate of 70%, and the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach is executed at a rate of 30%. Further, in the variable display effect based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the effect control device 300 executes the short SP reach effect at a rate of 0% when the high reliability advance notice is executed in the advance notice effect, and the long SP reach. The effect is executed at a rate of 30%, and the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach is executed at a rate of 70%.

As described above, when the final notice effect is executed, the shortstop 10 does not execute the long SP reach effect or the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach, but executes the short SP reach effect. As a result, when the final notice effect is executed, the game machine 10 prevents the game effect after the advance notice from becoming redundant and makes it possible to reduce the decline in interest. In addition, game machine 1
0 indicates that in the variable display effect based on the variable display commands B and C, the game effect after the advance notice is not made redundant even if the correct effect is performed during the surplus time in the latter half of the variation, and the deterioration of the interest is reduced. It is possible.

Specifically, when the final notice effect is executed, the shortstop 10 eliminates the opportunity for the long SP reach effect and the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach to appear, so that the game effect after the advance notice is redundant. Suppress becoming a thing.

In addition, the game machine 10 prevents the short SP reach effect from being selected when the low reliability notice or the high reliability notice is executed in the notice effect, so that the player who has a sense of expectation from the notice effect can perform the long SP reach effect. And long SP reach production via short SP reach can expand the opportunity to feel the interest.

Further, in the game machine 10, a player who has a higher expectation from the notice production when the high reliability notice is executed than when the low reliability notice is executed in the notice effect can reach the long SP via the short SP reach. You can expand the opportunity to feel the interest by directing.

FIG. 62 (3) shows a specific pattern selection ratio (mode C) for each notice effect. In the variable display effect based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the effect control device 300 executes the short SP reach effect at a rate of 70% and the long SP reach effect of 10% when the final notice is executed in the advance notice effect. 20% of long SP reach production via short SP reach
Execute at the rate of. Further, in the variable display effect based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the effect control device 300 executes the short SP reach effect at a rate of 10% when the low reliability advance notice is executed in the advance notice effect, and the long SP reach. Perform the production at a rate of 30%, short S
Perform long SP reach production via P reach at a rate of 60%. In addition, the effect control device 30
0 indicates that in the variable display effect based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, when the high reliability advance notice is executed in the advance notice effect, the short SP reach effect is executed at a rate of 20%, and the long SP reach effect is 60%. Execute at a rate and produce 20% of long SP reach via short SP reach
Execute at the rate of.

The game machine 10 determines the probability that the short SP reach effect is selected when the low-reliability notice is executed in the notice effect, and the probability that the short SP reach effect is selected when the high-reliability notice is executed in the notice effect. Is also made smaller.

As a result, the player who lost the sense of expectation due to the low reliability notice of the game machine 10 has a long S.
Increase the chances of feeling redundant by P reach production and long SP reach production via short SP reach. In addition, the game machine 10 increases that a player who has lost a sense of expectation due to a low reliability notice further loses a sense of expectation due to a short SP reach effect.

Such a game machine 10 is suitable for a production mode in which a vague game production feels interesting. Further, such a game machine 10 has an effect of highlighting the characteristics of each mode in comparison with each mode.

The game machine 10 has a plurality of game states, for example, a normal game state and a specific game state A.
, B, and transitions the game state with a predetermined event trigger. The game machine 10 produces the game performance for each game state by properly using the specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice effect for each game state.

It should be noted that the normal game state and the specific game states A and B may be distinguished as different game states. For example, the normal game state has a low probability, mainly the special figure 1 game game progress, and no general electric support. The specific game state A has a high probability, mainly the special figure 2 game game progress, and the normal electric support is provided, and the specific game state B has a low probability, mainly the special figure 2 game game progress, and the general electric support is not provided. In addition, the specific game state B may have other game characteristics such as high probability, mainly special figure 1 game game progress, and no general electric support.

FIG. 63 (1) shows a specific pattern selection ratio (normal game state) for each notice effect. The specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice effect (normal game state) is the same as the specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice effect described with reference to FIG. 61. The game machine 10 suppresses an opportunity for a player who has lost a sense of expectation due to a low reliability notice in a normal game state to feel redundant by a long SP reach effect or a long SP reach effect via a short SP reach. In addition, the game machine 10 prevents a player who has lost a sense of expectation due to a low reliability notice in a normal gaming state from further losing a sense of expectation due to a short SP reach effect, and the low reliability notice with a poor sense of expectation. Despite the overlap between the short SP reach production and the short SP reach production, it is possible to produce an unexpected feeling of deriving a hit and improve the interest. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, the shortstop 10 can expand the chances that the player who has a sense of expectation due to the high reliability notice can feel the interest by the long SP reach production and the long SP reach production via the short SP reach.

FIG. 63 (2) shows a specific pattern selection ratio (specific game state A) for each notice effect. The specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice effect (specific game state A) is the same as the specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice effect described with reference to FIG. 62 (2).

As described above, when the final notice effect is executed, the shortstop 10 does not execute the long SP reach effect or the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach, but executes the short SP reach effect. As a result, when the final notice effect is executed, the game machine 10 prevents the game effect after the advance notice from becoming redundant and makes it possible to reduce the decline in interest. In addition, game machine 1
0 indicates that in the variable display effect based on the variable display commands B and C, the game effect after the advance notice is not made redundant even if the correct effect is performed during the surplus time in the latter half of the variation, and the deterioration of the interest is reduced. It is possible.

Specifically, when the final notice effect is executed, the shortstop 10 eliminates the opportunity for the long SP reach effect and the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach to appear, so that the game effect after the advance notice is redundant. Suppress becoming a thing.

In addition, the game machine 10 prevents the short SP reach effect from being selected when the low reliability notice or the high reliability notice is executed in the notice effect, so that the player who has a sense of expectation from the notice effect can perform the long SP reach effect. And long SP reach production via short SP reach can expand the opportunity to feel the interest.

Further, in the game machine 10, a player who has a higher expectation from the notice production when the high reliability notice is executed than when the low reliability notice is executed in the notice effect can reach the long SP via the short SP reach. You can expand the opportunity to feel the interest by directing.

FIG. 63 (3) shows a specific pattern selection ratio (specific game state B) for each notice effect. The specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice effect (specific game state B) is the same as the specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice effect described with reference to FIG. 62 (3).

The game machine 10 determines the probability that the short SP reach effect is selected when the low-reliability notice is executed in the notice effect, and the probability that the short SP reach effect is selected when the high-reliability notice is executed in the notice effect. Is also made smaller.

As a result, the player who lost the sense of expectation due to the low reliability notice of the game machine 10 has a long S.
Increase the chances of feeling redundant by P reach production and long SP reach production via short SP reach. In addition, the game machine 10 increases that a player who has lost a sense of expectation due to a low reliability notice further loses a sense of expectation due to a short SP reach effect.

Such a game machine 10 is suitable for a game state in which a player feels a sense of interest in a vague game production. Further, such a gaming machine 10 has an effect of highlighting the characteristics of each gaming state in comparison for each gaming state. Further, such a game machine 10 assists the player in estimating the game state when the game state is clarified to the player.

The specific pattern selection ratio for each notice effect for each effect mode described with reference to FIG. 62 and the specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice effect for each game state described with reference to FIG. 63 are examples. It may be the selection ratio of. Further, the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 62 is set to modes A, B, and C, but the division of the effect mode is not limited to three, and may be two, or four or more. There may be. Further, the gaming states described with reference to FIG. 63 are the normal gaming state and the specific gaming states A and B, but the classification of the gaming states is not limited to three.
It may be two or four or more.

Further, the classification of the gaming state may be one in which the gaming state, which is normally treated as one, is classified into two or more according to a predetermined condition. For example, even in the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state A may be classified from the end of the normal electric support to the fluctuation display number of 20 times, and the other normal gaming states may be classified as the normal gaming state B. In addition, even in the normal power support game state, the first half of up to 50 times out of 100 normal power support fluctuation display times is the normal power support game state A.
, 51 times or later may be classified as in the normal electric support game state B. Further, even in the probability fluctuation (high accuracy) gaming state, the probability fluctuation game state A may be classified up to the detection of the predetermined trigger after the probability fluctuation, and the probability fluctuation game state B may be classified after the predetermined trigger. ..

Further, the transition of the divided game states may be one-way from the specific game state A to the specific game state B, from the specific game state A to the specific game state B, and from the specific game state B to the specific game state. It may be bidirectional as in A.

Next, a modified example of the variation display mode corresponding to the variation display command B will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B1 of the modified example of the fourth embodiment.

The variation display command B1 is one of the variation display commands transmitted by the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. The variation display command B1 is a command corresponding to the variation display effect of the variation time T1 (> T0).

The effect control device 300 receives the variation display command B1 to generate the variation display effect of the variation time T1, and executes the variation display effect in the required effect device. The variable display command B1 is
Since the variation time is longer than that of the variation display command A, it has an aspect that various effects can be performed as compared with the variation display command A, but it also has an aspect that the time for deriving the result is slower than that of the variation display command A.

The effect control device 300 executes the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation within the fluctuation time T1. The variation display command B1 allocates the time T11 (= T01) of the variation time T1 to the first half variation and the time T12 (> T02) to the second half variation. The time T11 is the time T12.
Shorter than.

The latter half variation of the variation display command B1 includes the advance notice effect of the time T121, the reach effect of the time T122, and the long SP reach effect of the time T123 (effect pattern B01), the advance notice effect of the time T121, and the time T122. There is a case (effect pattern B03) including the reach effect of the above, the correct effect during the fluctuation of the time T125, and the short SP reach effect of the time T124 (= T023).

As described above, the game machine 10 may perform the correct effect during the fluctuation prior to the short SP reach effect. Further, the game machine 10 may sandwich the short SP reach effect between the variable and accurate effects divided into two. In addition, the game machine 10 may perform a correct effect during fluctuations prior to the reach effect. In addition, the game machine 10 may perform a correct effect during fluctuations prior to the advance notice effect. However,
When performing the variable predictive effect prior to the advance notice effect, the gaming machine 10 may replace the variable predictive effect with a freeze effect or the like that does not guide the correctness. Further, the game machine 10 may insert a subdivided change during the change, such as before and after the reach effect, at various places in the latter half of the change.

The effect control device 300 can selectively execute the effect pattern B01 and the effect pattern B03 when the variable display command B1 is received, and when the correct effect is executed in the advance notice effect, the effect pattern B03 is more than the effect pattern B01. Makes it easier to select.

Since the game machine 10 does not contribute to the improvement of the interest even if the expectation is raised in the production after the execution of the final notice production, it is easy to select the production pattern B03 that can notify the result before the production pattern B01. .. As a result, the game machine 10 suppresses that the game production after the advance notice is redundant and causes a decrease in the interest, and enables the game production after the result is confirmed even during the variable display to improve the interest. ..

As described above, the game machine 10 can make the game effect after the advance notice non-redundant by the amount that the short SP reach effect time T124 is shorter than the long SP reach effect time T123. Further, the game machine 10 can be allocated to the effect after the hit is confirmed only for the time T125 of the correct effect during the fluctuation.

Further, the game machine 10 has a variation display command B1 having a longer variation time than the variation display command A.
In the above, the game result is guided by the short SP reach effect similar to the variable display command A, and the non-redundant game progress can be realized by assigning the variable predictive effect to the surplus time.

The variable display command B1 derives a hit as a result of the short SP reach effect or as a result of the long SP reach effect, and the game machine 10 uses the variable display command B1 as a command for deriving the loss as a result. Prepare separately.

Next, another example of a modified example of the variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B, FIG. 65.
Will be described with reference to. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B2 of the modified example of the fourth embodiment.

The variation display command B2 is one of the variation display commands transmitted by the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. The variation display command B2 is a command corresponding to the variation display effect of the variation time T1 (> T0).

The effect control device 300 receives the variation display command B2, generates the variation display effect of the variation time T1, and executes the variation display effect in the required effect device. The variable display command B2 is
Since the variation time is longer than that of the variation display command A, it has an aspect that various effects can be performed as compared with the variation display command A, but it also has an aspect that the time for deriving the result is slower than that of the variation display command A.

The effect control device 300 executes the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation within the fluctuation time T1. The variation display command B2 allocates the time T11 (= T01) of the variation time T1 to the first half variation and the time T12 (> T02) to the second half variation. The time T11 is the time T12.
Shorter than.

The latter half variation of the variation display command B2 includes the advance notice effect of the time T121, the reach effect of the time T122, and the long SP reach effect of the time T123 (effect pattern B01), the advance notice effect of the time T121, and the time T122. When the reach effect of the time T123 and the correct effect during the fluctuation of the time T123 are included (effect pattern B04), the advance notice effect of the time T121 and the time T126
There is a case (effect pattern B05) including the correct effect during the fluctuation of (= T122 + T123).

As described above, the game machine 10 may perform the correct effect during fluctuation without performing the short SP reach effect. Further, the game machine 10 may perform not only the short SP reach effect but also the reach effect during the fluctuation without performing the reach effect.

The effect control device 300 can selectively execute the effect pattern B01, the effect pattern B04, and the effect pattern B05 when the variable display command B2 is received, and when the correct effect is executed in the advance notice effect, the effect pattern B01 Also makes it easier to select the production patterns B04 and B05.

Since the game machine 10 does not contribute to the improvement of the interest even if the expectation is raised in the production after the execution of the final notice production, the production patterns B04 and B05 that can notify the result before the production pattern B01 are selected. Make it easier. As a result, the game machine 10 suppresses that the game production after the advance notice is redundant and causes a decrease in the interest, and enables the game production after the result is confirmed even during the variable display to improve the interest. ..

In this way, the game machine 10 can make the game effect non-redundant by the time T123 of the long SP reach effect or after the advance notice is notified. Further, the game machine 10 can be allocated to the effect after the hit is confirmed by the amount obtained by adding the time T122 of the reach effect to the time T123 of the long SP reach effect.

Further, the game machine 10 has a variation display command B2 having a longer variation time than the variation display command A.
In, a non-redundant game progress can be realized by guiding the game result by a final notice effect. The variation display command B2 derives a hit as a result, and the game machine 10 prepares a command for deriving a loss as a result separately from the variation display command B2.

Next, a modified example of the appearance timing of the finalized notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 66. Figure 6
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the appearance timing of the finalized notice effect of the modified example of the fourth embodiment.
As a confirmation notice effect, when a confirmed character that announces the winning confirmation appears, the game machine 10
Confirmed character appearance patterns 1 to 5 can be set. In addition, the confirmed character may be one that guides the winning confirmation depending on the display mode such as guiding the winning as a message, or a display mode in which a normal player can naturally feel the winning confirmation by the rainbow display or the like. It may guide the winning confirmation by, or it may guide the winning confirmation by a display mode in which a player who has accumulated game experience can feel the winning confirmation by not sharing it with other effects. .. Further, the confirmed character does not necessarily have to be a character, and may be a cut-in, a message itself, or the like.

The confirmed character appearance pattern 1 is an effect mode in which the confirmed character appears only once during the effect period of the confirmed notice effect. At this time, the appearance period of the confirmed character can be arbitrarily set within the range of the confirmed advance notice production period.

The confirmed character appearance patterns 2 and 3 are production modes in which the confirmed character continues to appear beyond the effect period of the confirmed notice effect. The appearance period of the confirmed character in the confirmed character appearance pattern 2 can be arbitrarily set within the range of the reach effect period and the short SP reach effect period. The appearance period of the confirmed character in the confirmed character appearance pattern 3 can be arbitrarily set within the range of the variable display period including the correct effect period during the fluctuation beyond the short SP reach effect period. In addition, the confirmed character may change the display mode during its appearance, for example, the magnitude of the expected value that the player can obtain by changing from a hornworm to a butterfly (for example, probabilistic change or Fuden support). The presence / absence, the amount of game value that can be acquired, etc.) may be announced.

The confirmed character appearance pattern 4 is an effect mode in which a confirmed character appears twice or more during the effect period of the confirmed notice effect. At this time, the appearance period of the confirmed character can be arbitrarily set within the range of the variable display period starting from the confirmed notice effect period. In addition to the number of appearances and the timing of appearance, the confirmed character may change its display mode, and guides the magnitude of the expected value that the player can obtain from the number of appearances, the timing of appearance, and the display mode. You may do so.

The confirmed character appearance pattern 5 is an effect mode in which two or more confirmed characters appear during the effect period of the confirmed notice effect. For example, in the confirmed character appearance pattern 5, the confirmed character A appears from the confirmed notice effect period to the reach effect period, and the confirmed character B appears beyond the reach effect period from the reach effect period that overlaps with the appearance of the confirmed character A.

Note that the confirmed character A may appear beyond the reach effect period as in the confirmed character B, or may have the same appearance end timing. Further, when the confirmed character A is a character of the confirmed advance notice effect, and when the character appears in the reach effect, the short SP reach effect, or the long SP reach effect, the character may be changed to the correct mode. Although it is assumed that the confirmed character A and the confirmed character B are made to appear by providing the overlapping timing, it may be possible to make the confirmed character A and the confirmed character B appear by providing the overlapping timing.

It should be noted that the combination of two or more confirmed characters and the overlapping mode may be changed, and the magnitude of the expected value that the player can obtain from the combination of the confirmed characters and the overlapping mode may be guided.

Next, FIG. 6 shows a modified example of the display screen during the game corresponding to the variable display commands A, B, and C.
7 will be described. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game of a modified example of the fourth embodiment.

The display screen 628 shown in FIG. 67 (1) is a display screen during freeze effect, and is a display screen corresponding to the latter half fluctuation common to the fluctuation display commands A, B, and C. The freeze effect can be executed not only as a final notice effect but also as a correct effect during fluctuations. The display screen 628 has a large symbol group 501, a small symbol group 502, a special figure 1 hold number display 503, and a special figure 2 hold number display 504.
, Hold display 505, Hold digestion display 506, Hold icon 507, Hold digestion icon 508
Is included in the displayed contents.

The display screen 628 displays the freeze display 629 on the large symbol group 501. The freeze display 629 displays the message "freeze warning" and the message "WARNING" in the area partitioned by the yellow and black striped warning tape. Further, the display screen 628 displays the small symbol group 502 superimposed on the freeze display 629 in order to clearly indicate that the variable display is being performed instead of the large symbol group 501.

The display screen 630 shown in FIG. 67 (2) is a display screen following the display screen 628. On the display screen 630, the character 631 appearing from the left end side of the display area pushes the freeze display 629 to the right end side to release the freeze effect. Character 631 includes, for example, a pig-like character and the message tape "Congratulations!".

The display screen 632 shown in FIG. 67 (3) is a display screen following the display screen 630. On the display screen 632, the character 631 pushing the freeze display 629 to the right end side is sent off to the right end side while guiding the winning confirmation by the message tape "Congratulations!".
The display screen 632 has a large symbol group 501 in a display area in which the freeze display 629 is extruded to the right end side.
Is displayed with good visibility. Further, the symbol display mode of the large symbol group 501 can be changed before and after overlapping with the freeze display 629. The display screen 632 displays the large symbol group 501 in a symbol combination that is a hit mode.

In this way, the game machine 10 can perform a freeze effect. The game machine 10 can execute the freeze effect as a correct effect during fluctuation. In such a freeze effect, the large symbol group 501 is displayed with a symbol combination that becomes a hit mode as in the display screen 632 when the variable accuracy effect is executed after the short SP reach effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 64, the large symbol group 501 may be displayed in a symbol combination that becomes a reach mode when the variable accuracy effect is executed before the short SP reach effect.

Such a game machine 10 suppresses that the game production after the advance notice is redundant and causes a decrease in the interest, and enables the game production after the result is confirmed even during the variable display to improve the interest. ..

In addition, although it is said that the game machine 10 can give a notice that the result of the game is a hit,
Not limited to a hit, it may be a notice that the result of the game is a special result.
The special result includes, for example, a hit, a stop of a specific symbol, a stop of a special symbol (zone entry symbol, etc.), and the like. The stop of a specific symbol is a stop of a symbol that is not limited to a hit, and includes, for example, a stop of a predetermined chance symbol or the like. The chance symbol is a predetermined symbol combination, and for example, there is a permutation combination such as a left symbol "1", a middle symbol "2", and a right symbol "3". In addition, the stop of a special symbol includes the stop of a symbol with a special meaning. The special symbol may not be displayed in the normal state. For example, the special symbol is a symbol that guides the mode change, a symbol that guides the entry into a predetermined zone (game state, production state, etc.), the occurrence or development of reach, the advance notice or occurrence of a hit. It may be a guide pattern.

The gaming machine 10 (including a modified example) of the fourth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The game machine 10 executes a advance notice effect (for example, a fixed advance notice effect, a low reliability advance notice effect, a high reliability advance notice effect) for announcing the result of a game (for example, a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game). Possible notice effect means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, display device 4)
1) and specific effect means (for example, short SP reach effect, long SP reach effect) that can execute a specific effect (for example, short SP reach effect, long SP reach effect) that directs the process of deriving the result of the game after the advance notice effect is executed.
The game control device 100, the effect control device 300, and the display device 41) are included. The notice effect means includes a definite notice effect (for example, a definite notice effect, FIG. 56 (1)) for confirming that the result of the game is a hit, and a predetermined reliability for notifying that the result of the game is a hit. It is possible to selectively execute the non-deterministic advance notice effect (for example, low reliability advance notice effect, high reliability advance notice effect, FIGS. 55 (2), (3)). The specific production means performs the derivation process in the first time (for example, time T1).
A first specific effect (for example, a short SP reach effect) produced in 24) and a second specific effect (for example, time T123) in which the derivation process is produced in a second time longer than the first time (for example, time T123). , Long SP reach effect) can be selectively executed, and when the advance notice effect means executes the final advance notice effect, the ratio at which the second specific effect is selected (for example, 10%, FIG. 6).
The ratio at which the first specific effect is selected (for example, 70%, FIG. 61) is made larger than that of 1).

(2) When the advance notice effect means of (1) executes an undetermined advance notice effect (for example, low reliability advance notice effect, high reliability advance notice effect), the first reliability is that the result of the game is a hit. (For example, 5%, FIG. 59 (3)), the first unconfirmed notice effect (for example, low reliability advance notice effect) and the first reliability that the result of the game is a hit are higher than the first reliability. A second indeterminate notice effect (for example, high reliability notice effect) foretelling with a reliability of 2 (for example, 50%, FIG. 59 (3)) can be selectively executed, and the specific effect means is a game. When deriving a hit as a result of, the advance notice effect means is the first than the ratio of selecting the first specific effect (for example, 10%, FIG. 61) when the advance notice effect means executes the second indeterminate advance notice effect. When the unconfirmed notice effect of 1 is executed, the ratio of selecting the first specific effect (for example, 20%, FIG. 61) is increased.

(3) The game machine 10 executes a advance notice effect (for example, a fixed advance notice effect, a low reliability advance notice effect, a high reliability advance notice effect) for announcing the result of a game (for example, a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game). Possible notice effect means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, display device 4)
1) and specific effect means (for example, short SP reach effect, long SP reach effect) that can execute a specific effect (for example, short SP reach effect, long SP reach effect) that directs the process of deriving the result of the game after the advance notice effect is executed.
The game control device 100, the effect control device 300, and the display device 41) are included. The notice production means is a final notice effect (for example, a confirmation notice effect) that confirms that the result of the game is a special result (for example, a hit or a stop of a specific symbol (chance eye, etc.), a stop of a special symbol (zone entry symbol, etc.), etc.) ,
Confirmed notice effect, FIG. 56 (1)) and non-confirmed notice effect (for example, low reliability advance notice effect, high reliability advance notice effect, FIG. 55) that announces that the result of the game is a special result with a predetermined reliability. (2
) And (3)) can be selectively executed. The specific effect means has a first specific effect (for example, short SP reach effect) in which the derivation process is produced in the first period (for example, time T124) and a second period (for example) in which the derivation process is different from the first period. For example, it is possible to selectively execute the second specific effect (for example, the long SP reach effect) produced at the time T123), and when the advance notice effect means executes the final advance notice effect, the second specific effect is performed. The rate at which the first specific effect is selected (eg, 70%, FIG. 61) rather than the rate selected (eg, 10%, FIG. 61).
) Is increased.

(4) The first confidence that the result of the game is a special result when the advance notice effect means of (3) executes an undetermined advance notice effect (for example, low reliability advance notice effect, high reliability advance notice effect). Every time(
For example, 5%, the first indeterminate notice effect (for example, low reliability notice effect) foretold in FIG. 59 (3)) and the first reliability that the result of the game is a special result are different from the first reliability. A second indeterminate notice effect (for example, high reliability notice effect) foretelling with a reliability of 2 (for example, 50%, FIG. 59 (3)) can be selectively executed, and the specific effect means is a game. When deriving a special result as a result of, the advance notice effect means is more than the ratio of selecting the first specific effect (for example, 10%, FIG. 61) when the advance notice effect means executes the second indeterminate advance notice effect. When the first unconfirmed notice effect is executed, the ratio of selecting the first specific effect (for example, 20%, FIG. 61) is increased.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the description of the game machines of the first to fourth embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2).
Alternatively, the game machine provided with the game board 800 (see FIG. 28) has been described, but the game machine of the fifth embodiment can be applied to any of them. Regarding the same configurations as those of the first to fourth embodiments, the reference numerals may be the same and the description thereof may be omitted.

The game machine 10 of the fifth embodiment produces a feeling of expectation for further changes and maintains a feeling of further expectation for the result of the game even if there is a notice notification effect due to the display mode of the start memory having little expectation. First, the display screen of the game machine 10 during the game will be described with reference to FIG. 68.
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the game of the fifth embodiment.

The display screen 650 is a display screen after the start of the variable display. The display screen 650 is a large symbol group 5
The display contents include 01, a small symbol group 502, a special figure 1 hold number display 503, a special figure 2 hold number display 504, a hold display (hold wait display) 505, and a hold digestion display 506.

The hold display (hold / wait display) 505 displays a number of hold icons (hold / wait icons) 660 corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number display 503. The hold icon 660 is a display mode having a double structure in which a colored sphere is contained in a transparent sphere. The hold digestion display 506 displays the hold digestion icon 655. The hold digest icon 655 also, like the hold icon 660,
It is a display mode having a double structure in which a colored sphere is contained in a transparent sphere, but it is a display mode that can be distinguished from the hold icon 660 because it is larger than the hold icon 660.

Here, a display mode of the double structure of the hold icon 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 69.
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the double structure of the hold icon of the fifth embodiment.
The hold icon 660 includes an outer shell icon 661 and an inner core icon 662 as display elements, respectively. The hold icon 660 has a double-structured display mode in which the transparent and spherical outer shell icon 661 includes the colored and spherical inner core icon 662. The inner core icon 662 has a function (expectation degree notification function) of notifying the degree of expectation for the result of the variable display game depending on the display mode. The outer shell icon 661 has a function of suggesting the possibility that the expectation degree notified by the inner core icon 662 may change (expectation degree change suggestion function). Hold digestion icon 65
5 also has the same configuration as the hold icon 660.

Next, a display mode that clearly guides the degree of expectation of the inner core icon 662 will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display mode of the inner core icon of the fifth embodiment and the degree of expectation. The inner core icon 662 has inner core icon display modes pt01, pt02, pt03, pt04, pt05, and pt06 as display modes that clearly guide the degree of expectation.

The inner core icon display mode pt01 is a display mode in which the standard (default) display mode does not guide the degree of expectation. The inner core icon display mode pt01 is, for example, a white spherical shape. The inner core icon display mode pt02 is a display mode that guides a low expectation degree (for example, a low expectation degree of about 5%). The inner core icon display mode pt02 is, for example, a green spherical shape. The inner core icon display mode pt03 is a display mode that guides a medium expectation degree (for example, a medium expectation degree of about 20%). The inner core icon display mode pt03 is, for example, a blue spherical shape. The inner core icon display mode pt04 is a display mode that guides a high degree of expectation (for example, a high degree of expectation of about 30%). The inner core icon display mode pt04 is, for example, a yellow spherical shape. The inner core icon display mode pt05 is a display mode that guides an extremely high expectation (for example, an extremely high expectation of about 80%). The inner core icon display mode pt05 is
For example, it has a red spherical shape. The inner core icon display mode pt06 is a display mode for guiding the hit confirmation (for example, the hit confirmation). The inner core icon display mode pt06 is, for example,
It is a spherical shape with a rainbow color or the letters "this".

Next, a display mode for unclearly guiding the degree of expectation of the inner core icon 662 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode that unclearly guides the degree of expectation of the inner core icon of the fifth embodiment. The inner core icon 662 is a display mode that clearly guides the degree of expectation, and is a display mode of the inner core icon pt01, pt02, pt03, pt04, pt05, pt0.
It was explained earlier that it has 6. The inner core icon 662 is the inner core icon display mode pt01.
, Pt02, pt03, pt04, pt05, pt06 can be displayed at the same time to indicate that one of the expectations indicated by the two color elements is guided.

The inner core icon 662 shown in FIG. 71 (1) is an inner core icon display mode pt02, and is guided by a green sphere shape with a clear low expectation. Inner core icon 66 shown in FIG. 71 (2)
In 2a, the inner core icon display mode pt02 is 75%, and the inner core icon display mode pt03 is 25.
% Is included in the display mode. The inner core icon 662a has a sphere shape with a gradation of 75% green and 25% blue, which clearly guides whether the expectation is low or medium, rather than the low expectation. The inner core icon 662b shown in FIG. 71 (3) is the inner core icon display mode pt.
It is a display mode containing 50% of 02 and 50% of the inner core icon display mode pt03. The inner core icon 662b has a sphere shape with a gradation of 50% green and 50% blue, and guides unclearly whether it is low expectation or medium expectation to the same extent. The inner core icon 662c shown in FIG. 71 (4) has 25% of the inner core icon display mode pt02 and the inner core icon display mode pt.
It is a display mode containing 75% of 03. The inner core icon 662c has a sphere shape with a gradation of 25% green and 75% blue, which clearly guides whether the expectation is low or medium, rather than the medium expectation.

As described above, the inner core icon 662 has the inner core icon display modes pt01, pt02, pt.
Not only can the degree of expectation be clarified and guided by 03, pt04, pt05, and pt06, but it is also possible to unclearly guide the degree of expectation while showing the possibility.

The core icons 662a, 662b, and 662c show a mixture of two colors by gradation, but they may be shown by mixing two colors like a mosaic or a stripe, or the original color can be obtained by mixing the colors. It may be shown in an unclear manner, or it may be an animation showing a color that can be a change destination without uniquely showing which color it is. Further, although the inner core icons 662a, 662b, and 662c indicate a mixture of two colors, they may indicate a mixture of three or more colors.

By giving a hold notice using such an inner core icon 662, the game machine 10 can give an unclear expectation notice in addition to giving a clear expectation notice.
Further, the game machine 10 can guide a candidate of a display mode to be changed even when an unclear expectation degree notification is performed. In addition, the game machine 10 can suggest the possibility when guiding the candidate of the display mode to be changed.

Next, the display mode of the outer shell icon 661 will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display mode of the outer shell icon and the changeability of the fifth embodiment. The outer shell icon 661 does not have a display mode that directly guides the degree of expectation, but the inner core icon 66
It has a display mode that guides the possibility of change of 2. The outer shell icon 661 is the inner core icon 66.
2 is included to produce the appearance of the inner core icon 662, and the disappearance of the outer shell icon 661 triggers a change in the display mode of the inner core icon 662.

The outer shell icon 661 shown in FIG. 72 (1) is a standard mode, and is a display mode that facilitates observation of the inner core icon 662 (not shown) included in the transparent display. The outer shell icon 661a shown in FIG. 72 (2) is an outer shell change notice mode a. The outer shell icon 661a is a display mode showing a state in which the outer shell is slightly cracked. The outer shell icon 661a guides the possibility of the outer shell icon 661 disappearing from the appearance of the outer shell being cracked, that is, the possibility of changing the display mode of the inner core icon 662. It should be noted that the outer shell icon 661a also indicates that the display mode of the inner core icon 662 is not likely to change because there are few cracks in the outer shell.

The outer shell icon 661b shown in FIG. 72 (3) is an outer shell change notice mode b. The outer shell icon 661b is a display mode showing how many cracks are formed in the outer shell. Outer shell icon 66
Reference numeral 1b indicates the possibility of the outer shell icon 661 disappearing from the appearance of many cracks in the outer shell, that is, the possibility of changing the display mode of the inner core icon 662. The outer shell icon 661
b also indicates that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the inner core icon 662 may change because there are many cracks in the outer shell.

The outer shell icon 661c shown in FIG. 72 (4) is the outer shell change notice mode c. The outer shell icon 661c is a display mode showing how the outer shell collapses and disappears. Outer shell icon 661c
Is the disappearance of the outer shell icon 661, that is, the inner core icon 6 from the appearance of the outer shell collapsing and disappearing.
It guides the change of the display mode of 62. The hold icon 660 changes the display mode of the inner core icon 662 by triggering the disappearance of the outer shell icon 661.

The outer shell icons 661a, 661b, and 661c are cracked to form the outer shell icon 66.
Although the possibility of disappearance of 1 is shown, the possibility of disappearance of the outer shell icon 661, that is, the possibility of changing the display mode of the inner core icon 662 may be shown by other aspects.

The game machine 10 uses such an outer shell icon 661 to suggest the possibility of changing the inner core icon 662, so that the inner core icon 66 does not change in the display mode of the inner core icon 662.
It is possible to give a feeling of expectation to the change in the display mode of 2. The game machine 10 has an outer shell icon 6.
The number, size, shape, etc. of the 61 cracks may indicate the magnitude of the change in the display mode of the inner core icon 662. For example, the game machine 10 raises the display mode of the inner core icon 662 by one rank when the outer shell icon 661 disappears due to many cracks (for example,).
When the inner core icon display mode pt01 is changed to the inner core icon display mode pt02) and the outer shell icon 661 disappears with only a slight crack, the display mode of the inner core icon 662 is upgraded by two ranks (for example, the inner core icon display mode). From pt01, the inner core icon display mode p
It may be changed to t03).

Next, the change pattern of the hold icon 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74.
FIG. 73 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the change pattern of the hold icon according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern of the hold icon according to the fifth embodiment (No. 2).
Is.

The hold icon change pattern shown in FIG. 73 (1) shows how the inner core icon 662 changes the display mode and the display mode of the hold icon 660 changes while the outer shell icon 661 does not change the display mode. The inner core icon 662 is a standard display mode (an initial mode).
For example, from the inner core icon display mode pt01), through the inner core change notice modes a, b, and c, the standard display mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt02) has a higher expectation than the initial mode.
) (Successful production of pending change by the inner core icon 662). At this time, the inner core change notice modes a, b, and c are display modes in which the inner core icon display mode pt01 and the inner core icon display mode pt02 are mixed.

In the game machine 10, the inner core icon 662 changes the display mode even when the outer shell icon 661 does not change the display mode by such a hold icon change pattern, so that the hold display mode can be changed and the change destination. Can be produced.

The hold icon change pattern shown in FIG. 73 (2) shows how the outer shell icon 661 and the inner core icon 662 change the display mode, and the display mode of the hold icon 660 changes. The inner core icon 662 has a standard display mode (for example, an inner core icon display mode pt01) that is an initial mode, and a standard display mode (for example, an inner core) that has a higher expectation than the initial mode through the inner core change notice modes a, b, and c. The icon display mode changes to pt02). At this time, the inner core change notice modes a, b, and c are the inner core icon display mode pt01 and the inner core icon display mode p.
The display mode is a mixture of t02 and t02. Further, the outer shell icon 661 disappears from the standard mode which is the initial mode through the outer shell change warning modes a, b, and c. The game machine 10 has an inner core icon 66.
2 is a standard display mode in which the expectation is one step higher than the initial mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode p.
By eliminating the outer shell icon 661 at the timing of changing to t02), the possibility of changing the pending display mode and the change destination can be determined from both the inner core icon 662 and the display mode change and the display mode change of the outer shell icon 661. It can be produced (successful production of pending changes by the outer shell icon 661). Since such a hold icon change pattern is accompanied by the disappearance of the outer shell icon 661, the change destination of the inner core icon 662 can be set to a standard display mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt04) having a high degree of expectation of two or more steps. Good.

The hold icon change pattern shown in FIG. 73 (3) shows how the inner core icon 662 changes the display mode and the display mode of the hold icon 660 changes while the outer shell icon 661 does not change the display mode. The inner core icon 662 is a standard display mode (an initial mode).
For example, from the inner core icon display mode pt01), through the inner core change notice modes a, b, and c, the standard display mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt02) has a higher expectation than the initial mode.
), Which is the initial mode of the standard display mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt0).
Return to 1) (hold change failure production). The game machine 10 develops such expectations (for example,
By the hold icon change pattern without promotion from the inner core icon display mode pt01 to the inner core icon display mode pt02), it is possible to secure an execution opportunity of the hold effect frequently.

The hold icon change pattern shown in FIG. 73 (4) shows how the outer shell icon 661 and the inner core icon 662 change the display mode, and the display mode of the hold icon 660 changes. The inner core icon 662 has a standard display mode (for example, an inner core icon display mode pt01) that is an initial mode, and a standard display mode (for example, an inner core) that has a higher expectation than the initial mode through the inner core change notice modes a, b, and c. Although it does not change to the icon display mode pt02) and returns to the standard display mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt01) which is the initial mode, the outer shell icon 661 is changed from the standard mode which is the initial mode to the outer shell change notice mode a, By disappearing after passing through b and c, the display mode is changed to the display mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt02) by shifting the time (holding change relief effect). The game machine 10 fails to change the inner core icon 662 to the outer shell icon 6.
It can be relieved by changing 61. Similarly, the game machine 10 can relieve the failure of the change of the outer shell icon 661 by the change of the inner core icon 662. Such a game machine 10 can produce a high expectation due to the existence of the hold change relief effect even if the hold change effect fails.

In the hold icon change pattern shown in FIG. 74 (1), the outer shell icon 661 changes the display mode while the inner core icon 662 does not change the display mode, but the hold icon 6
It shows how the display mode of 60 does not change. The inner core icon 662 does not change in the standard display mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt01) which is the initial mode. Outer shell icon 6
61 changes from the standard mode, which is the initial mode, to the outer shell change warning modes a and b, but returns to the standard mode without disappearing. The game machine 10 secures a frequent execution opportunity of the hold effect by the hold icon change pattern without such development of expectation (for example, promotion from the inner core icon display mode pt01 to the inner core icon display mode pt02). be able to. Further, the game machine 10 can secure a frequent execution opportunity of the hold effect by the hold icon change pattern that does not accompany the change of the display mode of the inner core icon 662.

The hold icon change pattern shown in FIG. 74 (2) shows how the outer shell icon 661 changes the display mode while the inner core icon 662 does not change the display mode, and the display mode of the hold icon 660 changes. The outer shell icon 661 remains unchanged in the standard display mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt01) in which the inner core icon 662 is the initial mode.
Disappears from the standard mode, which is the initial mode, through the outer shell change warning modes a, b, and c. As a result, the inner core icon display mode pt01 changes to the standard display mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt02), which has a higher expectation level than the initial mode without going through the inner core change notice modes a, b, and c. Even if the inner core icon 662 does not change, the game machine 10 can perform an unexpected hold notice effect by changing the outer shell icon 661.

It should be noted that the intermediate display mode of the inner core icon 662 (for example, the inner core change notice modes a, b, c).
Or, the intermediate display mode of the outer shell icon 661 (for example, the outer shell change notice mode a, b, c) is
It can be initialized at any time. Further, the initialization of the inner core icon 662 for the intermediate display mode and the initialization of the outer shell icon 661 for the intermediate display mode may be performed at the same time or at different timings. For example, the intermediate display mode of the inner core icon 662 and the intermediate display mode of the outer shell icon 661 may be initialized for each variation display, or may be initialized for each variation display twice or more. It may be the one that holds the above and is initialized by a predetermined initialization trigger.

Although the hold icon change pattern has been described for the hold icon 660, the same can be applied to the hold icon 655. The intermediate display mode of the hold icon 660 may be initialized at the time of transition to the hold digest icon 655, or may be held.

Such a game machine 10 can produce a further sense of expectation for the result of the game even if there is a display mode of the hold display lacking a sense of expectation. In addition, the game machine 10 can secure an execution opportunity of the hold effect at various timings.

Here, a modified example of the display mode of the double structure of the hold icon 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the double structure of the hold icon of the modified example of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 75 (1) shows a modification 1 of the hold icon 660. Hold icon 66 of variant 1
4 has an outer shell icon 661 similar to the hold icon 660, but with the hold icon 660.
It differs in that it has an inner core icon 665 which is different in size as compared with the inner core icon 662 of. The hold icon 664 can have a different size of the inner core icon 665 in relation to the magnitude of the expectation of notification and the possibility of notification. As a result, the game machine 10 can perform various hold notice effects.

FIG. 75 (2) shows a modification 2 of the hold icon 660. Hold icon 66 of variant 2
6 has an outer shell icon 661 similar to the hold icon 660, but with the hold icon 660.
It differs in that it has an inner core icon 667, which has a different shape as compared with the inner core icon 662 of. The hold icon 666 can have a different shape of the inner core icon 667 in relation to the magnitude of the expectation of notification and the possibility of notification. As a result, the game machine 10 can perform various hold notice effects.

Although the size and shape change of the inner core icon 662 have been described as a modification of the hold icon 660, the size and shape of the outer shell icon 661 may be changed. Further, although the modification of the hold icon 660 has been described, the same can be applied to the hold digest icon 655.

Next, as a modification of the hold icon 660 whose initial state is the double structure, a hold icon whose initial state is not the double structure will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a hold standby display, a hold digestion display, and an inner core icon string of a modified example of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 76 (1) shows a hold display 505 and a hold digestion display 506. The hold display 505 displays a hold icon 669 corresponding to the number of holds. The hold digestion display 506 displays the hold digestion icon 668 during the variable display. The hold digest icon 668 and the hold icon 669 have only the outer shell icon and do not have the inner core icon as the initial state. The hold digestion icon 668 and the hold icon 669 have the same shape and the same size, but may have different display modes so as to be distinguishable from each other. Hold digest icon 668 and hold icon 66
9 are arranged in a row at equal intervals. The hold digest icon 668 and the hold icon 669 are distinguished by the hold digest icon 668 having a pedestal display (an elliptical display indicated by a broken line in the figure).

FIG. 76 (2) shows a row of inner core icons. The inner core icon string does not indicate the execution right of the start memory, and by overlapping with the hold display 505 or the hold digestion display 506, the hold display 50
It indicates the degree of expectation corresponding to 5 or the pending digestion indication 506. The inner core icon string consists of eight inner core icons 670a, 670b, 670c, 670d, 670e, in order from the left end.
670f, 670g, 670h are lined up. The number of inner core icons is not limited to eight, and may be five corresponding to the hold digest icon 668 and the hold icon 669, may be innumerably arranged, or may be one. Good. The inner core icon string is aligned according to the alignment interval between the hold icon 668 and the hold icon 669. The degree of expectation set for each inner core icon constituting the inner core icon string is determined for each pending production, and the number of inner core icon display modes pt01, pt02, pt03, pt04, pt05, pt06 is determined according to the feeling of expectation to be produced. And combinations are different. For example, the inner core icons 670a, 670c, 670d, 670e,
670f and 670h are the inner core icon display mode pt01, the inner core icon 670b is the inner core icon display mode pt02, and the inner core icon 670g is the inner core icon display mode pt03.

FIG. 76 (3) shows another example of the inner core icon string. For example, the inner core icon 670a is the inner core icon display mode pt01, the inner core icons 670b and 670f are the inner core icon display modes pt02, and the inner core icons 670c and 670g are the inner core icon display modes p.
It is t03, the inner core icons 670d and 670h are the inner core icon display mode pt04, and the inner core icon 670e is the inner core icon display mode pt05. As described above, the game machine 10 can produce various expectations by changing the display mode of the inner core icons constituting the inner core icon string.

Next, the hold change in the hold digest icon 668 and the hold icon 669 is shown in FIG. 77.
Will be described with reference to. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of a hold digestion icon and a hold change in the hold icon of the modified example of the fifth embodiment.

The hold digest icon 668 and the hold icon 669 are changed to hold by scrolling the inner core icon string on the back side of the hold digest icon 668 and the hold icon 669 and then stopping (hold icon roulette effect).

The hold icon roulette (hold icon roulette effect) shown in FIG. 77 (1) displays one hold digest icon 668 and four hold icons 669, and shows how the core icon string scrolls to the left behind the hold icon roulette. In FIG. 77 (1), the inner core icon 670b overlaps with the hold digestion icon 668, and it is guided that the display mode corresponds to the degree of expectation (low degree of expectation) set in the inner core icon display mode pt02. Also, the first hold icon 66
The inner core icon 670c overlaps with 9, and it is guided that the display mode corresponds to the degree of expectation (standard) set in the inner core icon display mode pt01. Further, the inner core icon 670d overlaps with the second hold icon 669, and it is guided that the display mode corresponds to the degree of expectation (standard) set in the inner core icon display mode pt01. Further, the inner core icon 670e overlaps with the third hold icon 669, and it is guided that the display mode corresponds to the degree of expectation (standard) set in the inner core icon display mode pt01. Further, the inner core icon 670f overlaps with the fourth hold icon 669, and it is guided that the display mode corresponds to the degree of expectation (standard) set in the inner core icon display mode pt01.

The hold icon roulette shown in FIG. 77 (2) displays one hold digest icon 668 and four hold icons 669, and shows how the inner core icon string scrolls to the left behind the hold icon roulette. Eight inner core icons 670a, 670b, 670c, 670d, 670e, 670f
, 670g, 670h are located at positions deviated from the hold digest icon 668 and the hold icon 669. The game machine 10 shifts the display position of the inner core icon string, and has eight inner core icons 670a, 670b, 6 with respect to the hold digest icon 668 and the hold icon 669.
Which of 70c, 670d, 670e, 670f, 670g, and 670h corresponds is produced. The inner core icon string includes eight inner core icons 670a, 670b, 670c,
670d, 670e, 670f, 670g, and 670h are arranged in a loop, and the inner core icon that reaches the outside of the display area from the left end appears in the display area from the right end.

The hold icon roulette shown in FIG. 77 (3) has eight core icons 670a, 670b, 670c, 670d, as opposed to the hold digest icon 668 and the hold icon 669.
It shows how it was decided which of 670e, 670f, 670g, and 670h corresponds to. By determining the inner core icons corresponding to the hold digest icon 668 and the hold icon 669, only the corresponding inner core icons are displayed, and the uncorresponding inner core icons are hidden.

As a result, the hold digest icon 668 and the first to third hold icons 6
It is guided that 69 is a display mode corresponding to the degree of expectation (standard) set in the inner core icon display mode pt01. Further, it is guided that the fourth hold icon 669 is a display mode corresponding to the expectation degree (medium expectation degree) set in the inner core icon display mode pt03.

Next, the display mode of the hold icon after the hold icon roulette effect will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the hold icon after the hold icon roulette effect of the modified example of the fifth embodiment.

The hold icon (including the hold icon 669 and the hold digest icon 668) shown in FIG. 78 (1) is similar to the hold icon 669 and the hold digest icon 668 shown in FIG. 77 (3).
The inner core icon is overlaid on the outer shell icon. In this way, the game machine 10 makes it possible to distinguish the display mode of the hold icon 669 and the hold digestion icon 668 before and after the hold icon roulette effect.

The hold icon (including the hold icon 669 and the hold digest icon 668) shown in FIG. 78 (2) is attached to the inner core icon from the display state of the hold icon 669 and the hold digest icon 668 shown in FIG. 77 (3). Add color to the outer shell icon to hide the inner core icon. In this way, the game machine 10 makes it possible to distinguish the display mode of the hold icon 669 and the hold digestion icon 668 before and after the hold icon roulette effect.

Next, as a modified example of the fifth embodiment, the display effect on the holding pedestal will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. 79 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the holding pedestal display of the modified example of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the holding pedestal display of the modified example of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of the holding pedestal display of the modified example of the fifth embodiment. The hold effects in the hold icon (including the hold icon 669 and the hold digest icon 668) are all for the hold effect, and even if there is a hold effect with high expectation, it is related to the hold effect from the next time onward. It is conventional practice not to do so. The gaming machine 10 of the modified example of the fifth embodiment makes it possible to produce the sustainability of the expectation because the result of the predetermined hold effect is related to the hold effect from the next time onward.

The hold pedestal 670 shown in FIG. 79 (1) includes four hold cumulative displays 671 and an operation trigger display 672 made of round windows. The four hold cumulative displays 671 memorize and display the display mode of the hold digestion icon 668 that has been digested in a predetermined period. For example, the hold cumulative display 671 displays the new history on the left side and the old history on the right side in chronological order. In addition, hold cumulative display 6
The 71 is not limited to the time series order, but may be rearranged and displayed in a predetermined order such as an expectation degree order. For example, the first hold cumulative display 671 from the left displays the expectation (for example, green) corresponding to the hold digest icon 673 on the hold pedestal 670, and the second and third hold cumulative display 671 is Expectations (for example, green and blue) corresponding to the past hold digestion icon 668 are displayed, and the fourth hold cumulative display 671 has no display target and is blankly displayed. The operation trigger display 672 indicates that the operation trigger of the display effect (hold pedestal effect) on the hold pedestal is not present. The operation trigger display 672 may be, for example, the message display “POWER”.
"ON" is displayed non-reversed.

The hold pedestal 670 shown in FIG. 79 (2) stores the display mode of the new hold digestion icon 673 in the first hold cumulative display 671 from the left, thereby storing the previous hold cumulative display 671.
Shift the memory display in to the right. The hold pedestal 670 uses the fact that all four hold cumulative displays 671 are filled as an operation trigger for the hold pedestal effect on the hold pedestal. The game machine 10 obtains an operation trigger of the hold pedestal effect and executes the hold pedestal effect. For example, the game machine 10 reversely displays the display mode of the operation trigger display 672 (displays the message display "POWER ON" in reverse), informs that the operation trigger has been obtained, and holds the hold digestion icon on the hold pedestal 670. 6
73 is displayed as an effect.

The hold pedestal 670 shown in FIG. 79 (3) is based on the display mode of the hold digestion icon 673 on the hold pedestal 670, for example, from the green color before the change to the yellow color with higher expectation, based on the four hold cumulative displays 671. And update. In addition, the hold pedestal 670 has four hold cumulative displays 67.
The display mode of 1 is reset to a blank display.

In this way, the game machine 10 historically displays the display mode of the hold digestion icon 668 on the hold pedestal 670, and changes the display mode of the hold digestion icon 668 based on the history display. As a result, the game machine 10 makes it possible to produce the sustainability of the expectation by relating the result of the predetermined hold effect to the hold effect from the next time onward.

It is said that the game machine 10 obtains an operation trigger to change the display mode of the hold digestion icon 673 on the hold pedestal 670, but holds the operation state for a predetermined period and holds the hold digestion on the hold pedestal 670. Another hold digest icon 668 that is held and digested later than icon 673
You may change the display mode of.

Further, the hold cumulative display 671 is supposed to memorize and display different display modes of the hold digest icon 668, but the hold digest icon 673 on the hold pedestal 670 is set as the hold icon 669 and is held, and the hold digest icon is held after the hold shift. It may display the display mode of the process leading to 673.

The holding pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 80 (1) is a holding pedestal in the shape of a gas stove. Hold pedestal 68
0 includes four hold cumulative indications 681 and activation trigger indications 682 of the flame shape. The four hold cumulative displays 681 memorize and display the display mode of the hold digestion icon 668 that has been digested in a predetermined period. The four hold cumulative displays 681 composed of flame shapes are displayed in the expected degree of the hold digestion icon 668 digested in a predetermined period. For example, the higher the expectation, the brighter the color.
It may be a big flame. The holding pedestal 680 is different from the holding pedestal 680 in that the expected degree of the holding digestion icon 668 digested in a predetermined period is stored and displayed in the same display mode, and the display mode is converted and stored and displayed. To do. For example, the first hold cumulative display 681 from the left displays the expectation (for example, a small red flame) corresponding to the hold digest icon 683 on the hold pedestal 680, and the second and third hold cumulative display 681. Displays the degree of expectation (for example, a small red flame and a yellow flame) corresponding to the past hold digestion icon 668, and the fourth hold cumulative display 681 has no display target and displays blank. The operation trigger display 682 indicates that the operation trigger of the display effect (hold pedestal effect) on the hold pedestal is not present. The operation trigger display 682, for example, non-reversely displays the message display "TURN ON".

The hold pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 80 (2) stores the display mode of the new hold digestion icon 683 in the first hold cumulative display 681 from the left, thereby storing the previous hold cumulative display 681.
Shift the memory display in to the right. The hold pedestal 680 uses the fact that all four hold cumulative displays 681 are filled as an operation trigger for the hold pedestal effect on the hold pedestal. The game machine 10 obtains an operation trigger of the hold pedestal effect and executes the hold pedestal effect. For example, the game machine 10 reversely displays the display mode of the operation trigger display 682 (displays the message display "TURN ON" in reverse).
And informs you that you got the activation trigger, and the hold digestion icon 68 on the hold pedestal 680
Display 3 as an effect. For example, the display mode on the upper surface of the holding pedestal 680 is changed to produce the heat generated from the flame acting on the holding digestion icon 683.

The hold pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 80 (3) is based on the display mode of the hold digestion icon 683 on the hold pedestal 680, for example, from green before change to yellow with higher expectation, based on four hold cumulative displays 681. And update. In addition, the hold pedestal 680 has four hold cumulative displays 68.
The display mode of 1 is reset to a blank display.

In this way, the game machine 10 historically displays the display mode of the hold digestion icon 683 on the hold pedestal 680, and changes the display mode of the hold digestion icon 683 based on the history display. As a result, the game machine 10 makes it possible to produce the sustainability of the expectation in relation to the result of the predetermined hold effect in relation to the hold effect from the next time onward. Further, the game machine 10 makes it possible to correspond to various production forms by converting the display mode and storing and displaying the expected degree of the hold digestion icon 683 that the hold pedestal 680 has digested in a predetermined period.

The holding pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 81 (1) displays the holding digestion icon 684 on the holding pedestal in the shape of a gas stove in the shape of a raw egg. For example, the game machine 10 displays the hold icon 669 in an egg shape, takes out the contents from the shell at the time of hold digestion, and sets the hold icon 684 on the hold pedestal in the shape of a gas stove. That is, the game machine 10 can change its display mode in accordance with the hold pedestal 680 in the process from the hold icon 669 to the hold digestion icon 684. Such a game machine 10 can preferably produce a state in which the flame of the gas stove acts on the hold digestion icon 684.

In addition, the hold digestion icon 684 changes from a raw egg shape to a fried egg shape, so that the game machine 10
Can suitably guide the amount of action of the hold cumulative display 681 on the hold digestion icon 684. At this time, the game machine 10 can make the degree of expectation indicated by the hold digestion icon 684 correspond to the degree of baking and the color of the fried egg.

The hold pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 81 (2) carries a hold digest icon 685 smaller than the hold digest icon 684 placed on the hold pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 81 (1). The size of the hold digestion icon 685 makes it easier for the fire to pass, and changes from a raw egg shape to a fried egg shape with a smaller amount of heat than the hold digestion icon 684 placed on the hold pedestal 680. That is, the game machine 10 can produce an expectation degree not only in the display mode of the hold cumulative display 681 on the hold pedestal 680 but also in combination with the hold digestion icon 685.

The gaming machine 10 (including a modified example) of the fifth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The game machine 10 stores the start memory as the execution right of the game (for example, the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game), and holds and displays the start memory in relation to the result of the game corresponding to the start memory. It is possible to change the mode and execute the hold notice effect, and the display means (for example, the display device 41).
) And control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display the start memory. The control means is a hold display including a first display element (for example, the inner core icon 662) indicating the degree of expectation for the result of the game and a second display element (outer shell icon 661) indicating the changeability of the first display element. The start memory is displayed on the display means in the embodiment (FIGS. 69, 70, 72, 73).

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the description of the game machines of the first to fifth embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2).
Alternatively, the game machine provided with the game board 800 (see FIG. 28) has been described, but the game machine of the fifth embodiment can be applied to any of them. Regarding the same configurations as those of the first to fifth embodiments, the reference numerals may be the same and the description thereof may be omitted.

The game machine 10 of the sixth embodiment announces the execution of a predetermined effect (notice effect) related to the game by the success / failure effect (notifies that the advance notice effect may be executed (developed into the advance notice effect)).
A suggestion effect that suggests the execution of the notice effect (development to the advance notice effect) is performed by the success of the success or failure effect. The advance notice effect is, for example, an effect of announcing the reliability and expectation of the game.

First, the suggestion effect executed by the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of the suggestion effect of the sixth embodiment.
FIG. 82 shows an example of the production content and the suggestion content of the suggestion effect (suggestion effect for notifying the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect) in which the notice content is a pseudo-continuous effect (notice effect). The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that makes the player feel one variation (one variation display game) like a plurality of variation display games by re-variating the temporarily stopped symbol. As a suggestion production that the content of the notice is a pseudo continuous production,
There is a suggestion effect 1 and a suggestion effect 2.

The production content of the suggestion production 1 is a pseudo-continuous fanning production. The pseudo-ream effect is whether or not the pseudo-ream symbol (special symbol) used to suggest the execution of the pseudo-ream is temporarily stopped (success or failure of the temporary stop of the pseudo-ream).
Is displayed to notify the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, and it is suggested that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed by temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol (successful temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol).

There are three suggestion contents of the suggestion effect 1: success, failure 1 (SP reach (reach effect with high expectation)), and failure 2 (no development). The suggestion content (success) is the suggestion content suggested by the success of the success / failure effect (success of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol). Suggestions (Failure 1, Failure 2)
Is the suggestion content suggested by the failure of the success / failure effect (failure of temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol).

Suggestion effect 1 derives a result mode that suggests success (suggests that it develops into a pseudo-continuous effect) at a rate of 50% (probability), and suggests failure (failure 1, failure 2) at a rate of 50% (failure 1, failure 2). Derivation of the result mode that suggests that it does not develop into a pseudo-continuous production).

More specifically, the suggestion effect 1 derives a result mode (success) suggesting that it develops into a pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 50%, and a result suggesting that it develops into SP reach at a rate of 25%. The aspect (failure 1) is derived, and the result aspect (failure 2) suggesting that the effect does not develop at a rate of 25% (returning to the state before the start of the suggestion effect) is derived.

As described above, in the suggestion effect 1, the game machine 10 has three suggestion contents (success, success, according to the derivation ratio).
A result mode suggesting one of failure 1 and failure 2) is derived.
The SP reach is an example of an effect (specific effect) that can be suggested when both the suggestion effect 1 and the suggestion effect 2 fail, and is an effect that directs the process of deriving the result of the game.

The production content of the suggestion production 2 is a roulette production. The roulette effect announces the execution of the pseudo-ream effect by displaying whether or not an option (pseudo-ream option) that suggests a pseudo-ream is selected from a plurality of options (success or failure of selection of the pseudo-ream option). , Select a pseudo-roulette option (
It is suggested that the pseudo-ream effect is executed by (successful selection of the pseudo-ream option).

Suggestion contents of suggestion production 2 are success, failure 1 (SP reach), failure 2 (no development),
There are four failures 3 (full rotation (effect of rotating with the symbols in a winning combination)).
The suggestion content (success) is the suggestion content suggested by the success of the success / failure effect (success of selecting the pseudo-continuous option). The suggestion content (failure 1, failure 2, failure 3) is the suggestion content suggested by the failure of the success / failure effect (failure of selection of the pseudo-continuous option).

Suggestion effect 2 derives the suggestion of success at a rate of 30% and the suggestion of failure (failure 1, failure 2, failure 3) at a rate of 70%.
More specifically, the suggestion effect 2 derives a suggestion that it develops into a pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 30%, a suggestion that it develops into SP reach at a rate of 30%, and a rate of 30%. Derives the suggestion that the production does not develop, and derives the suggestion that it develops to full rotation at a rate of 10%.

In this way, in the suggestion effect 2, the game machine 10 has four suggestion contents (success,
Suggest one of failure 1, failure 2, failure 3).
The full rotation is an example of an effect that can be suggested only when the suggestion effect 2 fails. In this way, the game machine 10 can further differentiate each suggestion effect by providing an effect (full rotation) that can be shifted (developed) only by one suggestion effect. As a result, the game machine 10
It is possible to enhance the effect of each suggestion effect and effectively improve the interest.

The above-mentioned production content, suggestion content, and derivation ratio are examples and are not limited thereto.
For example, the game machine 10 may include the development of the suggestion effect 2 into an effect that is not suggested in the suggestion effect 2 in the suggestion content at the time of the failure of the suggestion effect 1.

Next, the derivation ratio of each suggestion content will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 shows
It is a figure for demonstrating the derivation ratio of each suggestion content of 6th Embodiment.
In the suggestion effect 1, the game machine 10 derives a suggestion of success (development to a notice effect) at a rate of 50%, and derives a suggestion of failure at a rate of 50%. Further, in the suggestion effect 1, the game machine 10 derives a suggestion (failure 1) that the game machine 10 develops into SP reach at a rate of 50% (under the condition of deriving the failure) in the case of deriving the failure, and 50 We derive the suggestion (failure 2) that it does not develop at a rate of%.

On the other hand, in the suggestion effect 2, the game machine 10 derives a suggestion of success (development to a notice effect) at a rate of 30%, and derives a suggestion of failure at a rate of 70%. Further, in the suggestion effect 2, the game machine 10
SP at a rate of 30 x 100/70% (about 42.857%) in the case of deriving a failure
Derived the suggestion of developing reach (failure 1), 30 x 100/70% (about 42.85)
Derived the suggestion (failure 2) that it does not develop at a rate of 7%), and 10 × 100/70% (about 1)
We derive the suggestion (failure 3) that it develops to full rotation at a rate of 4.286%).

That is, in the suggestion effects 1 and 2, the relief ratio at the time of failure (the ratio other than the failure 2) is higher in the suggestion effect 2.
Further, in the suggestion effects 1 and 2, the derivation ratio for deriving the suggestion of success is 50% in the suggestion effect 1 and 30% in the suggestion effect 2 (configured to be different ratios).
In this way, the game machine 10 further differentiates each suggestion effect by making the derivation ratio of the success suggestion in the plurality of suggestion effects suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (notice effect) different depending on the success of the success / failure effect. (It is possible to differentiate not only the content of the production but also the feeling of expectation), and it is possible to effectively improve the interest.

Further, in the suggestion effects 1 and 2, the derivation ratio for deriving the suggestion (failure 1) of developing into a specific effect is 25% in the suggestion effect 1 and 30% in the suggestion effect 2 (different ratios). It is configured as). Further, in the suggestion effects 1 and 2, the derivation ratio for deriving the suggestion of developing into a specific effect under the condition of deriving the failure is 50% in the suggestion effect 1 and about 42.857% in the suggestion effect 2. (Structured to be in different proportions).

That is, at the start of the suggestion effect (when success or failure is unknown), the expectation of developing into the specific effect is higher in the suggestion effect 2, and after the suggestion effect fails (after the success or failure is determined), the specific effect is reached. The expectation for development is higher in Specific Production 1. In this way, the game machine 10
By changing the suggestion effect, which has a high expectation of developing into a specific effect, as the effect progresses, it is possible to enhance the effect of each suggestion effect and effectively improve the interest.

Next, the specific production contents (display screen example) of each suggestion effect (suggestion effect 1 and 2) is shown in FIG. 84.
It will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 84 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a display screen during the game of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the display screen during the game of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the game of the sixth embodiment (No. 3).
Is. FIG. 87 is a diagram (No. 4) showing an example of the display screen during the game of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 88 is a diagram (No. 5) showing an example of the display screen during the game of the sixth embodiment.

Here, the display screen (sometimes simply referred to as "screen") is a screen composed of one or a plurality of images displayed in the display area of the display device 41, and in principle, a different code is used for each different display content. Is attached. First, the flow of the suggestion effect 1 (pseudo-continuous fanning effect) will be described.

The display screen 840 shown in FIG. 84 (1) is a display screen in which the symbol is stopped, and after the end of the variable display in the variable display game (before the start of the next variable display game), the symbol which is the result mode of the variable display game is determined. The period is stopped and displayed. The display screen 840 has a large symbol group 841, a small symbol group 842, a special figure 1 hold number display 843, a special figure 2 hold number display 844, and a hold display 845.
And the hold digestion display 846 are displayed.

The large design group 841 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving the interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 8
The 41 is displayed in a large size by setting a variable display area in a substantially central portion of the display device 41. The large symbol group 841 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol.

On the display screen 840, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", and the middle symbol is
The symbol on the right indicates that the symbol is stopped at "5", and the symbol on the right indicates that the symbol is stopped at "7". That is, on the display screen 840, the large symbol group 841 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in the stopped state (the symbol is stopped).

The small symbol group 842 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 842 is displayed small on the peripheral edge of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display effect by the large symbol group 841. The small symbol group 842 is
Includes left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol. On the display screen 840, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 842 indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the stopped state.

In general, the large symbol group 841 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 842, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be greatly changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 842 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 841, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

The special figure 1 hold number display 843 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 840, the special figure 1 hold number display 843 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is “4”.
The special figure 2 hold number display 844 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. On the display screen 840, the special figure 2 hold number display 844 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game is “0”.

The hold display 845 shows how a number of hold icons 847 (hold memory display) corresponding to the number of holds of the special figure 1 game are displayed corresponding to the current game state (for example, the normal game state). The hold icon 847 has, for example, a spherical shape, and the hold icon 847 can also produce a display accompanied by movement by animation (for example, deformation, color change, vertical movement, etc.). Further, the hold digestion display 846 is a hold digestion icon 84 corresponding to the hold digestion of the special figure game.
8 (see display screen 850) is displayed. The hold digestion icon 848 has, for example, a spherical shape, and the hold digestion icon 848 can also produce a display accompanied by movement by animation (for example, deformation, color change, vertical movement, etc.).

For example, when the special figure 1 hold number display 843 displays "4" and the special figure 2 hold number display 844 displays "0" as shown on the display screen 840, the hold display 845 has four hold icons 847. Indicates that the number of reserved memories is "4". The number of holdings or the number of holding memories means the number of starting memories in which the variable display game of the special figure has not been executed.

The hold display 845 can clearly indicate the number of hold storages of the special figure variation display game and notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each hold storage according to the display mode (hold icon 847 displayed on the hold display 845).

The hold digestion display 846 can indicate whether or not the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result depending on the display mode. On the display screen 840, the hold digestion display 846 sets a blank (blank) in the frame (hides the hold digestion icon 848) to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in the stopped state. After this, the game machine 10 starts the variable display.

Note that the hold display 845 displays the total number of holds of the special figure 1 game and the number of holds of the special figure 2 game by the hold icon 847 according to the game state, but the number of holds and the special figure 1 game are displayed. FIG. 2 The number of holds of any one of the games may be displayed by the hold icon 847.

It should be noted that the effect display elements such as the background display, the character display, and the character display (not shown) may be included, and the effect display elements may also be capable of producing a display accompanied by movement by animation or the like.

The display screen 850 shown in FIG. 84 (2) is a display screen after the variable display is started. The display screen 850 is a screen after the display screen 840, and shows a screen during variable display (during three symbols changing). On the display screen 850, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group 841 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, on the display screen 850, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 842 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner.

On the display screen 850, in the special figure 1 hold number display 843, the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is “3”.
The special figure 2 hold number display 844 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game is “0”, and the hold display 845 indicates a game state that guides the hold number of the special figure 1 game. The hold icon 84 indicates that the number of hold memories of the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 game) is "3".
It is indicated by the number of 7. Further, on the display screen 850, the hold digestion display 846 displays the hold digestion icon 848 (hold memory display) during digestion, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the variation display.

The display screen 851 shown in FIG. 85 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 850, and shows a state in which the suggestion effect 1 (pseudo continuous fanning effect) is being executed.
The display screen 851 includes a pseudo-continuous fanning effect display 852 in the display content. The pseudo-continuous fanning effect display 852 displays the pseudo-continuous fanning effect. On the display screen 851, the pseudo-ream effect display 852 displays a character like a tiger and the characters "Stop ~!", And tells the player whether or not the special symbol (pseudo-ream symbol) is temporarily stopped. It shows a state of being fanned, that is, a state of foretelling that a pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

On the display screen 851, the large symbol group 841 indicates that the symbol "3" is temporarily stopped on the left symbol and the symbol "5" is temporarily stopped on the right symbol. Further, on the display screen 851, the large symbol group 8
41 causes the player to operate in a mode different from the state in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is changing (the mode of the display screen 850) and the temporary stop state (for example, low-speed fluctuation) in the middle symbol, and asks the player whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. On the other hand, it shows a state of being fanned.

The display screen 853 shown in FIG. 85 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 851, and is in a state of suggesting the success of the suggestion effect 1 (pseudo-repeated effect) (execution of the pseudo-repeated effect). (Suggested state) is shown.

On the display screen 853, the pseudo-ream effect display 852 displays a character like a tiger and the characters "success !!", and the pseudo-repeated effect (success / failure effect of temporary stop of the pseudo-ream pattern) derives success. It suggests what was done (developing into a pseudo-continuous production).

Further, on the display screen 853, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily stops the symbol "5" on the right symbol, temporarily stops the pseudo-ream symbol on the middle symbol, and pseudo-reams. It suggests that the fanning production has led to success. After this, the game machine 10 ends the suggestion effect 1.

The display screen 854 shown in FIG. 85 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 851, and is in a state of suggesting the failure of the suggestion effect 1 (pseudo-repeated effect) (do not execute the pseudo-repeated effect). (Suggested state) is shown.

On the display screen 854, the pseudo-continuous fanning effect display 852 displays a character like a tiger and the characters "failure ...", and the pseudo-continuous fanning effect (success / failure effect of temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern) fails (failure 1). , It is suggested that the failure 2) was derived.

Further, on the display screen 854, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily stops the symbol "5" on the right symbol, displays the symbol in a variable state on the middle symbol, and pseudo-reams. Fanning production failed (
It is suggested that failure 1 and failure 2) were derived. After that, the game machine 10 suggests that it develops into SP reach or that the effect does not develop (it suggests whether it is failure 1 or failure 2), and ends the suggestion effect 1.

The above is an example of the display screen of the suggestion effect 1 (pseudo-continuous fanning effect). Next, an example of a display screen of suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) will be described.
The display screen 855 shown in FIG. 86 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 850, and shows a state in which the suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) is being executed.

The display screen 855 includes a roulette effect display 856 as a display content. The roulette effect display 856 displays the roulette effect. On the display screen 855, the roulette effect display 856 has the option displays 856a to 856d corresponding to each suggestion content and the operation display 85.
It is configured to include 6e.

Option display 856a to 856d displays options that can be selected in the roulette effect. On the display screen 855, the option display 856a is an option used to suggest the success of the roulette effect (successful success / failure effect), and the option displays 856b to 856d are options used to suggest the failure of the roulette effect (failure of the success / failure effect). Is. The option display 856a displays the character "pseudo" and suggests that when selected, it develops into a pseudo-continuous effect (suggests the success of the roulette effect).

The option displays 856b to 856d display the characters "off" and suggest that they do not develop into a pseudo-continuous production when selected (suggesting a failure of the roulette production). In particular,
For example, the option display 856b is an option corresponding to failure 2 (no development), the option display 856c is an option corresponding to failure 1 (SP reach), and the option display 856d is a failure 3 (full rotation). The corresponding option.

The operation display 856e guides the operation in the roulette effect. The operation display 856e is
An image showing how the push button is being pressed by hand and the characters "Determine the destination with the button Push !!" are displayed, and the player is informed that the roulette effect is an effect that involves push button operation. I'm guiding you.

On the display screen 855, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the right symbol, displays the symbol in a variable state on the middle symbol, and reaches. It shows that it is in the state of. Further, on the display screen 855, the large symbol group 841 is displayed in a smaller size (reduced in the lower left) than in the state of the display screen 850, whereby the game machine 10 secures the display range of the roulette effect.

The display screen 857 shown in FIG. 86 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 855, and shows a state in which the suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) is being executed.
On the display screen 857, the roulette effect display 856 is in a state of displaying whether or not a pseudo-ream option is selected from a plurality of options (success or failure of selection of the pseudo-ream option), that is, the pseudo-ream effect is executed. It indicates a state in which it is foretold that it may be done. In particular,
The roulette effect display 856 moves the selection cursor between the option displays in order, and indicates that the option display in which the selection cursor is located is distinguishable from other option displays (indicating that the selection is temporarily selected). ) Is displayed.

On the display screen 857, the roulette effect display 856 displays the selection cursor at a position corresponding to the option display 856c, displays the option display 856c in a manner distinguishable from other option displays, and the option display 856c is temporary. Indicates that the status is selected for.

The display screen 858 shown in FIG. 86 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 857, and suggests that the suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) is successful (pseudo-continuous effect is executed). The state) is shown.

On the display screen 858, the roulette effect display 856 stops and displays the selection cursor at the position corresponding to the option display 856a, and the option display 856a can be distinguished from other option displays (a mode suggesting that the option display has been selected). Indicates that the option display 856a is selected, that is, the roulette effect derives success (successful selection of the pseudo-continuous option) (develops into a pseudo-continuous effect).

Further, on the display screen 858, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the right symbol, temporarily stops the pseudo-continuous symbol on the middle symbol, and produces a roulette effect. Suggests that has led to success. After this, the game machine 10 ends the suggestion effect 2.

The display screen 859 shown in FIG. 87 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 857, and suggests that the suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) fails (pseudo-continuous effect is not executed). The state) is shown.

On the display screen 859, the roulette effect display 856 stops and displays the selection cursor at the position corresponding to the option display 856b, displays the option display 856b in a manner distinguishable from other option displays, and selects the option display 856b. That is, it suggests that the roulette effect has led to a failure (failure in selecting the pseudo-continuous option) (it does not develop into a pseudo-continuous effect).

Further, on the display screen 859, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the right symbol, displays the symbol in a variable state on the middle symbol, and produces a roulette effect. Suggests that has led to a failure.

The display screen 860 shown in FIG. 87 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 859, and is a state suggesting that the failure suggested by the display screen 859 is failure 2 (“no development”). Shown.

On the display screen 860, the roulette effect display 856 is "sorry" from "off" that was displaying the display content of the option display 856b selected by the roulette effect on the display screen 859.
It is suggested that the failure derived by the roulette production is failure 2 (“no development”) (the production does not develop). After this, the game machine 10 ends the suggestion effect 2.

The display screen 861 shown in FIG. 87 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 857, and suggests that the suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) fails (pseudo-continuous effect is not executed). The state) is shown.

On the display screen 861, the roulette effect display 856 stops and displays the selection cursor at the position corresponding to the option display 856c, displays the option display 856c in a manner distinguishable from other option displays, and selects the option display 856c. That is, it suggests that the roulette effect has led to a failure (failure in selecting the pseudo-continuous option) (it does not develop into a pseudo-continuous effect).

Further, on the display screen 861, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the right symbol, displays the symbol in a variable state on the middle symbol, and produces a roulette effect. Suggests that has led to a failure.

The display screen 862 shown in FIG. 88 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 861 and suggests that the failure suggested by the display screen 861 is failure 1 (“SP reach”). Shown.

On the display screen 862, the roulette effect display 856 changes the display content of the option display 856c selected by the roulette effect from "off" displayed on the display screen 861 to "battle" (display indicating SP reach). Failure derived by roulette production is failure 1 ("S"
It suggests that it is "P reach") (developing into SP reach). After this, the game machine 10 ends the suggestion effect 2.

The display screen 863 shown in FIG. 88 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 857, and suggests that the suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) fails (pseudo-continuous effect is not executed). The state) is shown.

On the display screen 863, the roulette effect display 856 stops and displays the selection cursor at the position corresponding to the option display 856d, displays the option display 856d in a manner distinguishable from other option displays, and selects the option display 856d. That is, it suggests that the roulette effect has led to a failure (failure in selecting the pseudo-continuous option) (it does not develop into a pseudo-continuous effect).

Further, on the display screen 863, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily stops the symbol "3" on the right symbol, displays the symbol in a variable state on the middle symbol, and produces a roulette effect. Suggests that has led to a failure.

The display screen 864 shown in FIG. 88 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 863, and is a state suggesting that the failure suggested by the display screen 863 is failure 3 (“full rotation”). Shown.

On the display screen 864, the roulette effect display 856 changes the display content of the option display 856d selected by the roulette effect from "off" displayed on the display screen 863 to "full rotation", and the failure derived by the roulette effect is derived. Suggests failure 3 (“full rotation”) (development to full rotation). After this, the game machine 10 ends the suggestion effect 2.

The above is an example of the display screen of the suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect). In the above display screen example, the roulette effect is performed in a manner in which one option display is provided according to each suggestion content, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game machine 10 has a roulette effect in which an option display suggesting one success (option corresponding to success) and an option display suggesting one loss (option corresponding to failures 1, 2 and 3) are provided. You may also display two options that suggest success (options that correspond to success) and one option that suggests loss (failures 1 and 2).
, 3) may be provided for the roulette effect.

In addition, regarding the option display that suggests failure, "off" is displayed in common, and after selection, "
It is configured to display "Sorry", "Battle", and "Full rotation" (multi-stage display of suggestion content), but it is not limited to this, but from the beginning, "Sorry" option display, "Battle" option display, It may be configured to display the option display of "full rotation". It is also possible to display "hit" for the option display suggesting success, and display "pseudo" after selection (multi-step display of suggestion content).

By the way, the game machine 10 does not necessarily execute the pseudo-continuous effect even when the suggestion effect suggests the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (notice effect). For example, the game machine 10 does not have to execute the pseudo continuous effect at a constant rate. That is, the game machine 10 can include a ghost in the success of the suggestion effect.

Here, an example of the execution ratio of the pseudo-continuous effect after the success of each suggestion effect in the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect of the sixth embodiment.

Suggestion effect 1 includes 5% of success (assuming execution expectation is 95%). That is, after the success of the suggestion effect 1, the game machine 10 actually executes the advance notice effect (pseudo-continuous effect) at a rate of 95%, and does not actually execute the advance notice effect at a rate of 5%. That is, the suggestion effect 1 is an effect that suggests an execution expectation degree of 95% for the pseudo-continuous effect due to the success of the success / failure effect.

Suggestion effect 2 includes 20% of success (assuming execution expectation is 80%). That is,
After the success of the suggestion effect 2, the game machine 10 actually executes the advance notice effect at a rate of 80%, and 20%.
The notice production is not actually executed at the ratio of. That is, the suggestion effect 2 is an effect that suggests an execution expectation of 80% for the pseudo-continuous effect due to the success of the success / failure effect.

In this way, by making the ratio of the contradiction (contradiction pattern) included in the success of the game machine 10 different for each suggestion effect, the game machine 10 can further differentiate each suggestion effect, and is effectively entertaining. Can be improved.

In addition, the game machine 10 may include the Gase only in the success of one of the suggestion effects, or may set the ratio of the Gase to be included in the success of any of the suggestion effects to the same ratio.
For example, in the game machine 10, even if the suggestion effect 1 and the suggestion effect 2 have the same execution ratio of the actual advance notice effect, the advance notice effect can be produced by making the execution ratio of the Gase included in the success different. The success derivation rate can be made different between the suggestion effect 1 and the suggestion effect 2. According to this, the game machine 10 can differentiate the expectation that the player has in each suggestion effect while setting the execution ratio of the actual notice effect in the suggestion effect 1 and the suggestion effect 2 to be the same. , Can effectively improve the interest.

By the way, the game machine 10 is not limited to performing the suggestion effect only once within one variation (one variation display game), and can also perform the suggestion effect a plurality of times. Here, an example of an effect configuration in which a suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times within one variation will be described with reference to FIG. 90.

The game machine 10 can also include a contradiction pattern at a certain ratio for the suggestions of failure 1, failure 2, and failure 3.
Further, as a contradiction pattern, the game machine 10 is actually a pseudo-ream (success) when suggesting a contradiction pattern (for example, SP reach (failure 1)) that develops into an unexpected effect different from the suggested content as well as non-execution. ) May include a contradiction pattern).

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of an effect configuration in the case where the suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times within one variation in the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 90 (1), the game machine 10 performs the effect of suggestion effect 1 (success) and the advance notice effect suggested by suggestion effect 1 (success) for the effect configuration within one variation. 1 (
The effect is such that the effect of (success) is performed, the advance notice effect suggested in suggestion effect 1 (success) is performed, and then the specific effect is performed. In this way, the game machine 10 has a plurality of suggestion effects 1 within one fluctuation.
(Suggestive production of the same production content) may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90 (2), the game machine 10 suggests an effect configuration within one variation.
(Success) production, suggestion production 1 (success) suggestion notice production, suggestion production 2 (success) production, suggestion production 2 (success) suggestion notice production, and then specific production It is a production composition that performs. In this way, the game machine 10 has a suggestion effect 1 within one fluctuation.
And suggestion effect 2 (suggestion effect of different effect contents) may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90 (3), the game machine 10 suggests an effect configuration within one variation.
(Failure 2) is produced, suggestion effect 2 (success) is produced, and a specific effect is performed after the advance notice effect suggested in suggestion effect 2 (success) is performed. In this way, the game machine 10 may perform the suggestion effect 1 and the suggestion effect 2 (suggestion effect of different effect contents) within one variation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90 (4), the game machine 10 suggests an effect configuration within one variation.
(Failure 2) is produced, Suggestion effect 2 (Success) is produced, Suggestion effect 2 (Success) suggests advance notice effect, Suggestion effect 1 (Success) is produced, and Suggestion effect 1 (Success) is performed.
The production configuration is such that a specific production is performed after the preliminary production suggested in (Success). In this way, the game machine 10 may perform a plurality of suggestion effects 1 and suggestion effects 2 within one variation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90 (5), the game machine 10 suggests an effect configuration within one variation.
(Failure 2) production, suggestion production 2 (success) production, suggestion production 2 (success) suggestion production, specific production, and then specific production. It is configured. In this way, the game machine 10 may perform the suggestion effect 1 and the suggestion effect 2 (suggestion effect of different effect contents) within one variation. Further, in this way, the game machine 10 may perform the advance notice effect without going through the suggestion effects 1 and 2. In addition, it should be noted.
Instead of a production configuration in which a specific production is performed, a preliminary production is performed, and then a specific production is performed,
The game machine 10 may also perform a notice effect (as part of the specific effect) during the specific effect. Further, the game machine 10 may be configured to perform the suggestion effect 1 and the suggestion effect 2 during the specific effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90 (6), the game machine 10 suggests an effect configuration within one variation.
(Success) production, suggestion production 1 (success) suggestion notice production, suggestion production 2 (failure 1) production, suggestion production 2 (failure 1) suggestion specific production And. In this way, the game machine 10 may perform the suggestion effect 1 and the suggestion effect 2 (suggestion effect of different effect contents) within one variation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90 (7), the game machine 10 suggests an effect configuration within one variation.
(Failure 1) is produced, the specific effect suggested in Suggestion effect 2 (Failure 1) is performed, the notice effect is performed, the suggestion effect 1 (success) is produced, and the notice suggested in suggestion effect 1 (success) is performed. The production configuration is such that a specific production is performed after the production is performed. In this way, the game machine 10
May perform suggestion effect 1 and suggestion effect 2 (suggestion effect of different effect contents) within one variation. Further, in this way, the game machine 10 may perform the advance notice effect without going through the suggestion effects 1 and 2.

In the above embodiment, the game machine 10 has described by using an example in which the suggestion effect of the two effect contents can be executed. However, the suggestion effect that the game machine 10 can execute is not limited to two, and three or more suggestions are made. The effect can be configured to be executable.

The gaming machine 10 may be configured so that one suggestion effect can be executed in parallel with another suggestion effect. For example, the game machine 10 can make the suggestion of the advance notice effect clearer by simultaneously performing a plurality of suggestion effects, so that the game can be easily understood by the player.

In one aspect, the above-mentioned suggestive effect can be regarded as a suggestive effect that suggests a change in the execution expectation of the pseudo-ren (notice effect). That is, in the suggestion effect, the execution expectation of the pseudo-continuous occurrence increased due to the success of the success / failure effect (for example, the execution expectation is 0% to the execution expectation 90).
It suggests that it has increased to% (success rate excluding Gase)), and the execution expectation of pseudo-continuous occurrence does not increase due to the failure of success / failure production (for example, the execution expectation remains 0% and does not change).
It can be regarded as a production that suggests. In this case, the initial execution expectation is set to 0%.
Other than (for example, 20%).

[Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a modification 1 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the first modification of the sixth embodiment, the game machine 10 is configured to include a plurality of success patterns in the suggestion content of each suggestion effect. FIG. 91 shows
It is a figure which shows an example of the suggestion effect of the modification 1 of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 91 shows an example of the effect content and the suggestion content of the suggestion effect in which the notice content is a pseudo continuous effect (notice effect). Suggestion production 1 and suggestion production 2 are suggested productions in which the content of the notice is a pseudo-continuous production.
There is.

The production content of the suggestion production 1 is a pseudo-continuous fanning production. There are four suggestion contents of the suggestion effect 1: success 1 (normal), success 2 (revival), failure 1 (SP reach), and failure 2 (no development). The suggestion content (success 1, success 2) is the suggestion content suggested by the success of the success / failure effect (success of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol). The suggestion content (failure 1, failure 2) is the suggestion content suggested by the failure of the success / failure effect (failure of temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol). In addition, success 1 (normal) is
It is an aspect that suggests that the aspect shown in the sixth embodiment develops into a pseudo-continuous production, and success 2 (revival) is a mode in which the mode of failure is displayed once and then succeeded (success after performing a common effect with the failure). ) Is a mode (revival mode).

Suggestion effect 1 derives the suggestion of success (success 1, success 2) at a rate of 50%, and derives the suggestion of failure (failure 1, failure 2) at a rate of 50%. More specifically, the suggestion effect 1 derives the suggestion of success 1 at a rate of 45%, derives the suggestion of success 2 at a rate of 5%, and derives the suggestion of failure 1 at a rate of 25%. The suggestion of failure 2 is derived at a rate of 25%.

In this way, in the suggestion effect 1, the game machine 10 has four suggestion contents (success 1) according to the derivation ratio.
, Success 2, Failure 1, Failure 2) suggest (derive) one of them.
The production content of the suggestion production 2 is a roulette production. Suggestion production 2 suggests success 1 (normal), success 2 (revival), failure 1 (SP reach), failure 2 (no development), failure 3 (failure 3)
There are five (full rotation). The suggestion content (success 1, success 2) is the suggestion content suggested by the success of the success / failure effect (success in selecting the pseudo-continuous option). Suggestions (Failure 1, Failure 2, Failure 3)
) Is the suggestion content suggested by the failure of the success / failure effect (failure of selecting the pseudo-continuous option). In addition, success 1 (normal) is a mode that suggests that the mode shown in the sixth embodiment develops into a pseudo-continuous production, and success 2 (revival) is a mode that once displays the mode of failure and then succeeds. This is a suggestive mode (revival mode).

Suggestion effect 2 derives the suggestion of success (success 1, success 2) at a rate of 30%, and derives the suggestion of failure (failure 1, failure 2, failure 3) at a rate of 70%. More specifically, the suggestion effect 2 is
The suggestion of success 1 is derived at a rate of 25%, the suggestion of success 2 is derived at a rate of 5%, the suggestion of failure 1 is derived at a rate of 30%, and the suggestion of failure 2 is derived at a rate of 30%. Then, the suggestion of failure 3 is derived at a rate of 10%.

In this way, in the suggestion effect 2, the game machine 10 has five suggestion contents (success 1) according to the derivation ratio.
, Success 2, Failure 1, Failure 2, Failure 3).
By including a plurality of success patterns in the suggestion content of the suggestion effect in this way, the game machine 10 can increase the variation of the effect and improve the interest of the game. The gaming machine 10 can also include a failure pattern in a mode of suggesting failure after displaying success once in the suggestion content.
Further, the game machine 10 may be configured so that only one of the suggestion effect 1 and the suggestion effect 2 includes the suggestion content of success (revival).

[Modification 2 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a modification 2 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the second modification of the sixth embodiment, the game machine 10 is configured to include two or more effect modes (plurality of patterns) in the suggestion effect of each effect content. In the following description, the suggestion effect 1 will be used as a representative, but the suggestion effect 2 can be applied in the same manner. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of the suggestion effect of the second modification of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 92 shows a suggestion production 1 in which the content of the notice is a pseudo-continuous production and the content of the production is a pseudo-continuous production.
An example of the derivation ratio of each suggestion content for each production mode of is shown.
There are two different production modes of the suggestion effect 1 (effect mode), pattern 1 and pattern 2. For example, pattern 1 is a pattern in which a weak character (character like a pig) appears as a character, and pattern 2 is a pattern in which a strong character (character like a tiger) appears.

The suggestion effect 1 of the aspect of the pattern 1 derives the suggestion of success at a rate of 50%, and derives the suggestion of failure (failure 1, failure 2) at a rate of 50%. More specifically, the suggestion effect 1 of the pattern 1 derives the suggestion of success at a rate of 50% and the suggestion of failure 1 at a rate of 25%.
The suggestion of failure 2 is derived at a rate of 25%.

The suggestion effect 1 of the aspect of the pattern 2 derives the suggestion of success at a rate of 70%, and derives the suggestion of failure (failure 1, failure 2) at a rate of 30%. More specifically, the suggestion effect 1 of the pattern 2 aspect derives the suggestion of success at a rate of 70% and the suggestion of failure 1 at a rate of 20%.
The suggestion of failure 2 is derived at a rate of 10%.

In this way, the suggestion effect of one effect content can be executed in a plurality of modes, and the derivation ratio of the suggestion content in each aspect is made different, so that the game machine 10 increases the variation of the effect.
You can improve the interest of the game. The gaming machine 10 may also have different suggestion contents that can be derived in the suggestion effect of each aspect. The two different aspects are examples and are not limited to this. It may have three or more different modes.

Next, an example of the proportion of Gase included in the success of each aspect will be described with reference to FIG. 93. Figure 9
3 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect of the modified example 2 of the sixth embodiment.
The suggestion effect 1 of the aspect of the pattern 1 includes 5% of the success (assuming the execution expectation is 95%). That is, the game machine 10 actually executes the advance notice effect (pseudo-continuous effect) at a rate of 95% after the success of the suggestion effect 1 of the aspect of the pattern 1, and does not actually execute the advance notice effect at a rate of 5%. .. That is, the suggestion effect 1 of the aspect of the pattern 1 is an effect that suggests an execution expectation degree of 95% of the pseudo continuous effect due to the success of the success / failure effect.

The suggestion effect 1 of the aspect of the pattern 2 includes 10% of the success (assuming the execution expectation is 90%). That is, the game machine 10 actually executes the advance notice effect (pseudo-continuous effect) at a rate of 90% after the success of the suggestion effect 1 of the aspect of the pattern 2, and does not actually execute the advance notice effect at a rate of 10%. .. That is, the suggestion effect 1 of the aspect of the pattern 2 is an effect that suggests an execution expectation degree of 90% of the pseudo-continuous effect due to the success of the success / failure effect.

In this way, the game machine 10 can have different proportions of contradictions (contradiction patterns) to be included in success depending on the mode. As a result, the game machine 10 increases the variation of the production.
You can improve the interest of the game.

[Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a modification 3 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the third modification of the sixth embodiment, the game machine 10 makes the derivation ratio of each suggestion content different according to the number of executions within one variation. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of the suggestion effect of the third modification of the sixth embodiment. In the following description, the suggestion effect 1 will be used as a representative, but the suggestion effect 2 can be applied in the same manner.

FIG. 94 shows an example of the derivation ratio of each suggestion content for each number of executions of the suggestion effect 1 in which the notice content is a pseudo continuous effect.
The suggestion effect 1 is configured so that the derivation ratio of each suggestion content is different according to the number of executions within one variation. In the first suggestion effect 1, the suggestion of success is derived at a rate of 50%, and the suggestion of failure (failure 1, failure 2) is derived at a rate of 50%. More specifically, in the first suggestion effect 1, the suggestion of success is derived at a rate of 50%, the suggestion of failure 1 is derived at a rate of 25%, and the suggestion of failure 2 is derived at a rate of 25%. To do.

In the second suggestion effect 1, the suggestion of success is derived at a rate of 40%, and the suggestion of failure (failure 1, failure 2) is derived at a rate of 60%. More specifically, in the second suggestion effect 1, the suggestion of success is derived at a rate of 40%, the suggestion of failure 1 is derived at a rate of 30%, and the suggestion of failure 2 is derived at a rate of 30%.
Derivation of the suggestion of.

By making the derivation ratio different according to the number of executions within one fluctuation in this way, the game machine 1
0 can increase the variation of the production and improve the interest of the game. The game machine 10 may also have different suggestion contents that can be derived in the suggestion effect of each execution number. It should be noted that the success rate of the first suggestion effect 1 is not limited to being higher than the success rate of the second suggestion effect 1, and the success rate of the first suggestion effect 1 is higher than the success rate of the second suggestion effect 1. May also be low.

Next, an example of the ratio of Gase to be included in the success of the suggestion effect of each execution number will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect of the modification 3 of the sixth embodiment.

The first suggestion effect 1 includes 5% of success (assuming the execution expectation is 95%). That is, after the success of the first suggestion effect 1, the game machine 10 actually executes the advance notice effect (pseudo-continuous effect) at a rate of 95%, and does not actually execute the advance notice effect at a rate of 5%. That is, the first suggestion effect 1 is an effect that suggests an execution expectation of 95% for the pseudo-continuous effect due to the success of the success / failure effect.

The second suggestion effect 1 includes 10% of the success (assuming the execution expectation is 90%). That is, after the success of the second suggestion effect 1, the game machine 10 actually executes the advance notice effect (pseudo-continuous effect) at a rate of 90%, and does not actually execute the advance notice effect at a rate of 10%. That is, the second suggestion effect 1 is an effect that suggests an execution expectation of 90% for the pseudo-continuous effect due to the success of the success / failure effect.

In this way, the game machine 10 can make the ratio of the contradiction (contradiction pattern) included in the success different depending on the number of executions. As a result, the game machine 10 can increase the variation of the production and improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the proportion of the first suggestion effect 1 is not limited to being lower than the proportion of the second suggestion effect 1, and the proportion of the first suggestion effect 1 is set to that of the second suggestion effect 1. It may be higher than the ratio of Gase. In addition, only one of them may contain a ghost.

It should be noted that the game machine 10 may have different derivation ratios of each suggestion content of the second suggestion effect 1 and the ratio of shavings included in the success depending on whether the first suggestion effect is successful or unsuccessful. .. Further, in the game machine 10, only when the first suggestion effect is successful, or only when the first suggestion effect is unsuccessful, the derivation ratio of each suggestion content of the second suggestion effect 1 and the ratio of the ghost to be included in the success. May be different from the derivation ratio of each suggestion content of the first suggestion effect 1 and the percentage of ghosts included in the success.

[Modification 4 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a modification 4 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the fourth modification of the sixth embodiment, the game machine 10 is capable of executing a suggestion effect (suggestion effect for notifying the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect) in which the advance notice content is the pre-reading advance notice effect (notice effect). FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of the suggestion effect of the modified example 4 of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 96 shows an example of the suggestion content of the suggestion effect (suggestion effect for notifying the execution of the pre-reading notice effect) in which the advance notice content is the pre-reading notice effect (notice effect). The pre-reading notice effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon or the hold digestion icon according to the result derived by the variable display game corresponding to the icon (hold icon or hold digestion icon). As the suggestion effect in which the advance notice content is the pre-reading advance notice effect, there are a suggestion effect 1 and a suggestion effect 2 having different effect contents.

There are two suggestion contents of the suggestion effect 1: success suggested by the success of the success / failure effect and failure suggested by the failure of the success / failure effect. Suggestion effect 1 derives a suggestion of success (suggestion that it develops into a look-ahead notice effect) at a rate of 50% (probability), and suggests a failure (probability) at a rate of 50% (development to a look-ahead notice effect). (Suggesting not to do) is derived.

There are two suggestion contents of suggestion production 2, success and failure. Suggestion effect 2 derives a suggestion of success (suggestion that it develops into a look-ahead notice effect) at a rate of 60% (probability), and suggests a failure (probability) at a rate of 40% (development to a look-ahead notice effect). (Suggesting not to do) is derived.

As described above, the game machine 10 can perform a plurality of suggestion effects of the effect contents not only in the pseudo continuous effect but also in the pre-reading advance notice effect. The above-mentioned suggestions and derivation ratios are examples and are not limited to these. For example, the game machine 10 can enable the suggestion effect of each effect content to be executed in a plurality of effect modes even in the pre-reading advance notice effect, and may include a plurality of success patterns and a plurality of failure patterns in the suggestion content. it can.

Further, the notice content of the suggestion effect is not limited to the pre-reading notice effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, and may be a suggestion effect in which another effect is the notice content.
The gaming machine 10 (including a modified example) of the sixth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.

(1) The game machine 10 suggests the execution of the advance notice effect by the advance notice effect means (effect control device 300) capable of executing the advance notice effect (for example, pseudo continuous effect, pre-reading advance notice effect, etc.) and the success of the success / failure effect. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect means (effect control device 300) that can execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous fanning effect, a roulette effect, etc.) and a specific effect (for example, SP reach) that directs the process of deriving the result of the game. Includes a specific effect means (effect control device 300). The suggestion effect means is the first success / failure effect (for example, the success / failure effect of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the pseudo-continuous fanning effect) or the second success / failure effect (for example, the success / failure effect of the selection of the pseudo-continuous option in the roulette effect). The first probability, which is feasible and is the success probability (derivation ratio) of the first success / failure effect, and the second probability, which is the success probability (derivation ratio) of the second success / failure effect, are different.

(2) The specific effect means of (1) executes the specific effect when the second success or failure effect fails, rather than the third probability which is the execution probability of executing the specific effect when the first success or failure effect fails. Increase the fourth probability, which is the probability.

(3) The game machine 10 gives notice based on the advancement effect means (effect control device 300) capable of executing the advance notice effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect, pre-reading advance notice effect, etc.) for notifying the result of the game, and the success or failure of the success / failure effect. Suggestion effect means that can execute a suggestion effect that suggests the execution expectation of the effect (for example, 90% of the execution expectation if it succeeds (ratio excluding roulette), 0% if it fails) For example, a specific effect means (effect control device 3) capable of executing a pseudo continuous effect effect, a roulette effect, etc., and a specific effect (for example, SP reach) that directs the process of deriving the result of the game.
00) and. The suggestion effect means is the first success / failure effect (for example, the success / failure effect of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the pseudo-continuous fanning effect) or the second success / failure effect (for example, the success / failure effect of the selection of the pseudo-continuous option in the roulette effect). It is feasible and the success probability of the first success / failure effect (
The first probability, which is the derivation ratio), and the second probability, which is the success probability (derivation ratio) of the second success / failure effect, are different.

(4) The specific effect means of (3) executes the specific effect when the second success or failure effect fails, rather than the third probability which is the execution probability of executing the specific effect when the first success or failure effect fails. Increase the fourth probability, which is the probability.

(5) The suggestion effect means of (3) does not change the execution expectation of the advance notice effect before and after the success / failure effect due to the success of the success / failure effect, and does not change the execution expectation of the advance notice effect before and after the success / failure effect due to the failure of the success / failure effect.

(6) The game machine 10 has a notice effect means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect, pre-reading advance effect, etc.) and a suggestion effect (for example, suggestion effect) suggesting execution of the advance effect. It includes a suggestion effect means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a pseudo continuous fan effect, a roulette effect, etc.). The suggestion effect means can suggest the execution of the advance notice effect according to the success or failure of the suggestion effect, and as the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the success or failure effect of the temporary stop of the pseudo-ream symbol in the pseudo-repeated effect) or the first. 2 Suggestion effects (for example, success / failure effects of selection of pseudo-continuous choices in roulette effects) can be executed, and the first probability, which is the success probability (derivation ratio) of the first suggestion effect, and the success probability of the second suggestion effect. It is different from the second probability, which is (derivation ratio).

(7) The game machine 10 of (6) includes a specific effect means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, SP reach) that directs the process of deriving the result of the game. The second is higher than the third probability, which is the execution probability of executing the specific effect when the first suggestion effect fails.
Increase the fourth probability, which is the execution probability of executing a specific effect when the suggestion effect fails.

[7th Embodiment]
In the description of the game machines of the first to sixth embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2).
Alternatively, the game machine provided with the game board 800 (see FIG. 28) has been described, but the game machine of the seventh embodiment can be applied to any of them. Regarding the same configurations as those of the first to sixth embodiments, the reference numerals may be the same and the description thereof may be omitted.

The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment further enhances the interest of the suggestion effect that suggests the execution of the advance notice effect such as the pseudo continuous effect and the hold change effect. The game machine 10 of the seventh embodiment realizes diversification of expectations for suggestive effects that a player who has experience in playing can feel, and aims to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine 10 can execute the advance notice effect in the variable display game. The advance notice effect is an effect mode for notifying the result derived by the variable display game and the process of deriving the result. For example, the advance notice effect includes a pseudo continuous effect, a hold change effect, a character effect, a background effect, and the like. It can take various production modes.

The results derived from the variable display game include hits, misses, and the magnitude of the value at the time of hits. The hit includes a big hit and a small hit. The magnitude of the value at the time of winning is the magnitude of the game value that can be acquired by the player on one side, and the number of prize balls that can be acquired, the number of rounds that can be won, and the large winning opening (large winning opening 1 or) that is opened. Includes large prize opening 2), presence / absence of probability fluctuation, presence / absence of Fuden support, presence / absence of probability fluctuation and acquisition opportunity of Fuden support, etc. The process of deriving the results derived by the variable display game is
There are the size of the fluctuation time, the presence / absence and type of reach, the presence / absence of development of reach, the type of development reach, and the like.

In addition, the game machine 10 can execute a suggestion effect prior to the advance notice effect. The suggestive effect is an effect that suggests the presence or absence of the advance notice effect, and may indicate the presence or absence of the advance notice effect.
It may suggest the feasibility of the advance notice effect. The suggestion effect includes a predetermined success / failure effect, and suggests the feasibility of the advance notice effect based on the success result or the failure result derived from the success / failure effect. For example, the suggestion effect suggests the execution of the advance notice effect by deriving the success result, and the success / failure effect suggests the non-execution of the advance notice effect by deriving the failure result. The suggestion effect may suggest the feasibility of the advance notice effect by preparing a plurality of modes of the success / failure effect or the failure effect. For example, the suggestion effect suggests the reliable execution of the notice effect by deriving the success result that the success or failure effect is a great success, and the success result that the success or failure effect is just a success is almost certain. It may suggest execution.
In addition, the suggestion effect suggests a certain failure of the advance notice effect by deriving a failure result in which the success or failure effect is a big failure, and a failure result in which the success or failure effect is a regrettable failure is derived, so that the advance notice effect is not executed. It may suggest the execution of a slight advance notice effect while suggesting. It should be noted that the suggestion effect may suggest not only the feasibility of the advance notice effect but also the result of the advance notice effect by preparing a plurality of modes of the success / failure effect or the failure effect. For example, the suggestion effect suggests the reliable execution of the notice effect by deriving the success result in which the success / failure effect is a great success, and precedes the derivation result and the derivation process of the variable display game announced by the notice effect. May be suggested. In addition, the success pattern of the suggestion effect (success effect that derives the success of the success / failure effect) and the failure pattern (failure effect that derives the failure of the success / failure effect) are the same effect (common) until the result is derived. It may be a production) or a different production. In addition, multiple success patterns (same for failure patterns) of suggestion effects may be prepared, and one success pattern and another success pattern may be the same production.
It may be a different production. Further, one success pattern and another success pattern may be used as the same effect halfway, and the effect of the result derivation part may be different.

Further, the game machine 10 can execute a specific effect in parallel with the suggestion effect. Executing the suggestion effect and the specific effect in parallel means that the execution period of the suggestion effect and the execution period of the specific effect overlap.

The specific effect is an effect that can be executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. Further, the specific effect can be executed regardless of whether or not the advance notice effect is executed. For example, the specific effect includes a timer effect, an SP reach effect, and the like.

First, the variation display mode corresponding to the variation display command will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 100. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example of a variation display mode corresponding to the variation display command of the seventh embodiment (No. 1). FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of a variation display mode corresponding to the variation display command of the seventh embodiment (No. 2). FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of a variation display mode corresponding to the variation display command of the seventh embodiment (No. 3). FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of a variation display mode corresponding to the variation display command of the seventh embodiment (No. 4).

The game machine 10 can execute a suggestion effect, a notice effect, and a specific effect in combination as an effect pattern. First, a typical production pattern will be described. The effect pattern A1 shown in FIG. 97 is executed based on a predetermined variation display command, and is executed in, for example, one variation display game called the nth variation. The effect pattern A1 executes the suggestion effect without executing the specific effect in parallel, derives the success result in the success / failure effect in the suggestion effect, and executes the advance notice effect. The game machine 10 can perform a game effect in which the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect are coordinated by performing the advance notice effect after the success of the suggestion effect. As a result, the game machine 10 can improve the interest of the game machine 10 as compared with the independent execution of the advance notice effect.

The effect pattern A2 shown in FIG. 97 is executed based on a predetermined variation display command, and is executed in, for example, one variation display game called the nth variation. The effect pattern A2 executes the suggestion effect without executing the specific effect in parallel, and executes the advance notice effect even though the failure result is derived in the success / failure effect in the suggestion effect. The effect pattern A2 can give the player a great sense of surprise, but it is not desirable that the effect pattern A2 appears frequently from the viewpoint of the consistency of the game effect. Therefore, the effect pattern A2 may be a rare effect that is hardly selected, or may be an effect that is not selected in the first place, including that it is not prepared in advance. The game machine 10 can perform a game effect in which the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect are coordinated by performing the advance notice effect after the suggestion effect fails. As a result, the game machine 10
It is possible to improve the interest compared to the independent execution of the notice production.

The effect pattern A3 shown in FIG. 97 is executed based on a predetermined variation display command, and is executed in, for example, one variation display game called the nth variation. The effect pattern A3 executes the suggestion effect without executing the specific effect in parallel, derives the failure result in the success / failure effect in the suggestion effect, and does not execute the advance notice effect. The effect pattern A3 gives the player a feeling of disappointment, but is prepared from the viewpoint of the consistency of the game effect. The game machine 10
Although the advance notice effect is not performed due to the failure of the suggestion effect, it is possible to produce a feeling of expectation for the execution of the advance notice effect after the successful suggestion effect.

The effect pattern B1 shown in FIG. 97 is executed based on a predetermined variation display command, and is executed in, for example, one variation display game called the nth variation. The effect pattern B1 executes the suggestion effect while executing the specific effect in parallel, derives the success result in the success / failure effect in the suggestion effect, and executes the advance notice effect. The game machine 10 can perform a game effect in which the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect are coordinated by performing the advance notice effect after the success of the suggestion effect. Further, the game machine 10 can change the suggestion by the suggestion effect and diversify the suggestion content perceived by the player by executing the suggestion effect and the specific effect in parallel.
As a result, the game machine 10 can improve the interest by suggestive effects depending on whether or not the game machine 10 is executed in parallel with the specific effect.

The effect pattern B2 shown in FIG. 97 is executed based on a predetermined variation display command, and is executed in, for example, one variation display game called the nth variation. The effect pattern B2 executes the suggestion effect while executing the specific effect in parallel, and executes the advance notice effect even though the failure result is derived in the success / failure effect in the suggestion effect. The effect pattern B2 can give the player a great sense of surprise, but it is not desirable that the effect pattern B2 appears frequently from the viewpoint of the consistency of the game effect. Therefore, the effect pattern B2 may be a rare effect that is hardly selected, or may be an effect that is not selected in the first place, including that it is not prepared in advance. The game machine 10 can perform a game effect in which the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect are coordinated by performing the advance notice effect after the suggestion effect fails. Further, the game machine 10 can change the suggestion by the suggestion effect and diversify the suggestion content perceived by the player by executing the suggestion effect and the specific effect in parallel. As a result, the game machine 10 can improve the interest by suggestive effects depending on whether or not the game machine 10 is executed in parallel with the specific effect.

The effect pattern B3 shown in FIG. 97 is executed based on a predetermined variation display command, and is executed in, for example, one variation display game called the nth variation. The effect pattern B3 executes the suggestion effect while executing the specific effect in parallel, derives the failure result in the success / failure effect in the suggestion effect, and does not execute the advance notice effect. The effect pattern B3 gives the player a disappointment, but is prepared from the viewpoint of the consistency of the game effect. The game machine 10 does not perform the advance notice effect due to the failure of the suggestion effect, but can produce an expectation for the execution of the advance notice effect after the successful suggestion effect. Further, the game machine 10 can change the suggestion by the suggestion effect and diversify the suggestion content perceived by the player by executing the suggestion effect and the specific effect in parallel. As a result, the game machine 10 can improve the interest by suggestive effects depending on whether or not the game machine 10 is executed in parallel with the specific effect.

Further, the game machine 10 does not limit the specific effect to only one mode, and can select and execute one mode from two or more modes. For example, the game machine 10 has a specific effect A and a specific effect B.
It can be executed by selecting and. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 can execute a timer effect (long) having a large timer value as the specific effect A and a timer effect (short) having a small timer value as the specific effect B.

The effect patterns B10, B11, B20, B21, B30, and B31 shown in FIG. 98 are executed based on a predetermined variation display command, and are, for example, the nth variation.
It is executed in the variable display game of times. The effect pattern B10 executes the suggestion effect while executing the specific effect A in parallel, derives a success result in the success / failure effect in the suggestion effect, and executes the advance notice effect. The effect pattern B11 executes the suggestion effect while executing the specific effect B in parallel, derives a success result in the success / failure effect in the suggestion effect, and executes the advance notice effect. The effect pattern B20 executes the suggestion effect while executing the specific effect A in parallel, and executes the advance notice effect even though the failure result is derived in the success / failure effect in the suggestion effect. The effect pattern B21 executes the suggestion effect while executing the specific effect B in parallel, and executes the advance notice effect even though the failure result is derived in the success / failure effect in the suggestion effect. The effect pattern B30 executes the suggestion effect while executing the specific effect A in parallel, derives a failure result in the success / failure effect in the suggestion effect, and does not execute the advance notice effect. The production pattern B31 is
The suggestion effect is executed while executing the specific effect B in parallel, and the failure result is derived in the success / failure effect in the suggestion effect, and the advance notice effect is not executed.

At this time, the game machine 10 determines the success or failure of the suggestion effect depending not only on the presence or absence of the specific effect parallel to the suggestion effect but also on whether the specific effect parallel to the suggestion effect is the specific effect A or the specific effect B. , Whether or not to execute the advance notice effect based on the result of the success / failure effect is produced. As a result, the game machine 10 can improve the interest by suggestive effects according to the type of the specific effects, as well as whether or not the game machine 10 is executed in parallel with the specific effects.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may prepare an effect pattern for performing a notice effect without a specific effect or a suggestion effect, as in the effect pattern C shown in FIG. 99. The effect pattern C is executed based on a predetermined variation display command, and is executed in, for example, one variation display game called the nth variation. The game machine 10 changes the expectation and reliability of the advance notice effect by preparing an effect pattern that performs the advance notice effect without any specific effect or suggestion effect, and diversifies the advance notice content that the player feels. Can be done.

Further, the game machine 10 may prepare an effect pattern in which a notice effect is performed in parallel with the specific effect without suggestion effect, as in the effect pattern D shown in FIG. 99. The effect pattern D is executed based on a predetermined variable display command, for example.
It is executed in one fluctuation display game called the nth fluctuation. The game machine 10 changes the expectation and reliability of the advance notice effect by preparing an effect pattern in which the advance notice effect is performed in parallel with the specific effect without suggestive effect, and diversifies the advance notice content that the player feels. can do.

Further, the game machine 10 executes the suggestion effect in parallel while executing the specific effect, as in the effect patterns E and F shown in FIG. 99, and executes the advance notice effect according to the result derived from the suggestion effect. It may be a thing. When the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect are executed in one fluctuation display game, for example, the nth variation, the specific effect is n from before the nth variation.
It may be executed over the round variation. Further, the specific effect does not have to be executed in parallel with the suggestion effect in the nth variation or in parallel with the advance notice effect as in the effect pattern E. Further, the specific effect may be executed in parallel with the suggestion effect in the nth variation and executed in parallel with at least a part of the advance notice effect, as in the effect pattern F. The effect patterns E and F are executed based on a predetermined variable display command, but may not be related to the start of the specific effect. Also,
The variable display command related to the execution of the effect patterns E and F may be related to the end of the specific effect. By making it possible to execute the specific effect before receiving the variable display command related to the execution of the suggestion effect, the game machine 10 can produce the expectation of the advance notice effect in the execution of the specific effect itself, and the notice content that the player feels can be obtained. Can be diversified.

Further, the game machine 10 executes the suggestion effect in parallel while executing the specific effect, as in the effect pattern G shown in FIG. 99, and executes the advance notice effect in response to the result derived from the suggestion effect. There may be. When the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect are executed in one fluctuation display game, for example, the nth variation, the specific effect is (n + 1) after the nth variation.
) It may be executed across the (n + 1) th variation and follow after the (n + 1) th variation. Although the effect pattern G is executed based on a predetermined variable display command, it may be related to the start of the specific effect or may not be related to the start of the specific effect. .. When the effect pattern G is not related to the start of the specific effect, the game machine 10 can determine the start of the specific effect by the RTC or other event rigger. By enabling the game machine 10 to execute the specific effect even after receiving the variable display command related to the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to produce a feeling of expectation of a further advance notice effect for the execution of the specific effect, and the notice content that the player feels. Can be diversified.

Further, the game machine 10 has the effect patterns B4, B5, B6, B7 shown in FIG. 100.
Various start and end may be set in relation to the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect. For example, in the specific effect in the effect pattern B4, when the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect are executed in one variation display game of the nth variation, the start and end are set in the same variation display game. Further, when the specific effect in the effect pattern B5 is executed in the one-time variation display game in which the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect are the nth variation, the start period is set before the (n-1) th variation. , Set the end to the nth variation. Further, in the specific effect in the effect pattern B6, when the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect are executed in the one variation display game of the nth variation, the start period is set for the nth variation, and the (n + 1) th variation is set. Set the end after the fluctuation. Further, when the specific effect in the effect pattern B7 is executed in the one-time variation display game in which the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect are the nth variation, the start period is set before the (n-1) th variation. , (N + 1) Set the end after the third change.

In this way, the game machine 10 sets the start and end at a timing unrelated to the reception of the variation display command related to the execution of the suggestion effect so that the specific effect can be executed, so that the execution of the specific effect can be further noticed. It is possible to produce a sense of expectation and diversify the content of the notice that the player feels.

Next, an example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect according to the presence / absence of the specific effect and the success / failure of the suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of the seventh embodiment.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 101 (1) will be described. The game machine 10
A pseudo-continuous production (notice production) that has undergone a successful production in a suggestion production without parallel execution with a specific production is executed at a rate (probability) of 25%. In addition, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo continuous effect that has undergone a failure effect in the suggestion effect without parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 0%. Also,
The game machine 10 executes a pseudo continuous effect without a failure effect in the suggestion effect without parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 25%. In addition, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect that has undergone a successful effect in the suggestion effect in parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 45%. Also,
The game machine 10 executes a pseudo continuous effect after a failure effect in the suggestion effect in the presence of parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 0%. Further, the game machine 10 executes the pseudo continuous effect without the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 5%.

As described above, the game machine 10 has undergone a successful effect in the suggestion effect at a rate of 50% when there is no parallel execution with the specific effect such as the advance notice execution rate (no specific effect) shown in FIG. 101 (2). The pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect that has undergone the failure effect in the suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 0%, and the pseudo-continuous effect that has undergone the failure effect in the suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 50%.

Then, in the case of the game machine 10 having parallel execution with the specific effect such as the advance notice execution rate (with the specific effect) shown in FIG. 101 (3), the pseudo-ream that has undergone the successful effect in the suggestion effect at the execution rate of 90%. The effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect that has undergone the failure effect in the suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 0%, and the pseudo-continuous effect that has undergone the failure effect in the suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 10%.

That is, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio to 50% when the suggestion effect and the specific effect are not executed in parallel for the pseudo-continuous effect that has undergone the success effect in the suggestion effect, and when the suggestion effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel. The execution rate is 90%. In this way, the game machine 10 makes the success rate of the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect larger than the success rate of the suggestion effect having no period overlapping with the specific effect. In other words, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect is passed, from the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect does not have a period overlapping with the specific effect. Also increase.

As a result, the game machine 10 changes the expectation and reliability of the notice effect according to whether or not the suggestion effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel, and diversifies the content of the notice that the player feels. Can be done.

Next, another example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect according to the presence / absence of the specific effect and the success / failure of the suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing another example (No. 1) of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of the seventh embodiment.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 102 (1) will be described. The game machine 10
A pseudo-continuous production (notice production) that has undergone a successful production in a suggestion production without parallel execution with a specific production is executed at a rate (probability) of 25%. In addition, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo continuous effect that has undergone a failure effect in the suggestion effect without parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 0%. Also,
The game machine 10 executes a pseudo continuous effect without a failure effect in the suggestion effect without parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 25%. In addition, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous production that has undergone a successful production in the suggestion production in the presence of parallel execution with the specific production at a rate of 50%. Also,
The game machine 10 executes a pseudo continuous effect after a failure effect in the suggestion effect in the presence of parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 0%. Further, the game machine 10 executes at a rate of 0% that there is no pseudo continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the specific effect.

As described above, the game machine 10 has undergone a successful effect in the suggestion effect at a rate of 50% when there is no parallel execution with the specific effect such as the advance notice execution rate (no specific effect) shown in FIG. 102 (2). The pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect that has undergone the failure effect in the suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 0%, and the pseudo-continuous effect that has undergone the failure effect in the suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 50%.

Then, as in the advance notice execution ratio (with specific effect) shown in FIG. 102 (3), when the game machine 10 has parallel execution with the specific effect, the game machine 10 has a pseudo-execution rate of 100% and undergoes a successful effect in the suggestion effect. The continuous effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect that has undergone the failure effect in the suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 0%, and the pseudo-continuous effect that has undergone the failure effect in the suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 0%.

That is, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio to 50% when the suggestion effect and the specific effect are not executed in parallel for the pseudo-continuous effect that has undergone the success effect in the suggestion effect, and when the suggestion effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel. The execution rate is 100%. In this way, the game machine 10 makes the success rate of the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect larger than the success rate of the suggestion effect having no period overlapping with the specific effect. In other words, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect is passed, from the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect does not have a period overlapping with the specific effect. Also increase. In particular, the game machine 10
Definitely executes the advance notice effect for the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect.

As a result, the game machine 10 changes the expectation and reliability of the notice effect according to whether or not the suggestion effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel, and diversifies the content of the notice that the player feels. Can be done.

Next, another example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect according to the presence / absence of the specific effect and the success / failure of the suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing another example (No. 2) of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of the seventh embodiment.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 103 (1) will be described. The game machine 10
A pseudo-continuous production (notice production) that has undergone a successful production in a suggestion production without parallel execution with a specific production is executed at a rate (probability) of 29%. In addition, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo continuous effect that has undergone a failure effect in the suggestion effect without parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 1%. Also,
The game machine 10 executes the pseudo continuous effect without the failure effect in the suggestion effect without the parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 35%. In addition, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous production that has undergone a successful production in the suggestion production in the presence of parallel execution with the specific production at a rate of 20%. Also,
The game machine 10 executes a pseudo continuous effect after a failure effect in the suggestion effect in the presence of parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 5%. Further, the game machine 10 executes the pseudo continuous effect without the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 10%.

In this way, the game machine 10 produces a successful effect in the suggestion effect at an execution rate of about 45% when there is no parallel execution with the specific effect such as the advance notice execution rate (no specific effect) shown in FIG. 103 (2). The pseudo-continuous effect that has passed is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect that has undergone the failure effect in the suggestion effect is executed at a rate of about 1%, and the pseudo-continuous effect that has undergone the failure effect in the suggestion effect is executed at a rate of about 54%.

Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (3), the game machine 10 has undergone a successful effect in the suggestion effect at an execution rate of about 57% when there is parallel execution with the specific effect, as shown in FIG. 103 (3). The pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect that has undergone the failure effect in the suggestion effect is executed at a rate of about 14%, and the pseudo-continuous effect that has undergone the failure effect in the suggestion effect is executed at a rate of about 29%.

That is, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the pseudo continuous effect that has undergone the successful effect in the suggestion effect to about 45% when the suggestion effect and the specific effect are not executed in parallel, and the suggestion effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel. In some cases, the execution rate is about 57%. In this way, the game machine 10 makes the success rate of the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect larger than the success rate of the suggestion effect having no period overlapping with the specific effect. In other words, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect is passed, from the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect does not have a period overlapping with the specific effect. Also increase. In particular, the game machine 1
0 enables the advance notice effect to be executed with a low frequency even when the failure effect is executed in the suggestion effect.

As a result, the game machine 10 changes the expectation and reliability of the notice effect according to whether or not the suggestion effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel, and diversifies the content of the notice that the player feels. Can be done.

Next, an example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect according to the presence / absence and type of the specific effect and the success / failure of the suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing another example (No. 3) of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of the seventh embodiment.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 104 (1) will be described. The game machine 10
A pseudo-continuous production (notice production) that has undergone a successful production in a suggestion production without parallel execution with a specific production is executed at a rate (probability) of 20%. In addition, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo continuous effect that has undergone a failure effect in the suggestion effect without parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 0%. Also,
The game machine 10 executes a pseudo continuous effect without a failure effect in the suggestion effect without parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 30%. Further, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 15% after a successful effect in the suggestion effect in the presence of parallel execution with the timer effect (short), which is a form of the specific effect. Further, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 0% after a failure effect in the suggestion effect in the presence of parallel execution with the timer effect (short).
Further, the game machine 10 executes at a rate of 15% without the pseudo continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the timer effect (short). In addition, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 15% after a successful effect in the suggestion effect in the presence of parallel execution with the timer effect (long), which is a form of the specific effect. In addition, the game machine 10 has a timer effect (
Pseudo-continuous production after failure production in suggestion production with parallel execution with (long) is executed at a rate of 0%. Further, the game machine 10 executes at a rate of 5% without the pseudo continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the timer effect (long). The timer effect (short) and the timer effect (long) will be described in detail later.

As described above, the game machine 10 has undergone a successful effect in the suggestion effect at a rate of 40% when there is no parallel execution with the specific effect such as the advance notice execution rate (no specific effect) shown in FIG. 104 (2). Pseudo-continuous production is executed, and no pseudo-continuous production is executed after the failure effect in the suggestion effect at an execution rate of 60%. It should be noted that the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestion effect at a rate of 0% is not shown.

Then, the game machine 10 has a notice execution ratio (timer effect (short)) shown in FIG. 104 (3).
In the case of parallel execution with a specific effect, 50% of the execution rate is to execute the pseudo-continuous effect that has passed the success effect in the suggestion effect, and 50% of the execution rate is to execute the pseudo-continuous effect that has passed the failure effect in the suggestion effect. Execute without continuous production. In addition, 0 of the pseudo-continuous production after the failure production in the suggestion production
Execution at a percentage of% is not shown.

Then, as in the advance notice execution ratio (with timer effect (long)) shown in FIG. 104 (4), the game machine 10 has a success effect in the suggestion effect at a rate of 75% when there is parallel execution with the specific effect. The pseudo-continuous effect that has passed through the above is executed, and the pseudo-continuous effect that has passed through the failure effect in the suggestion effect is executed at an execution rate of 25%. In addition, 0% of the pseudo-continuous production that has undergone the failure production in the suggestion production
The execution at the ratio of is not shown.

That is, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio to 40% when the suggestion effect and the specific effect are not executed in parallel for the pseudo continuous effect that has undergone the success effect in the suggestion effect, and the suggestion effect and the timer effect (short) are executed in parallel. If this is done, the execution rate is 50%, and if the suggestion effect and the timer effect (long) are executed in parallel, the execution rate is 75%. In this way, the game machine 10
Makes the success rate of the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect larger than the success rate of the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect. Further, the game machine 10 makes the success rate of the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the timer effect (long) larger than the success rate of the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the timer effect (short). In other words, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect is passed, from the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect does not have a period overlapping with the specific effect. Also increase. Further, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect has a period overlapping with the timer effect (long), and the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect has a period overlapping with the timer effect (short). Make it larger than the execution rate of.

As a result, the game machine 10 changes not only whether or not the suggestion effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel, but also the expectation and reliability of the advance notice effect according to the form of the specific effect, and the player feels. The content of the notice to be obtained can be diversified.

Next, another example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect according to the type of the specific effect and the success or failure of the suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing another example (No. 4) of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 106 shows the seventh
It is a figure which shows another example (the 5) of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of the embodiment.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 105 (1) will be described. It should be noted that the suggestion effect without parallel execution with the specific effect may be included in the options, although the illustration is simplified by omitting it from the options.

The game machine 10 executes a pseudo continuous effect at a rate of 35% after a successful effect in the suggestion effect in parallel execution with the timer effect (white), which is a form of the specific effect. In addition, game machine 1
0 is executed at a rate of 35% without the pseudo-continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the timer effect (white). Further, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 20% after a successful effect in the suggestion effect in the presence of parallel execution with the timer effect (red), which is a form of the specific effect. Further, the game machine 10 executes at a rate of 5% that there is no pseudo continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the timer effect (red). Further, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous production after a successful production in the suggestion production in the presence of parallel execution with the timer production (gold), which is a form of the specific production, at a rate of 5%. In addition, game machine 1
0 means that there is no pseudo-continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the timer effect (gold) at a rate of 0%. In addition, timer effect (white) and timer effect (red)
And the timer effect (gold) will be explained in detail later.

That is, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the timer effect (gold) is passed to the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the timer effect (white) and the timer effect (red). Make it larger than the execution rate of the notice effect when the above is passed. Also, the game machine 10
Is the execution rate of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the timer effect (red) is passed, rather than the execution rate of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the timer effect (gold) is passed. Make it smaller and make it larger than the execution rate of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the timer effect (white) is passed.

As a result, the game machine 10 changes not only whether or not the suggestion effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel, but also the expectation and reliability of the advance notice effect according to the form of the specific effect, and the player feels. The content of the notice to be obtained can be diversified.

Next, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 105 (2) will be described. It should be noted that the suggestion effect without parallel execution with the specific effect may be included in the options, although the illustration is simplified by omitting it from the options.

The game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous production that has undergone a successful production in a suggestion production in parallel execution with an even-numbered reach, which is a form of a specific production (reach configuration symbol production), at a rate of 30%.
Further, the game machine 10 executes at a rate of 30% without the pseudo continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the even reach. In addition, the game machine 10 performs a pseudo-continuous production that has undergone a successful production in a suggestion production in parallel execution with an odd-numbered reach (excluding 7 reach), which is a form of a specific production (reach configuration symbol production), at a rate of 20%. Execute. In addition, game machine 1
0 is performed at a rate of 10% without the pseudo-continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the odd reach (excluding 7 reach). In addition, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous production that has undergone a successful production in the suggestion production in parallel execution with the 7 reach, which is a form of the specific production (reach configuration symbol production), at a rate of 9%. In addition, the game machine 10 executes at a rate of 1% without the pseudo-continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the 7 reach. The even-numbered reach, the odd-numbered reach (excluding the 7-reach), and the 7-reach will be described later.

That is, when the game machine 10 has passed the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the even reach or the odd reach (excluding the 7 reach), the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect has a period overlapping with the 7 reach has been passed. Make it larger than the execution rate of the notice production. Further, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect has a period overlapping with the odd number reach (excluding 7 reach), and the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect has a period overlapping with the 7 reach. Make it smaller than the execution rate of, and make it larger than the execution rate of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the even reach is passed.

As a result, the game machine 10 changes not only whether or not the suggestion effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel, but also the expectation and reliability of the advance notice effect according to the form of the specific effect, and the player feels. The content of the notice to be obtained can be diversified.

Next, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 106 (1) will be described. It should be noted that the suggestion effect without parallel execution with the specific effect may be included in the options, although the illustration is simplified by omitting it from the options.

The game machine 10 executes a pseudo continuous effect at a rate of 10% after a successful effect in the suggestion effect in parallel execution with the short SP reach, which is a form of the specific effect. In addition, game machine 1
0 is performed at a rate of 60% without the pseudo-continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the short SP reach. In addition, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous production that has undergone a successful production in a suggestion production with parallel execution with a long SP reach, which is a form of a specific production, at a rate of 10%. In addition, the game machine 10 executes at a rate of 20% without the pseudo-continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the long SP reach. The short SP reach and the long SP reach may be distinguished by comparing the size of the production time, or the long SP reach may be a development reach executed through the short SP reach. .. Further, the short SP reach and the long SP reach are one form of two reach having different expectations, and the production time does not necessarily have to be different. Instead of the short SP reach and the long SP reach, SP reach A and SP reach B may have the same production time but different production modes and expectations. The degree of expectation may be the degree of expectation for deriving a hit, or the degree of expectation for the magnitude of the value that can be obtained at the time of hit.

That is, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the long SP reach is passed, from the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect has a period overlapping with the short SP reach. Also increase.

As a result, the game machine 10 changes not only whether or not the suggestion effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel, but also the expectation and reliability of the advance notice effect according to the form of the specific effect, and the player feels. The content of the notice to be obtained can be diversified.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 106 (2) will be described. It should be noted that the suggestion effect without parallel execution with the specific effect may be included in the options, although the illustration is simplified by omitting it from the options.

The game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous production that has undergone a successful production in the suggestion production in parallel execution with the production stock display "0", which is a form of the specific production, at a rate of 2%. Further, the game machine 10 executes at a rate of 18% that there is no pseudo continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the effect stock display “0”. In addition, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous production that has undergone a successful production in the suggestion production in parallel execution with the production stock display "1", which is a form of the specific production, at a rate of 10%. In addition, the game machine 10 has a production stock display "1".
At a rate of 10%, the suggestion effect with and without the pseudo-continuous effect after the failure effect is executed. In addition, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous production that has undergone a successful production in the suggestion production in parallel execution with the production stock display "2", which is a form of the specific production, at a rate of 14%. Further, the game machine 10 executes at a rate of 6% without the pseudo continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the effect stock display “2”. In addition, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous production that has undergone a successful production in the suggestion production in parallel execution with the production stock display "3", which is a form of the specific production, at a rate of 18%. Further, the game machine 10 executes at a rate of 2% without the pseudo continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the effect stock display “3”. In addition, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous production that has undergone a successful production in the suggestion production in parallel execution with the production stock display "4", which is a form of the specific production, at a rate of 20%. Further, the game machine 10 executes at a rate of 0% that there is no pseudo continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestion effect with the parallel execution with the effect stock display “4”. The production stock display “0”, “1”, [2], “3”, and “4” will be described in detail later.

That is, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the effect stock display “4” is passed, to be the effect stock display “0”, “1”, [2], “3”. It is made larger than the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with is passed. Further, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the effect stock display "3" is passed, and the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect has a period overlapping with the effect stock display "4". It is made smaller than the execution ratio of the advance notice effect, and larger than the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the effect stock display "0", "1", [2] is passed. Further, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the effect stock display “2” is passed, and the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the effect stock display “4” and “3”. It is made smaller than the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the above is passed, and is larger than the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the effect stock display “0” and “1” is passed. Further, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the effect stock display “1” is passed to the period overlapping with the effect stock display “4”, “3”, [2]. It is made smaller than the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having the effect is passed, and larger than the execution rate of the advance notice effect when the suggestion effect having a period overlapping with the effect stock display "0" is passed.

As a result, the game machine 10 changes not only whether or not the suggestion effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel, but also the expectation and reliability of the advance notice effect according to the form of the specific effect, and the player feels. The content of the notice to be obtained can be diversified.

Next, a pseudo continuous effect, which is a form of the advance notice effect, will be described with reference to FIG. 107 as a display example following the variable display example described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a display example of the pseudo-continuous effect of the seventh embodiment.

The display screen 870 shown in FIG. 107 (1) is a display screen following the display screen 850, and temporarily stops the large symbol group 841 (for example, the left symbol “1”, the middle symbol “3”, and the right symbol “1”. ). At this time, the display screen 870 guides the continuation of the pseudo-ream by displaying the pseudo-ream number display 872. For example, the display screen 870 is the first temporary stop display, but by displaying "2" on the pseudo-ream number display 872, the second pseudo-ream change is announced.

The display screen 871 shown in FIG. 107 (2) is a display screen following the display screen 870, and revariates and displays the large symbol group 841. At this time, the display screen 871 guides the continuous pseudo-ream number of times by displaying the pseudo-ream number display 872. For example, the display screen 871 is the second pseudo-continuous variation, but by displaying "2" on the pseudo-continuous number display 872, the number of continuations of the second pseudo-continuous variation is guided.

The display screen 873 shown in FIG. 107 (3) is a display screen following the display screen 871 and temporarily stops the large symbol group 841 (for example, the left symbol “2”, the middle symbol “3”, and the right symbol “2”. ). At this time, the display screen 873 displays "3" on the pseudo-ream number display 872 to display 3
Foretell the second pseudo-continuous change.

In the same manner thereafter, the game machine 10 can continue the pseudo-ream effect while notifying and guiding the number of pseudo-reams. The number of times the pseudo-ream continuation of the pseudo-ream effect can be set to an arbitrary number according to the effect pattern.

Further, although the pseudo continuous effect has been described as one form of the notice effect, the advance notice effect may be any one having a notice effect function, and is not limited to the pseudo continuous effect, but is a pending change as described in the fifth embodiment. It may be an effect, a freeze effect as described in the fourth embodiment, a background change, a cut-in, an effect using a character, or the like.

Here, a suggestion effect parallel to the timer effect (specific effect) before the pseudo continuous effect (notice effect) will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a display example (No. 1) of the timer effect of the seventh embodiment.

The display screen 874 shown in FIG. 108 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 850 (see FIG. 84), and shows a state in which a pseudo continuous fanning effect is being executed as a suggestion effect. The display screen 874 is
The display contents include a large symbol group 841, a pseudo-continuous fanning effect display 852, and a timer effect display 875. The pseudo-continuous fanning effect display 852 displays the pseudo-continuous fanning effect. The timer effect display 875 is a display that guides the start or end of a predetermined effect by the timer display. For example, in the timer effect display 875, the time until the result is derived in the variable display game is 8
Guidance is given while displaying the decrement that it is 0 seconds. The display screen 874 displays a tiger-like character and the characters "Stop!" As a pseudo-continuous fanning effect display 852.
The pseudo-continuous effect display 852 foretells that the player is inciting whether or not the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped, that is, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed. Indicates the state of The large symbol group 841 indicates that the symbol "3" is temporarily stopped on the left symbol and the symbol "5" is temporarily stopped on the right symbol. Further, the large symbol group 841 operates in a mode different from the state in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is changing (the mode of the display screen 850) and the temporary stop state (for example, low-speed fluctuation) in the medium symbol, and whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. It shows the state of fanning the player.

The display screen 876 shown in FIG. 108 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 874, and suggests that the suggestion effect (pseudo-repeated effect) is successful (pseudo-repeated effect is executed). The state of doing) is shown.

The pseudo-continuous fanning effect display 852 on the display screen 876 displays a character like a tiger and the characters "success !!", and the pseudo-continuous fanning effect (success / failure effect of temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern) is derived. It suggests that (developing into a pseudo-continuous production). The timer effect display 875 on the display screen 876 indicates that the time required to derive the result in the variable display game has progressed to 75.5 seconds. The value displayed by the timer effect display 875 does not necessarily have to correspond to an accurate time value, and may be a simple counter. Further, the timer effect display 875 does not need to update the value at a constant speed, and may be updated at an indefinite speed. Further, the timer effect display 875 does not need to update the value one by one.
It may be updated with a variable value. Further, the timer effect display 875 is not limited to updating the value in the subtraction direction, but may be updated in the addition direction, or may be updated while interweaving the subtraction and the addition.

Further, in the large symbol group 841 on the display screen 876, the symbol "3" is temporarily stopped at the left symbol, the symbol "5" is temporarily stopped at the right symbol, the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped at the middle symbol, and the pseudo-ream is fanned. It suggests that the production has led to success. After that, the game machine 10 ends the suggestion effect, and for example, executes a pseudo continuous effect as a notice effect as shown in FIG. 107.

The display screen 877 shown in FIG. 108 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 874, and is a state suggesting the failure of the suggestion effect (pseudo-repeated effect) (suggesting that the pseudo-repeated effect is not executed). The state of doing) is shown.

On the display screen 877, the pseudo-continuous fanning effect display 852 displays a character like a tiger and the characters "failure ...", and the pseudo-continuous fanning effect (success / failure effect of temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern) fails (
It is suggested that failure 1 and failure 2) were derived. The timer effect display 875 on the display screen 877 indicates that the time required to derive the result in the variable display game has progressed to 75.5 seconds.

Further, on the display screen 877, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops at the symbol "3" on the left symbol, temporarily stops at the symbol "5" on the right symbol, displays the symbol in a variable state on the middle symbol, and is pseudo-continuously fanned. It suggests that the production leads to failure and does not develop into a pseudo-continuous production. In addition, the failure of the pseudo-continuous fanning effect may also suggest other developments, for example, suggestion that the effect develops into SP reach or that the effect does not develop.

Next, another example of the display mode of the timer effect (specific effect) will be described with reference to FIG. 109.
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a display example (No. 2) of the timer effect of the seventh embodiment. The display mode of the timer effect makes it possible to change the timer value as the initial display mode and the background as the constant display mode.

In the timer effect display 875 shown in FIG. 109 (1), the timer value as the initial display mode is set to "6".
0:00 ”, and the background as a constant display mode is white. The timer effect display 875 produces a timer effect as a form of a specific effect. Further, the timer effect display 875 produces a timer effect (white) as a form of a specific effect by setting the background as a constant display mode to white.

Further, in the timer effect display 875a shown in FIG. 109 (2), the timer value as the initial display mode is "30:00", that is, the timer effect (short) is set, and the background as the constant display mode is white. The timer effect display 875a produces a timer effect (short) as a form of a specific effect by displaying a small value as a timer value as an initial display mode.

Further, in the timer effect display 875b shown in FIG. 109 (3), the timer value as the initial display mode is "90:00", that is, the timer effect (long) is set, and the background as the constant display mode is white. The timer effect display 875b produces a timer effect (long) as a form of a specific effect by displaying a large value as a timer value as an initial display mode.

Further, in the timer effect display 875c shown in FIG. 109 (4), the timer value as the initial display mode is set to "60:00" and the background as the constant display mode is set to red. Timer effect display 87
In 5c, a timer effect (red) is produced as a form of a specific effect by setting the background as a constant display mode to red.

Further, in the timer effect display 875d shown in FIG. 109 (5), the timer value as the initial display mode is "60:00", and the background as the constant display mode is gold. Timer effect display 87
In 5d, a timer effect (gold) is produced as a form of a specific effect by setting the background as a constant display mode to gold.

It should be noted that the execution ratio of the advance notice effect is different depending on the timer effect (short) and the timer effect (long), and the timer effect (red) and the timer effect (gold), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the length of the waiting time from setting the timer to the start of the countdown (for example, the period during which the state displayed in the waiting time and the number of seconds continues) (timer effect (short waiting time) and timer effect (waiting time) The execution rate of the advance notice effect may be different depending on the length)). In addition, the length of the process in which the timer is set (for example, whether the count-up speed for counting up from 00:00 to 00:01 seconds (for example, 60 seconds)) is high or low (timer effect). The execution rate of the advance notice effect may be different depending on (count-up speed is low) and timer effect (count-up speed is high). Further, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect may be different depending on whether the number of timers is large or small (timer effect (small number of timers) and timer effect (large number of timers)). Further, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect may be different depending on the size of the timer (timer effect (timer large) and timer effect (timer small)). Further, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect may be different depending on whether the additional time (replenishment seconds) generated during the timer countdown is large or small (timer effect (additional time is large) and timer effect (additional time is small)). ..

Next, a display mode of the reach configuration symbol effect (specific effect) will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a display example of a temporary stop during reach according to the seventh embodiment. The reach configuration symbol effect is an effect by combining the symbols constituting the reach in the large symbol group 841, for example, the symbol of the left symbol and the symbol of the right symbol. In the large symbol group 841, other symbols not related to the reach configuration, for example, the medium symbol may be temporarily stopped or may be in a change accompanied by symbol switching.

The display screen 878 shown in FIG. 110 (1) is, for example, a display screen after the display screen 850 (see FIG. 84), and is a display screen for performing a reach configuration symbol effect as a form of a specific effect. On the display screen 878, the left symbol and the right symbol constituting the reach of the large symbol group 841 each display "2", and the middle symbol not related to the reach configuration displays "3". Display screen 87
Reference numeral 8 is an example of even-numbered reach in which the left symbol and the right symbol each display an even number.

The display screen 879 shown in FIG. 110 (2) is, for example, a display screen after the display screen 850 (see FIG. 84), and is a display screen for performing a reach configuration symbol effect as a form of a specific effect. On the display screen 879, the left symbol and the right symbol constituting the reach of the large symbol group 841 each display "5", and the middle symbol not related to the reach configuration displays "3". Display screen 87
9 is an example of odd reach (excluding 7 reach) in which the left symbol and the right symbol each display an odd number.

The display screen 880 shown in FIG. 110 (3) is, for example, a display screen after the display screen 850 (see FIG. 84), and is a display screen for performing a reach configuration symbol effect as a form of a specific effect. On the display screen 880, the left symbol and the right symbol constituting the reach of the large symbol group 841 each display "7", and the middle symbol not related to the reach configuration displays "3". Display screen 88
0 is an example of 7 reach in which the left symbol and the right symbol each display an odd number.

The even-numbered reach, odd-numbered reach (excluding 7-reach), and 7-reach categories in the reach configuration symbol production are examples of the categories in the reach configuration symbol production. The division in the reach composition symbol production can be any division. Of course, if the symbols constituting the large symbol group 841 do not depend on numbers, or even if they include characters, they can be classified based on characters, backgrounds, colors, and the like.

Next, a hold change fanning effect (suggestion effect) parallel to the SP reach effect (specific effect) before the hold change effect (notice effect) will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a display example of the SP reach effect of the seventh embodiment.

The display screen 881 shown in FIG. 111 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 850 (see FIG. 84), and shows a state in which the hold change fanning effect is being executed as a suggestion effect. The display screen 881 includes a large symbol group 882, a reach effect display 883, and a hold change fanning effect display 884 as display contents. The large symbol group 882 is the large symbol group 84 displayed in the center of the display screen 850.
It is a symbol group display in which the size of 1 is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner. In the large symbol group 882, the left symbol and the right symbol constituting the reach are temporarily stopped and displayed as "7", respectively, and the medium symbol not related to the reach configuration is variably displayed with the symbol switching.

The reach effect display 883 is a form of a specific effect. While the large symbol group 882 constitutes and displays the reach, the reach effect display 883 produces the reach by displaying with a character or the like. For example, the reach effect display 883 directs the process of deriving a hit through a game between a character such as a lion and a character such as a tiger.

The pending change fanning effect display 884 is a form of suggestive effect. Hold change fanning effect display 88
Reference numeral 4 denotes an action display in which a character such as a pig acts on the hold digestion display 846.
For example, a character such as a pig promotes a change of the hold digestion icon by a gesture such as hitting the hold digestion icon displayed by the hold digestion display 846.

The display screen 885 shown in FIG. 111 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 881, and shows a state in which the hold change fanning effect displays the execution result as a suggestion effect. The hold change fanning effect display 884 on the display screen 885 shows how the hold digestion icon has changed due to the successful action of the hold digestion display 846 by a character such as a pig. For example, the hold digestion icon indicates that the expectation of hit derivation has changed (up) by changing from white to red. The hold change fanning effect display 884 on the display screen 885 shows how a character like a pig is pleased in response to the change in the hold digestion icon.

The display screen 886 shown in FIG. 111 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 881, and shows a state in which the hold change fanning effect displays the execution result as a suggestion effect. The hold change fanning effect display 884 on the display screen 886 shows that the hold digestion icon has not changed due to the failure of the pig-like character to work on the hold digestion display 846. For example, the hold digest icon remains white to indicate that there is no change in the expectation of hit derivation. Display screen 8
The hold change fanning effect display 884 in 86 shows how a character like a pig leaves in response to the fact that the hold digestion icon has not changed.

In addition, the hold change fanning effect is replaced with the hold digestion display 846 or the hold digestion display 84.
In addition to 6, the hold display 845 may be produced to incite a change in hold.
Further, the hold digestion icon displayed by the hold digestion display 846 and the hold standby icon displayed by the hold display 845 are not limited to white and red, but are displayed in a display mode according to the degree of expectation and reliability such as blue, yellow, and rainbow colors. can do. Further, the change in the display mode of the hold digestion icon and the hold standby icon is not limited to the color, and can be a display mode composed of a shape, an operation, a size, or a combination thereof according to the degree of expectation and reliability.

In addition, the hold change fanning effect not only produces the degree of expectation and reliability from the change in the display mode of the hold digest icon and the hold wait icon, but also works on the hold digest icon and the hold wait icon (for example, like a pig). The degree of expectation and reliability may be produced by displaying the motion of the character. For example, in the hold change fanning effect, the degree of expectation and reliability can be produced by displaying the movement of a character such as a pig that is displayed along with the change in the display mode of the hold digestion icon and the hold standby icon. More specifically, the degree of expectation and the degree of reliability may be produced by the size of the gesture that a character such as a pig is pleased with. In addition, the hold change fanning effect may produce the degree of expectation and reliability by displaying the movement of a character such as a pig that is displayed without changing the display mode of the hold digestion icon or the hold standby icon.

Next, with respect to the production stock (production stock display production) which is a form of the specific production, FIG. 11
2 to 114 will be described. FIG. 112 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a display example of the effect stock of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 113 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a display example of the effect stock of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 114 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a display example of the effect stock of the seventh embodiment.

The display screen 891 shown in FIG. 112 (1) shows a display screen during symbol variation (variation display game is being executed). The display screen 891 includes two sets of decorative symbols (large symbol group 841, small symbol group 842), a hold display 845, and a hold digestion display 846 in the display contents.

On the display screen 891, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the large symbol group 841 are fluctuating at high speed, indicating that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the variation display state. Display screen 89
In 1, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 842 fluctuate at high speed, indicating that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the variation display state.

On the display screen 891, the hold display 845 indicates that the number of hold storages is "4" by the four hold storage displays (icon display).
On the display screen 891, the hold digestion display 846 is a hold memory display (icon display) in the frame.
Is displayed, indicating that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state.

The display screen 893 shown in FIG. 112 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 891. The large symbol group 841 on the display screen 893 indicates a state in which the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and reach is generated. In the large symbol group 841 on the display screen 893, the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed, and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped with the symbol "7" swinging. That is, the display screen 893
The large symbol group 841 in the above indicates a state in which a reach in which the hit mark is the symbol "7" has occurred. In addition, the display screen 893 includes a hold change fanning effect display 884 as a form of the suggestion effect.
The hold change fanning effect display 884 displays the action of a character such as a pig acting on the hold digestion display 846. For example, a character such as a pig promotes a change of the hold digestion icon by a gesture such as hitting the hold digestion icon displayed by the hold digestion display 846.

The display screen 894 shown in FIG. 112 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 893, and shows a state (a state immediately after the start) in which the stock release effect, which is a form of the specific effect, is performed.

The display screen 894 has a production opportunity stock display 896 and a stock release production display 895.
The display content includes the effect mode stock display 897 and the like. The production opportunity stock display 896 displays four fire extinguisher images (images showing the production opportunity stock) showing items in the form of a fire extinguisher, whereby there are four opportunities for a predetermined production (effect of extinguishing a flame). It shows that there are times.
The four fire extinguisher image displays correspond to the effect stock display "4". If there are three fire extinguisher image displays, it corresponds to the effect stock display "3", if it corresponds to two, it corresponds to the effect stock display "2", and if it corresponds to one, it corresponds to the effect stock display "1". However, if there is no production stock display, "
Corresponds to "0".

On the display screen 894, the hold change fanning effect display 884 as a form of the suggestion effect and the stock release effect (effect stock display “0” to “4”) which is a form of the specific effect are executed in parallel. Show the situation. The hold change fanning effect display 884 on the display screen 894 indicates that the hold digestion display 846 is successfully approached by a character such as a pig, and the hold digestion icon has changed. In addition, the pending change fanning effect display 884 is the effect opportunity stock display 89.
The success / failure probability of the success / failure effect in the suggestion effect can be different depending on the display mode of 6, the stock open effect display 895, and the effect mode stock display 897. Further, the hold change fanning effect display 884 can change the notification content of the advance notice effect after the successful suggestion effect depending on the display modes of the effect opportunity stock display 896, the stock open effect display 895, and the effect mode stock display 897.

Up to this point, the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect are completed, but the effect stock display effect after the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect are completed will be continuously described. The production opportunity stock display 896 holds as many production opportunity stocks as the number of production opportunities, which suggests (clarifies) the opportunity (number of times) for a predetermined production (flame extinguishing effect) to be performed at the same time as the start of the stock opening effect. It starts to be displayed in the (displayed) state. The stock release effect display 895 on the display screen 894 displays the characters "Extinguish the flame !!" and guides the player to the outline of the stock release effect.
The effect mode stock display 897 on the display screen 894 has three flame images (images showing the effect mode stock) showing the items of the flame mode and a push button image (effect mode stock) showing the items of the push button 25 mode. indicate.

For example, the item in the form of the push button 25 suggests that the push button operation effect is performed, and the item in the form of the flame suggests that the push button operation effect is not performed (cancels the push button operation effect). To do. In other words, for items in the form of flame, the push button operation effect may not be executed (although there is a scene where the push button operation effect is executed later, the push button operation effect may not be executed in that scene. That) is suggested. That is, the item in the form of flame is a production mode stock that suggests a negative content.

That is, the effect mode stock display 897 on the display screen 894 indicates that when the stock release effect is completed as it is, the push button operation effect is not performed as the stock consumption effect (it does not develop into the push button operation effect). There is.

The effect mode stock display 897 starts to be displayed in a state of holding (displaying) the effect mode stock suggesting the effect mode of the stock consumption effect at the start of the stock release effect.
The display screen 898 shown in FIG. 113 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 894, and shows a state in which the stock release effect is performed.

On the display screen 898, the stock release effect display 895 displays an image indicating that the push button is being pressed by hand, the characters "press!", And a timer, and the push button 25 is displayed to the player. Push button 2 to inform you that it is time to perform the operation of
The operation of 5 is urged. Further, on the display screen 898, the stock opening effect display 895 is displayed.
The text "Chance is 4 more times!" Is displayed to indicate the remaining number of stock releases in the stock release effect.

Further, on the display screen 898, the production opportunity stock display 896 displays one of the four fire extinguisher images (images showing the production opportunity stock) semi-transparently, and is currently the fire extinguisher image (image showing the production opportunity stock).
It indicates that a predetermined production corresponding to the production opportunity stock) is in progress.

The display screen 899 shown in FIG. 113 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 898, and shows a state in which the stock release effect is performed.
On the display screen 899, the stock release effect display 895 displays the characters "the chance is three more times!" To indicate the remaining number of times the stock is released in the stock release effect. Further, on the display screen 899, the production opportunity stock display 896 displays three fire extinguisher images (the semi-transparent fire extinguisher image has disappeared), and corresponds to the first production opportunity stock. It indicates that the stock release (predetermined production) has been completed.

In the display screen 899, in the production opportunity stock display 896, the portion displaying the semi-transparent fire extinguisher image is set to a blank display, and the display area (size) is not changed. By maintaining the display area in this way, the game machine 10 can give the player a sense of expectation that an additional production opportunity stock will be given during the stock opening effect.

Further, on the display screen 899, the effect mode stock display 897 displays two flame images (image showing the effect mode stock) and one push button image (image showing the effect mode stock), and one flame. Removal of images (production mode stock that suggests negative content) (
It shows that if the fire extinguishing) is successful, that is, if the remaining three stocks are released and the two flame images are successfully removed, the push button operation effect is performed as the stock consumption effect.

The display screen 900 shown in FIG. 113 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 899, and shows a state in which the stock release effect is performed. More specifically, the display screen 900 shows a state in which the final stock release in the stock release effect is performed.

On the display screen 900, the stock release effect display 895 displays an image indicating that the push button is being pressed by hand, the characters "press!", And a timer, and the push button 25 is displayed to the player. It informs that it is the timing to perform the operation of, and prompts the operation of the push button 25. Further, on the display screen 900, the stock opening effect display 895 is displayed.
The text "Last chance !!" is displayed to indicate the remaining number of stock releases in the stock release production. Further, on the display screen 900, the effect opportunity stock display 896 displays only one fire extinguisher image of the semi-transparent display, indicating that a predetermined effect corresponding to the fire extinguisher image is currently in progress. ing.

The display screen 901 shown in FIG. 114 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 900, and is a state in which all flame images (effect mode stock suggesting negative contents) cannot be removed by the stock opening effect. Is shown.

On the display screen 901, the stock release effect display 895 displays the characters "fire extinguishing failed !!" to inform that the flame image (effect mode stock suggesting negative content) could not be removed by the stock release effect. ing. Further, on the display screen 901, the effect mode stock display 897 displays a semi-transparent push button image and a flame image, and shows how the push button is extinguished by the flame. That is, the effect mode stock display 897 indicates that the push button operation effect is not performed as the stock consumption effect (it does not develop into the push button operation effect).

After that, the game machine 10 starts the stock consumption effect and performs an effect based on the display mode of the effect mode stock display 897 (for example, displays a normal symbol variation (display screen 89).
After shifting to 3, the middle symbol is stopped fluctuating)).

The display screen 902 shown in FIG. 114 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 900, and shows a state in which all flame images (effect mode stock suggesting negative contents) can be removed by the stock opening effect. Shown.

On the display screen 902, the stock release effect display 895 displays the characters "fire extinguishing successful !!" to inform that the flame image (effect mode stock suggesting negative content) can be removed by the stock release effect. There is. Further, on the display screen 902, the effect mode stock display 897 displays only the push button image, indicating that the flame image has been removed. That is, the effect mode stock display 897 indicates that the push button operation effect is performed (developed into the push button operation effect) as the stock consumption effect.

After that, the game machine 10 starts the stock consumption effect, and performs the push button operation effect as the stock consumption effect based on the display mode of the effect mode stock display 897.
The above is the stock production in the game machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. In this way, the game machine 1
0 can perform a stock effect (notice notice) that reduces the effect mode stock instead of adding the effect mode stock in the stock open effect.

Further, in the above-mentioned production, the production opportunity stock was not performed by the stock-giving effect (although the production opportunity stock was added without the production), but the game machine 10 is not limited to this.
You may give a production opportunity stock by performing a stock-giving effect.

In this case, for example, the game machine 10 may perform a stock deprivation effect of stripping the production opportunity stock with the production instead of the stock granting effect of granting the production opportunity stock with the production. Good.

For example, the game machine 10 starts a stock deprivation effect from a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of effect opportunity stocks are given, and as the stock deprivation effect progresses, the effect opportunity stock is deprived and the stock is deprived. It is sufficient to perform the stock release production as many times as the number of production opportunity stocks remaining at the end of the production.

Further, the game machine 10 may perform both the stock giving effect and the stock deprivation effect. For example, when a push button image is formed as a result of the reel effect, the push button image is given, and when a skull image is formed, the push button image is formed. May be stripped. According to this
The game machine 10 can improve the variety of production, prevent the mannerism, and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 10 (including a modified example) of the seventh embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The game machine 10 executes advance notice effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing advance notice effect (for example, pseudo continuous effect) and execution of advance notice effect in relation to success or failure of success or failure effect. A specific suggestion effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous fanning effect) and a specific period for producing the derivation process of the result of the game in a period overlapping with the suggestion effect. Includes specific effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect (for example, a timer effect). The suggestion effect means is a first success / failure effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous fan effect executed in parallel with the timer effect), or a second success / failure effect having no period overlapping with the specific effect. It is possible to execute an effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect that is not executed in parallel with the timer effect), and the first probability (for example, 90%) of executing the suggestion effect after the success of the first success / failure effect is set. It is made larger than the second probability (for example, 50%) of executing the suggestion effect after the success of the success / failure effect of 2 (see FIG. 101).

(2) The game machine 10 executes the advance notice effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing the advance notice effect (for example, pseudo continuous effect) and the advance notice effect in relation to the success or failure of the success / failure effect. A specific suggestion effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous fanning effect) and a specific period for producing the derivation process of the result of the game in a period overlapping with the suggestion effect. Includes specific effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect (for example, a timer effect). The specific effect means is the first specific effect (for example, timer effect (long)) of the first effect mode, or the second effect different from the first effect mode.
It is possible to execute the second specific effect (for example, timer effect (short)) of the effect mode of. The suggestion effect means is a first success / failure effect having a period overlapping with the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous fan effect executed in parallel with the timer effect (long)), or a period overlapping with the second specific effect. It is possible to execute a second success / failure effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous fanning effect executed in parallel with a timer effect (short)), and a first suggestion effect is executed after the success of the first success / failure effect. A second that performs a suggestive effect after a probability (eg, 75%) and the success of the second success / failure effect.
(For example, 50%) is different from the probability of (see FIG. 104).

(3) The game machine 10 executes advance notice effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing advance notice effect (for example, pseudo continuous effect) and execution of advance notice effect in relation to success or failure of success or failure effect. A specific suggestion effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous fanning effect) and a specific period for producing the derivation process of the result of the game in a period overlapping with the suggestion effect. Includes specific effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect (for example, a timer effect). The specific effect means is the first specific effect (for example, timer effect (long)) of the first effect mode, or the second effect different from the first effect mode.
It is possible to execute the second specific effect (for example, timer effect (short)) of the effect mode of. The suggestion effect means is a first success / failure effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous fan effect executed in parallel with the timer effect), or a second effect having no period overlapping with the specific effect.
(For example, a pseudo-continuous fanning effect that is not executed in parallel with the timer effect) can be executed, and the first probability (for example, 60%) of executing the suggestion effect after the success of the first success / failure effect.
(= (15 + 15) / (15 + 15 + 15 + 5))) is made larger than the second probability (for example, 40%) of executing the suggestion effect after the success of the second success / failure effect, and among the first success / failure effects. A third success / failure effect that has a period that overlaps with the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous fan effect that is executed in parallel with the timer effect (long)), or a fourth effect that has a period that overlaps with the second specific effect. The success / failure effect (for example, timer effect (short)) can be executed, and the third probability (for example, 75%) of executing the suggestion effect after the success of the third success / failure effect and the fourth.
It is different from the fourth probability (for example, 50%) of executing the suggestion effect after the success of the success / failure effect of (see FIG. 104).

(4) The game machine 10 has a notice effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) and a suggestion effect suggesting execution of the advance effect (for example, a suggestion effect (game control device 100, effect control device 300).
For example, a suggestion effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a pseudo continuous fan effect, and a specific effect means (for example, a timer effect) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a timer effect) in a period overlapping with the suggestion effect (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game control device 100, the effect control device 300), and the like. The suggestion effect means can suggest the execution of the advance notice effect by making the suggestion effect a specific effect mode, and the suggestion effect (for example, a pseudo-repeated operation executed in parallel with the timer effect) is executed in duplicate with the specific effect. A suggestive effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect that is not executed in parallel with the timer effect) is a specific effect that executes the first probability (for example, 90%) in which the effect) is a specific effect mode without overlapping with the specific effect. Greater than the second probability (eg, 50%) of the embodiment (see Figure 101).

(5) The game machine 10 has a notice effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) and a suggestion effect suggesting execution of the advance effect (for example, a suggestion effect (game control device 100, effect control device 300).
For example, a suggestion effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a pseudo continuous fan effect, and a specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a timer effect) in a period overlapping with the suggestion effect. (Game control device 100, effect control device 300) and the like. The specific effect means is a first specific effect of the first effect mode (for example, a timer effect (long)) or a second specific effect of a second effect mode different from the first effect mode (for example, a timer effect (short)). )) Can be executed. The suggestion effect means can suggest the execution of the advance notice effect by making the suggestion effect a specific effect mode, and can execute the suggestion effect overlapping with the first specific effect or the second specific effect, and the first specific effect can be executed. The first suggestive effect, which is executed in duplicate with the effect, is the specific effect mode.
(For example, 75%) is different from the second probability (for example, 50%) that the suggestion effect to be executed overlapping with the second specific effect is the specific effect mode (see FIG. 104).

(6) The game machine 10 has a notice effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) and a suggestion effect suggesting execution of the advance effect (for example, a suggestion effect (game control device 100, effect control device 300).
For example, a suggestion effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a pseudo continuous fan effect, and a specific effect means (for example, a timer effect) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a timer effect) in a period overlapping with the suggestion effect (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game control device 100, the effect control device 300), and the like. The suggestion effect means can suggest the execution of the advance notice effect by making the suggestion effect a specific effect mode, and the suggestion effect (for example, a pseudo-repeated operation executed in parallel with the timer effect) is executed in duplicate with the specific effect. The first probability (for example, 90%) that the effect) is a specific effect mode, and the suggestion effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect that is not executed in parallel with the timer effect) that is executed without overlapping with the specific effect are the specific effects. It differs from the second probability (eg, 50%), which is an aspect (see FIG. 101).

The above processing function can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program that describes the processing content of the function that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing function is realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices,
There are optical disks, optical magnetic recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, and CD (Compact Disk) -RO.
There are M / RW (ReWritable) and the like. MO (Magneto-Optical disk) is used as the magneto-optical recording medium.
And so on.

When distributing a program, for example, a DVD or C on which the program is recorded
Portable recording media such as D-ROMs are sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes the processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute the processing according to the program. In addition, the computer can sequentially execute processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from the server computer connected via the network.

In addition, at least a part of the above processing functions is performed by DSP (Digital Signal Processor), A.
SIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), PLD (Programmable Logic De)
It can also be realized by an electronic circuit such as vice).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the above-mentioned gaming balls and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

Also, the disclosed embodiments should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. Further, each configuration of the above-described embodiment and modification may be applied in combination. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description.
It is intended to include all changes within the meaning and scope of the claims.

10 Game machine 41,830 Display device 100,100a Game control device 300 Production control device

Claims (1)

A notice production means that can execute a notice production, and
Suggestion effect means capable of executing the suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the advance notice effect,
A specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect in a period overlapping with the suggestion effect,
Including
The suggestion effect means can suggest the execution of the advance notice effect by making the suggestion effect a specific effect mode, and the suggestion effect to be executed overlapping with the specific effect does not overlap with the specific effect. Having the above-mentioned suggestive effect to be executed,
Game machine.

Images